Lexus GX470 Owner's manual

Lexus GX470 Owner's manual
FOREWORD
Congratulations on your selection of this Lexus. In Lexus vehicles we have invested all our engineering and design resources; all
the know–how we have gained in over 60 years of making automobiles; the highest motivation of our most talented employees; and
our tradition of incessant striving toward ever greater quality.
This Owner’s Manual explains the features of your new Lexus. Please read it and follow the instructions carefully so that you can
enjoy many years of safe motoring.
When it comes to service, remember that your Lexus dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete
satisfaction. Your Lexus dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.
If there is not a Lexus dealer near you, or you need emergency assistance for any reason, please call the following number:
U.S. OWNERS
When traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:
Lexus Roadside Assistance 1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free)
(1–800–255–3987)
HAWAII:
Lexus Customer Service Assistance
1–800–25–LEXUS (Toll–Free)
(1–800–255–3987)
CANADIAN OWNERS
When traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:
Lexus Roadside Assistance/Customer Service
1–800–26–LEXUS (Toll–Free)
(1–800–265–3987)
Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.
All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Lexus policy
of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may find
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
i
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Occupant restraint systems
Lexus encourages you and your family to take the time to read
Section 1–6 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In terms of
helping you understand how you can receive the maximum
benefit of the occupant restraint systems this vehicle provides,
Section 1–6 of this Owner’s Manual is the most important
Section for you and your family to read.
Section 1–6 describes the function and operation concerning
seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint systems of
this vehicle and some potential hazards you should be aware
of. These systems work together along with the overall
structure of this vehicle in order to provide occupant restraint
in the event of a crash. The effect of each system is enhanced
when it is used properly and together with other systems. No
single occupant restraint system can, by itself, provide you or
your family with the equal level of restraint which these
systems can provide when used together. That is why it is
important for you and your family to understand the purpose
and proper use of each of these systems and how they relate
to each other.
The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help reduce
the possibility of death or serious injury in the event of a
collision. None of these systems, either individually or
together, can ensure that there is no injury in the event of
collision. However, the more you know about these systems
and how to use them properly, the greater your chances
become of surviving an accident without death or serious
injury.
Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of the
vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear seat
belts properly at all times. Children should always be secured
in child restraint systems that are appropriate for their age and
size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) airbags are, as
their names imply, designed to work with, and be supplemental
to, seat belts and are not substitutes for them. SRS airbags
can be very effective in reducing the risk of head and chest
injuries by preventing contact of the head and chest with
interior portions of the vehicle.
In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with
tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS airbags
makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources of
serious injury if an occupant is too close to an airbag, or if an
object or some part of his or her body has been placed between
the occupant and the airbag at the time of deployment. This
is just one example of how the instructions in Section 1–6 of
this Owner’s Manual will help ensure proper use of the
occupant restraint systems, and increase the safety they can
provide to you and your family in the event of an accident.
Lexus recommends you to read the provisions in Section 1–6
carefully and refer to them as needed during your time of
ownership of this vehicle.
ii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Event data recorder
Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control certain
aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in driving and
maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Besides storing
data useful for troubleshooting, there is a system to record data
in a crash or a near car crash event. This is called an Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a
crash or a near car crash event, this device may record some
or all of the following information:
Engine speed
Whether the brake pedal was applied or not
If your vehicle is equipped with a vehicle stability control (VSC)
system, its Electronic Control Unit (ECU) may contain another
EDR. There are a variety of driving situations which include
activating the VSC under which the VSC EDR will record
certain information. The VSC EDR may record some or all of
the following information:
Behavior of the vehicle
Steering wheel angle
Vehicle speed
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
To what extent the brake pedal was applied
Vehicle speed
To what extent the ECU controlled the condition of the 4
wheels
To what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed
Vehicle stability control system diagnostic data
Position of the transmission selector lever
Whether the driver and front passenger wore the seat belts
or not
Driver’s seat position
The information above is intended to be used for the purpose
of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike general data
recorders, the EDR does not record sound data such as
conversation between passengers.
Front passenger’s occupant classification
SRS airbag deployment data
SRS airbag system diagnostic data
iii
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Lexus will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third
party except when:
An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leasing
company for a leased vehicle) is obtained
Officially requested by the police or other authorities
Used as a defense for Lexus in a law suit
Ordered by the court
Your new vehicle is covered by the following Lexus limited
warranties:
New vehicle warranty
Emission control systems warranty
Others
However, if necessary Lexus will:
For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet”.
Use the data for research on Lexus vehicle safety
performance
Your responsibility for maintenance
Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes
without disclosing details of the vehicle owner, and only
when it is deemed necessary
Disclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identification
information to a non–Lexus organization for research
purposes
iv
New vehicle warranty
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance is performed. Section 5 of this Owner’s Manual
gives details of these maintenance requirements. Included in
Section 6 is general maintenance. For scheduled
maintenance information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Important health and safety information about
your Lexus
CAUTION
WARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and a wide variety of automobile components
contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects and
other reproductive harm. In addition, oils, fuels and
fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste
produced by component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands
after handling. Used engine oil contains chemicals
that have caused cancer in laboratory animals.
Always protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of
your Lexus
A wide variety of non–genuine spare parts and accessories for
Lexus vehicles are currently available in the market. You
should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and
is not responsible for their performance, repair, or
replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse
effect they may have on, your Lexus vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non–genuine Lexus
products. Modification with non–genuine Lexus products
could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even
violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or
performance problems resulting from the modification may not
be covered under warranty.
If you install any Genuine Accessories such as a bull–bar,
winch, etc., consult your Lexus dealer.
Spark ignition system of your Lexus
The spark ignition system in your Lexus meets all
requirements of the Canadian Interference–Causing
Equipment Standard.
Installation of a mobile two–way radio system
As the installation of a mobile two–way radio system in your
vehicle could affect electronic systems such as the multiport
fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system,
cruise control system, anti–lock brake system, SRS airbag
system and seat belt pretensioner system, be sure to check
with your Lexus dealer for precautionary measures or special
instructions regarding installation.
v
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT YOUR LEXUS
Tires and loading on your Lexus
On–pavement and off–road driving tips
Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the
excess load may result in the deterioration of steering
ability and braking ability, leading to an accident.
Check the tire inflation pressure periodically and be
sure to keep the load limits given in this Owner’s
Manual. For details about tire inflation pressure and
load limits, see pages 574 and 483.
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility vehicles
have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently
from an ordinary passenger car because it is designed for
off–road use also. In addition, this vehicle has a higher ground
clearance and center of gravity than that of an ordinary
passenger car. This vehicle design feature causes this type of
vehicle to be more likely to rollover. Failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control, accidents or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. Be sure to read
“Off–road vehicle precautions” on page 459 and “Off–road
driving precautions” on page 464.
Scrapping of your Lexus
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your
Lexus contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped
with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are,
this may cause an accident such as a fire. Be sure to have the
systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed
and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Lexus
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
vi
Leak detection pump
This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This
check is done approximately five hours after the engine is
turned off. So you may hear sound coming from underneath
the luggage compartment for several minutes. It does not
indicate a malfunction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
The contents of this manual are explained briefly on this
page to help you make the best use of the manual. Please
read this page and the rest of the Owner’s Manual
carefully to make sure you fully understand the operation
of your vehicle.
SECTION 1 — INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
The vehicle’s equipment is divided into the 7 groups listed
below. Use of the equipment is explained, including any points
you should pay particular attention to.
1. Keys and doors
2. Switches
This will help you enjoy safe and comfortable driving.
3. Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4. Interior equipment
The table of contents and the pictorial index provide easy
reference to the appropriate pages.
5. Exterior equipment
BASIC OPERATION — QUICK REFERENCE
7. Steering wheel and mirrors
Operation of basic equipment is briefly explained in an easily
understandable way for quick reference.
SECTION 2 — AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
6. Occupant restraint systems
The features of the vehicle’s air conditioning and audio are
explained in detail. Be sure to read this Section so that you can
make full use of them.
SECTION 3 — STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine, driving, stopping, operation of features
affecting vehicle handling, hints on vehicle safety and safe
driving techniques are all explained. Please read everything
in this Section, and remember — drive safely!
vii
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
SECTION 4 — IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Safety symbol
This Section explains what to do in the event of an urgent
situation such as the engine not starting or getting a flat tire,
etc. If such a problem occurs, check the contents of this
Owner’s Manual and follow the instructions given.
SECTION 5 — MAINTENANCE
This Section explains the importance of regular maintenance.
Regular and periodic inspection and maintenance of your
Lexus will help to keep your vehicle in its best condition.
SECTION 6 — SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Simple maintenance procedure and service data are provided
here for your reference should you wish to perform inspection
and maintenance yourself.
INDEX
The page number is listed for each item in the Owner’s Manual
so that you can rapidly find the item and page you are
searching for.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
The information you need to know for appropriate servicing at
the gas station is provided here.
QUICK INDEX
This is designed so that you can quickly find the needed
information when an urgent situation arises.
viii
In this manual, you will also see a circle with a slash through
it. This means “Do not”, “Do not do this”, or “Do not let this
happen”.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Safety and vehicle damage warnings
In this manual you will see CAUTION and NOTICE warnings.
These are used in the following ways:
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause
injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are
informed about what you must or must not do in order
to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause
damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning is
ignored. You are informed about what you must or must
not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to
your Lexus and its equipment.
Your Lexus Owner ’s Manual provides you with a
considerable amount of information. To use this
information most effectively, please take the time to
familiarize yourself with the contents and use of the
manual.
ix
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
x
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL (vehicles without navigation system)
xii
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
1
Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . 225
21
Four–wheel drive control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
2
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
22
Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . 403
3
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
23
Parking brake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
24
Center differential lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
5
Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . 232
25
Power outlet (12 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
6
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
26
Downhill assist control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
7
Headlight, turn signal and
fog light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36, 37
27
Electronic modulated suspension
control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
8
Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
28
9
Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Rear height control air suspension
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
10
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
11
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
12
Multi–information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
29
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
30
“2nd STRT” (second start) switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
31
Tire pressure warning system
selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
13
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . 243
32
Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
14
Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
33
Audio remote control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
15
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . 65
34
Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
16
“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
35
Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
17
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
36
Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
37
“RSCA OFF” (roll sensing of curtain
shield airbags off) switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
18
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
19
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
38
Outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . 47
20
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
39
Power outlet (115 VAC) main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
xiii
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT PANEL (vehicles with navigation system)
xiv
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Page
21 Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Driving position memory switches . . . . . . . . . . . 225
22 Four–wheel drive control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
23 Automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . 403
Power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
24 Parking brake lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Window lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
25 Center differential lock switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Power rear view mirror control switches . . . . . . 232
26 Power outlet (12 VDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Side vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
27 Downhill assist control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Headlight, turn signal and
fog light switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 36, 37
28 Electronic modulated suspension
Wiper and washer switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
29 Rear height control air suspension
Center vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
30 Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Rear view monitor/navigation system display
31 “2nd STRT” (second start) switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
including air conditioning controls and audio
system
32 Tire pressure warning system
(For the navigation system, see the separate
selector switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.) . . . . . . . 415
33 Cruise control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Multi–information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
34 Speech command switch
Automatic air conditioning controls
. . . . . . . . . See the separate
. . . . . . . . . See the separate
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.
35 Audio remote control switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
36 Instrument panel light control dial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . 65
37 Hood lock release lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
“AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF”
38 Fuel filler door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
39 “RSCA OFF” (roll sensing of curtain
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
shield airbags off) switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
40 Outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . 47
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
41 Power outlet (115 VAC) main switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
xv
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
xvi
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
1
Automatic transmission second start
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
2
Unengaged “Park” warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
4
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
5
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 403
6
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10
Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 67
19
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
20
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
21
Vehicle stability control system off
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
22
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
23
Kinetic dynamic suspension system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
24
Center differential lock indicator light . . . . . . . . . 411
25
Vehicle stability control system and active
traction control system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 70
26
Downhill assist control system
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
11
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
27
Height control indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
28
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 29
13
Headlight indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
29
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
14
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
30
Trip meter reset knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
15
Engine oil replacement reminder light . . . . . . . . . . 72
31
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
16
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 433, 437, 439
32
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
17
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . 71
33
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
18
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
34
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
xvii
PICTORIAL INDEX
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER (vehicles sold in Canada)
xviii
PICTORIAL INDEX
Page
Page
1
Automatic transmission second start
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
19
Malfunction indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
2
Unengaged “Park” warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
20
Vehicle stability control system off
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
3
Automatic transmission fluid temperature
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
21
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4
Low washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
22
5
Automatic transmission indicator lights . . . . . . 403
Kinetic dynamic suspension system
warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
6
Driver’s seat belt reminder light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
23
Center differential lock indicator light . . . . . . . . . 411
24
Vehicle stability control system and active
traction control system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 70
25
Downhill assist control system
indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
7
Turn signal indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8
Brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9
Headlight high beam indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
10
Anti–lock brake system warning light . . . . . . . . . . . 67
26
Height control indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
11
Open door warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
27
Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 29
12
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
28
SRS warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
13
Tail light indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
29
Trip meter reset knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
14
Cruise control indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
30
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
15
Slip indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431, 433, 437, 439
31
Low fuel level warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
16
Low engine oil pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . 71
32
Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
17
Discharge warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
33
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
18
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
For detailed information, refer to the description given in each Section.
xix
PICTORIAL INDEX
SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL
Page
1
Tilt and telescopic steering
control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
2
Seat position, seat cushion
angle and height control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128, 129
3
Seatback angle control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4
Lumbar support control
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each Section.
xx
PICTORIAL INDEX
EXTERIOR VIEW
Page
PPY021
1
Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3
Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
4
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
5
Windshield wiper and
washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 618
6
Outside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . 231
7
Side door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
8
Tire and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
9
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 619
10
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
For detailed information, refer to the
description given in each Section.
xxi
PICTORIAL INDEX
xxii
BASIC OPERATION
QUICK REFERENCE
Quick reference
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
2
3
4
5
1
QUICK REFERENCE
1. DRIVER’S SEAT
2. STEERING WHEEL
TILT STEERING WHEEL
BPY020
(7.2/5.5)
Seat position
Seat cushion angle
Seat cushion height
Seatback angle
Lumbar support
To tilt the steering wheel up or down to the desired angle, push
the control switch in the required direction and release the
button when the steering wheel reaches the desired angle.
TELESCOPIC STEERING WHEEL
BPY021
(7.2/59.5)
Head restraint height
Head restraint angle
To move the steering wheel to the desired position, push the
control switch away from you or pull it toward you until the
steering wheel reaches the desired position.
2
QUICK REFERENCE
3. AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
OPERATION OF SELECTOR LEVER
BPY011
SELECTOR LEVER POSITION
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal
position
BPY019
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position
(shifting into overdrive possible)
4: Position for engine braking
(shifting into overdrive not possible)
3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking
L: Position for maximum engine braking
Shift while pressing the brake pedal.
(Ignition switch must be in the “ON” position.)
NOTE: When the cruise control is being used, even if you downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be enabled
because the cruise control is not cancelled. For the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 421.
3
QUICK REFERENCE
4. HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Parking, tail, license plate,
side marker and instrument
panel lights turn on.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Right or left turn
BPY004
Headlights also turn on.
Lane change (right or left)
Automatic light control
High beam
BPY006
Headlight flasher
4
QUICK REFERENCE
5. WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Front
Rain–sensing windshield wipers
Variable intermittent windshield wipers
Automatic operation
Variable intermittent
operation
1
Low speed operation
2
High speed operation
1
Low speed operation
2
High speed operation
Washer on
Washer on
5
QUICK REFERENCE
Rear
6
3
Wiper on
(intermittent operation)
4
Wiper on
(normal operation)
5
Washer also on
6
Washer on
SECTION
1–1
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Keys and doors
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Engine immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Wireless remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Side doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Back door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Theft deterrent system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7
KEYS AND DOORS
KEYS
Since the side doors and back door can be locked without a
key, you should always carry a spare master key in case you
accidentally lock your keys inside the vehicle.
If you should lose your keys or if you need additional keys,
duplicates can be made by a Lexus dealer using the key
number.
We recommend writing down the key number and storing it in
a safe place.
1
Master keys (black) — These keys work in every lock.
For your Lexus dealer to make a new key with a
built–in transponder chip, your dealer will need one
of them.
2
Valet key (gray) — This key will not open the glove
box.
3
Key number plate — Keep the plate in a safe place
such as your wallet, not in the vehicle.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has been
placed in the head of the master and valet keys. These chips
are required for the system to function correctly, so be careful
not to lose these keys. If you make your own duplicate key, you
will not be able to cancel the system or start the engine.
To protect items locked in the glove box when using valet
parking, leave the valet key with the attendant.
8
KEYS AND DOORS
Flat key
Starting the engine using a flat key
As a transponder chip is built in its key case, you can start
the engine with this key.
1. Remove the key plate from the key case.
The flat key works in every lock.
A transponder chip for the engine immobilizer system has been
placed in the key case of the flat key. This chip is required for
the system to function correctly, so be careful not to lose this
key. If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able
to cancel the system or start the engine.
Insert your key plate in its key case as shown. We recommend
that you always carry this with you for emergency use. Do not
leave it in your vehicle.
2. Insert the key plate into the ignition switch. The indicator
light keeps flashing.
3. Bring the key case closer to the ignition switch within 10
seconds as indicated by the arrow head. The indicator light
goes out. This means the engine immobilizer system is
automatically canceled. (For details, see “Engine immobilizer
system” on page 14.) You can put the key case away then. You
cannot cancel the engine immobilizer system if 10 seconds
have past after you inserted the key plate. You need to remove
the key plate from the ignition switch and try it again from the
step 2.
9
KEYS AND DOORS
4. Start the engine within 60 seconds after the security
indicator light goes out. You cannot start the engine if 60
seconds have passed after the security indicator went off. You
need to remove the key plate from the ignition switch and try
it again from the step 2.
NOTICE
Do not let the key case become bent as the key plate
may fall out or become bent also.
The flat key is designed for emergency use only.
10
KEYS AND DOORS
When using a key containing a transponder chip,
observe the following precautions:
When starting the engine, do not use the key with a
key ring resting on the key grip and do not press the
key ring against the key grip. Doing so may prevent
the engine from starting, or may cause the engine to
stop soon after it starts.
11
KEYS AND DOORS
When starting the engine, do not use the key in
proximity with other transponder keys (including the
flat key and keys of other vehicles), and do not press
other key plates against the key grip. Doing so may
prevent the engine from starting, or may cause the
engine to stop soon after it starts. If this happens,
remove the key once and then insert it again after
removing other transponder keys (including the flat
key and keys of other vehicles) from the ring or while
gripping or covering them with your hand to start the
engine.
12
KEYS AND DOORS
Do not bend the key grip or flat key.
Do not cover the key grip or flat key with any material
that cuts off electromagnetic waves.
Do not knock the key or flat key hard against other
objects.
Do not leave the key or flat key exposed to high
temperatures for a long period, such as on the
dashboard or hood under direct sunlight.
Do not put the key or flat key in water or wash it in an
ultrasonic washer.
Do not use the key or flat key with electromagnetic
materials.
13
KEYS AND DOORS
ENGINE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
For your Lexus dealer to make you a new key with built–in
transponder chip, your dealer will need your key number and
master key. However, there is a limit to the number of
additional keys your Lexus dealer can make for you.
If you make your own duplicate key, you will not be able to
cancel the system or start the engine.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
FCC ID: MOZRI–20BTY
MADE IN JAPAN
The engine immobilizer system is a theft prevention
system. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
transponder chip in the key’s head transmits an electronic
code to the vehicle. The engine will start only when the
electronic code in the chip corresponds to the registered
ID code for the vehicle.
The system is automatically set when the key is removed from
the ignition switch. At this time, the security indicator light
flashes. When you insert the key in the ignition switch, the
security indicator light goes out and the system is canceled
automatically, which enables the engine to start.
The transponder chip of the flat key is in its key case. You can
cancel the engine immobilizer system using the flat key. (For
details, see “Flat key” on page 9.)
14
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
KEYS AND DOORS
WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROL*
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
This device complies with RSS–210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
1
Locking the doors
2
Unlocking the doors
3
Indicator light
4
Sounding an alarm
NOTE:
* This feature can be set inoperative as vehicle theft
deterrent measure in case of the loss of the wireless remote
control key.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you operate any button on the key, push it slowly and
surely. At this time, the indicator light on the key grip flashes
once.
15
KEYS AND DOORS
The operational range of the wireless remote control is
approximately 1 meter (3 ft.). The effective range may vary
with different conditions. To activate the wireless remote
control without fail, do it approximately 1 meter (3 ft.) from your
Lexus.
In the following cases, the battery in the key may be
discharged. If this is the case, replace it using a special
screwdriver.
The remote control does not work.
The operational range of wireless remote control becomes
extremely short.
The indicator light on the key is dimmed or does not come
on.
For the replacement of the battery, see “Replacing the battery”
on page 20. You can also have the battery of the key replaced
by your Lexus dealer.
If you lose the wireless key, contact your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible to avoid the possibility of theft, or an accident.
You can use up to 4 wireless remote control keys for the same
vehicle. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
16
The wireless remote control key is an electronic
component. Observe the following instructions in order
not to cause damage to the key.
Do not leave the wireless remote control key in places
where the temperature becomes high such as on the
dashboard.
Do not disassemble it.
Avoid knocking it hard against other objects or dropping it.
Avoid putting it in water.
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking/Unlocking the doors
When you push the “LOCK” button on the key briefly, all
the side doors and back door can be locked from outside
the vehicle.
At this time, you can hear one beep* and the turn signal lights
flash.** However, when you push the “LOCK” button with any
door not closed securely, the buzzer sounds for 10 seconds.***
To stop the buzzer, close all the side doors and back door
securely or push the “UNLOCK” button. If the key is in the
ignition switch, locking cannot be done.
Make sure all the doors are locked when you leave the vehicle.
Push the “LOCK” button once again. If they were already
locked, the turn signal lights will flash.
NOTE:
* The beep volume can be changed.
** The turn signal lights can be set not to flash.
*** The buzzer can be set not to sound if a door is not closed
securely.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
When you push the “UNLOCK” button, the driver’s door
is unlocked. Pushing that button once again within 3
seconds from the first push, all other side doors and back
door are also unlocked.*
NOTE:
* The 2–step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
At this time, you can hear two beeps* and the turn signal lights
flash twice.** Together with the activation of unlocking, the
personal lights and center interior light come on for 15 seconds
if the personal light switch and center interior light switch is in
the “DOOR” position and the running board lights come on for
15 seconds.*** However, this function does not work when the
ignition key is in the “ON” position. For further information, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 90.
You have 30 seconds to open a door after using the wireless
remote unlock feature.**** If a door is not opened by then, all
the doors will be automatically locked again.
Even if the “LOCK” or “UNLOCK” button is kept pressed in, the
locking or unlocking operation is not repeated. Release the
button and then push again.
17
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTE:
* The beep volume can be changed.
** The turn signal lights can be set not to flash.
*** The personal lights, center interior light and running
board lights can be set not to come on or the duration of
lighting can be changed.
**** The time before automatic re–locking can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Sounding an alarm*
When you push the “PANIC” button for about 1 second, an
alarm sounds to deter any person trying to break into or
damage your vehicle.
If you want to stop the alarm, push any button.
This function does not work when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
NOTE:
* The alarm can be set not to sound.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
18
KEYS AND DOORS
Operating the windows and moon roof
The windows and moon roof can be opened using a
wireless key from outside the vehicle.*
NOTE:
* The windows and moon roof can be set inoperative.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Push the “UNLOCK” button until the windows and moon roof
start to move. A beep sounds just before opening. When you
release the button, the windows and moon roof stop opening.
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits
are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful
interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following
measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment
and receiver.
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
19
KEYS AND DOORS
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit
different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV
technician for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Replacing the battery
When you replace the battery, prepare a lithium battery
CR1616 or equivalent and a special screwdriver.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken to prevent small children
from swallowing the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference, including
interference that may cause undesired operation of
the device.
20
When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the
components, screws and O–ring.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
KEYS AND DOORS
2. Remove the module from the key frame.
1. Remove the screw, and then the cover while pushing it in the
arrow direction.
3. Remove the 2 screws to take out the lid of the module.
4. Take out the discharged battery and put in a new battery with
the positive side up.
21
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
Make sure the positive side and negative side of the
battery are faced correctly.
Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause unexpected rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside the
transmitter, or it may interfere with proper operation.
Be careful not to bend the electrode when inserting
the battery and that dust or oils do not adhere to the
inside the module.
Take care not to lose the screws and O–ring.
5. Install the lid with the 2 screws.
NOTICE
Take care not to damage or bend the O–ring when
installing.
6. Install the module into the key frame and secure the cover
with the screw.
7. When pushing any switch on the wireless key, make sure
the indicator light comes on.
22
SIDE DOORS
Locking with key
KEYS AND DOORS
Together with the activation of unlocking, the personal lights
and center interior light come on for 15 seconds if the personal
light and center interior light switches are in the “DOOR”
positions, and the running board lights come on for about 15
seconds. However, this function does not work when the
ignition key is in the “ON” position. For further information, see
“Illuminated entry system” on page 90.
Locking with inside lock button
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Turn the key towards the front of the vehicle to lock and
towards the back to unlock.
All the side doors and back door lock and unlock
simultaneously with the driver’s door. In the driver’s door lock,
turning the key once will unlock the driver’s door and twice in
succession will unlock all the side doors and back door
simultaneously.*
NOTE:
* The 2–step unlocking function can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
Push in the lock button to lock and unlock the door.
The front doors can be opened by pulling the inside handles
even if the lock buttons are in the locked position.
23
KEYS AND DOORS
CAUTION
Locking with power door lock switch
Do not pull the inside handle of the front doors while
driving. The doors will open and an accident may occur.
Lexus strongly recommends that all children be placed
in the rear seat of the vehicle.
Closing the door with the lock button pushed in will also lock the
door. Be careful not to lock your keys in the vehicle. Doors
cannot be locked when either front door is open and the key is
in the ignition.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the doors are closed and
locked, especially when small children are in the
vehicle. Along with the proper use of seat belts, locking
the doors helps prevent the driver and passengers from
being thrown out from the vehicle in an accident. It also
helps prevent the doors from being opened
unintentionally.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
To lock all the side doors and back door simultaneously,
push the power door lock switch down on the front side.
Pushing down on the rear side will unlock them.
The same switch is also located on the front passenger’s side.
If you do any of the following, no door can be unlocked with the
power door lock switch.
Lock all the doors with the key or wireless remote control
when all the doors are closed.
Open the driver’s door or front passenger’s door and move
the inside lock buttons of both front doors to the lock
position, then close the front doors.
24
KEYS AND DOORS
The power door lock switch can be reset in the following ways.
To select the locking linked with the shift position:
Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position.
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
Unlock all the side doors and back door with the key or
wireless remote control.
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
Unlock the driver’s door or front passenger’s door with the
inside lock button, and then unlock all the doors with the
power door lock switch.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock
switch in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release.
Automatic door locking and unlocking
functions
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the
function is set.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKING
You can select the following functions:
Locking linked with the shift position
All doors are automatically locked when the selector lever
is moved out of “P” position.
Locking linked with vehicle speed
All doors are automatically locked when the vehicle speed
goes above about 20 km/h (12 mph).
You can set or cancel the automatic door locking
functions:
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
To select the locking linked with the vehicle speed:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the ”N” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock
switch in the lock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the
function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the
following operations.
25
KEYS AND DOORS
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCKING
To select the unlocking linked with the shift position:
You can select the following functions:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
Unlocking linked with the ignition switch
All doors are automatically unlocked when the driver’s door
is opened within 10 seconds after the ignition switch is
turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position, or the key is
removed.
Unlocking linked with the shift position
All doors are automatically unlocked when the selector lever
is moved to “P” position.
You can set or cancel the automatic door unlocking
functions:
Be sure to apply the parking brake when performing the
following operations.
To select the unlocking linked with the ignition switch:
1. Close all doors and turn the ignition switch to the “ON”
position.
2. Shift the selector lever from “P” to the “N” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock
switch in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the
function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
26
2. Shift the selector lever to the “P” position.
3. Within 10 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the “ON”
position, press and hold the driver’s side power door lock
switch in the unlock position for 5 seconds and then release.
The doors will be locked and unlocked to indicate that the
function is set.
To cancel the function, do the above operation again.
KEYS AND DOORS
Locking with rear door child–protector
1 Unlock
2 Lock
BACK DOOR
11PY031
Whenever small children are in the vehicle, lock the rear
door so that it does not open by the inside door handle.
To do this, move the lever to the “LOCK” position as
shown and then close the door.
1 Temporary open position
2 Full–open position
To open the back door, pull the handle. The back door can
be opened at the above mentioned positions.
27
KEYS AND DOORS
The back door can be locked and unlocked together with the
side doors by means of the power door lock system. (For
instructions, see “Locking with power door lock switch” on
page 24.)
Back door stopper
See “Stowage precautions” on page 485 for precautions when
loading luggage.
CAUTION
Keep the back door closed while driving. This not
only keeps the luggage from being thrown out but
also prevents exhaust gases from entering the
vehicle.
If the open back door hides the rear stop and tail
lights or rear turn signal lights while you are parked,
other road users must be warned of the presence of
your vehicle by a warning triangle or other device.
1 Lock
2 Unlock
For your safety, lock the back door with the door stopper
when you fully open the back door.
When closing the back door, check that the back door stopper
is unlocked.
CAUTION
When keeping the back door open, use only the lock
lever of the back door stopper without touching the
other parts.
To avoid serious personal injury, make sure not to get
your hands caught in the back door stay when
closing the back door.
28
KEYS AND DOORS
THEFT DETERRENT SYSTEM
Security indicator light
To deter theft of the vehicle, this system is designed to
sound an alarm if any of the doors or hood is forcibly
unlocked or the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected while the vehicle is locked.
The alarm blows the horn intermittently and flashes the
headlights, tail lights and turn signal lights.
Further more when the center interior light switch and personal
light switch are in the “DOOR” position, the center interior light
and personal lights turn on.
Setting the system
1. Turn the ignition key to the “LOCK” position and
remove it.
The engine immobilizer system causes the indicator light to
flash.
2. Close and lock all the doors and hood using an ignition
key or wireless remote control.
If you lock them with wireless remote control, the turn signals
flash once.
The flashing indicator light will remain on when all the doors
and hood are closed and locked.
3. After 30 seconds, the indicator starts flashing and the
system is set.
29
KEYS AND DOORS
Cancelling the system
Testing the system
When you unlock any door using an ignition key or
wireless remote control, the system is cancelled.
1. Open all the windows.
If you unlock any door with wireless remote control, the turn
signals flash twice.
Activating the system
The alarm sounds for 60 seconds if any of the following are
operated:
The front doors should be locked with the ignition key or
wireless remote control. Be sure to wait until the indicator light
starts flashing.
3. Unlock one of the doors from the inside.
The system should activate the alarm.
Unlocking any door without using an ignition key or wireless
remote control.
4. Unlock any of the doors with a key or the wireless
remote control to cancel the system.
Opening the hood and any doors forcibly.
5. Repeat this operation for the other doors and hood.
Reconnecting the battery.
When testing the hood, also check that the system is activated
when the battery terminal is disconnected and then
reconnected.
If the battery becomes discharged due to the vehicle being
unused for a long time, etc., when the battery is recharged or
replaced, the system will give the alarm. If this happens,
immediately unlock any of the doors with the key or the
wireless remote control, and the alarm will stop.
If any door is unlocked and the ignition key is not in the ignition
switch during the alarm sounding, its door is automatically
locked.
To stop the alarm: Use either of the following methods.
Unlock the door using an ignition key or wireless remote
control.
Turn the ignition switch on.
30
2. Set the system as described above.
If the system does not work properly, have it checked by your
Lexus dealer.
KEYS AND DOORS
NOTICE
Disconnecting the battery may result in the erasure of
information you have set in the computer memory. After
reconnecting the battery, check that the memorized
data has been retained. If it has been erased, input it into
the computer once more.
31
SECTION
1–2
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Switches
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlight dimmer and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear window defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirror defogger switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power window switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat heater switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
33
36
37
37
43
45
47
48
51
53
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
Vehicles sold in U.S.A.: When the headlights are on, the
headlight indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
Vehicles sold in Canada: When the tail lights are on, the tail
light indicator lights up in the instrument cluster.
With the knob in the “AUTO” position, there may be a case
that the headlights do not turn on immediately, even when
the vehicle enters a dark place such as a tunnel or parking
lot according to lighting conditions. In this case, we
recommend you to twist the knob manually to the second
clickstop to turn on the headlights immediately.
1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
To turn the lights on, twist the knob on the end of the lever.
FIRST CLICKSTOP: Only the parking, tail, license plate, side
marker and instrument panel lights turn on.
When the headlight switch is turned to the first or second
clickstop, the brightness of the instrument cluster will be
reduced slightly unless the instrument panel light control dial
is turned fully up.
However, the brightness of the instrument cluster will not be
reduced in daytime even when the headlight switch is turned
to first or second clickstop.
SECOND CLICKSTOP: Headlights also turn on.
THIRD CLICKSTOP (“AUTO”): The headlights and all other
lights automatically turn on depending on the darkness of the
surroundings.*
NOTE:
* The sensitivity of the automatic light control sensor can be
changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
33
SWITCHES
If any of the side door is kept opened, the lights automatically
turn off after 30 minutes.
When the headlight switch is on with all the doors locked,
pushing the “LOCK” button on the wireless remote control key
turns off the headlights.
If you are going to park for over one week, make sure the
headlight switch is off.
Daytime Running Light System
The automatic light control sensor is on top of the driver’s side
instrument panel.
Do not place anything on the instrument panel, and/or do not
affix anything on the windshield to block this sensor.
When the headlights are on, they automatically turn off about
30 seconds after any side door is opened and closed with the
ignition key turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.* If you
want to turn off the lights immediately, push the “LOCK” button
on the wireless remote control key twice. The lights also can
be turned off immediately by pushing the “LOCK” button on the
wireless remote control key with all the doors locked.
NOTE:
* The time before turning off the lights can be changed.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
34
The daytime running light system make your front turn signal
lights turn on when the parking brake is released with the
engine started and the headlights are turned off. They will not
go off until the ignition switch is turned off.
SWITCHES
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the lights on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
35
SWITCHES
HEADLIGHT DIMMER AND TURN
SIGNAL SWITCH
12PY003
For signaling turns, move the lever up or down in the
conventional manner.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
For high beam, push the lever forward. Pull it back for low
beam. For the headlight flasher, pull it further back.
A blue light in the instrument cluster indicates high beam or
headlight flasher is on.
The headlight flasher works even when the headlight switch is
off.
36
The turn signal is self–cancelling after a turn, but after a lane
change, you may have to cancel it by hand. You can also signal
a lane change by moving the turn signal lever partway and
holding it there.
If the green light in the instrument cluster flashes faster than
normal, it indicates that the front or rear turn signal bulb has
burned out. If this indicator light does not come on, the fuse
or the indicator light itself has probably failed.
SWITCHES
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
Variable intermittent windshield wipers
To turn on the fog lights, turn the switch to the “ON”
position. The fog lights come on only when the headlights
are on low beam.
1 Interval adjuster
2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
“INT” position: Variable intermittent operation
“LO” position: Low speed operation
“HI” position: High speed operation
37
SWITCHES
Twist the interval adjuster upward to increase the wiping
time interval between sweeps, and downward to decrease
it.
The wiper lever must be in the “INT” position.
The time interval between sweeps is shortened when the
vehicle speed increases. When the vehicle speed reaches
more than about 20 km/h (12 mph) with the interval adjuster in
the full upward position, the time interval becomes the shortest
1.5 seconds.
If you stop the vehicle with the wiper switch in the “LO” position,
the wiper speed automatically changes from low speed to
variable intermittent operation speed.* This function does not
work when the interval adjuster is in the full upward position.
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and
release it.
If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will
automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to
sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the
3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed. The
last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds about
170 km/h (106 mph).
NOTE:
* The last single wipe can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
38
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly
empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding
washer fluid” on page 618.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
SWITCHES
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
Rain–sensing windshield wipers
To turn the wipers on, move the lever down until you reach
the desired speed setting.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
There are 3 settings:
“AUTO” position: Automatic operation
“LO” position: Low speed operation
“HI” position: High speed operation
Automatic operation
1 Automatic control adjuster
2 Washer on
The wiper speed is determined by the amount of raindrops
and sunlight detected by the automatic wiper control
sensor.
39
SWITCHES
Twist the automatic control adjuster in the “–” direction to
lower the sensitivity, and the “+” direction to boost the
sensitivity.
Even if the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position, the system will
switch to variable intermittent operations in the following
conditions:
When the windshield gets extremely cold (at less than
–10C or 14F)
When the system malfunctions
However, when the windshield gets extremely hot (at more
than 90C or 194F), the wipers do not operate even if the
wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position.
When the ignition switch is turned off with the wiper lever in the
“AUTO” position, and then the ignition switch is turned on
again, the automatic operation may not work even if raindrops
are on the windshield.
The sensor is on the inside of the windshield as shown above.
In this case, move the lever to another position and return it to
the “AUTO” position again.
If you stop the vehicle with the wiper switch in the “LO” position,
the wiper speed automatically changes from low speed to
intermittent operation speed.* This function does not work
when the automatic control adjuster is in the “+” position.
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
40
SWITCHES
CAUTION
Be careful not to get your fingers caught between the
wipers and windshield.
When the wiper lever is in the “AUTO” position with the
ignition switch on, the wipers could operate
automatically in the following cases:
If you touch the upper center of the windshield
adjacent to the sensor.
If you wipe the upper center of the windshield
(adjacent to which the sensor is located) with a towel.
If the windshield vibrates.
If you touch the sensor.
NOTICE
Do not apply detergent to or wet the automatic wiper
control sensor when cleaning the inside of the
windshield.
41
SWITCHES
To make the washer squirt, pull the lever toward you and
release it.
If the wiper lever is in the “OFF” position, the wipers will
automatically make 3 wipes and then a single wipe later to
sweep the windshield completely.* The interval between the
3 wipes and the last wipe will depend on the vehicle speed. The
last sweep does not happen if the vehicle speed exceeds about
170 km/h (106 mph).
NOTE:
* The last single wipe can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
NOTICE
Do not operate the wipers if the windshield is dry. It may
scratch the glass.
42
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly
empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding
washer fluid” on page 618.
In cold weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before
using the washer. This will help prevent icing, which could
block your vision.
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
To make the washer squirt, twist the knob downward to
position 2.
Also, the wipers will automatically operate a couple of times
after the washer squirts even with the lever in the “OFF“
position.
To make the washer squirt while operating in “ON”
position, twist the knob upward to position 1.
The knob automatically returns from these positions after you
release it.
The low washer fluid warning light in the instrument cluster
comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes nearly
empty. For information on adding washer fluid, see “Adding
washer fluid” on page 618.
1 Washer on during wiping
2 Washer on
To turn the wipers on, twist the knob at the end of the lever.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
There are 2 settings:
“LO” position: Intermittent operation
“HI” position: Low speed operation
If you stop the vehicle with the rear window wiper switch in the
“HI” position, the wiper speed automatically changes from low
speed to intermittent operation speed.
43
SWITCHES
NOTICE
Do not operate the rear window wiper if the rear window
is dry. It may scratch the glass.
44
SWITCHES
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
SWITCH
To turn the electric rear window defogger on, push the
switch.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the inside of the rear window will
quickly clear the surface. An indicator light will illuminate to
indicate the defogger is operating.
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has
operated about 15 minutes.
Vehicles without navigation system
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the
switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch
once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause
the battery to discharge, especially during stop–and–go
driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to
melt snow.
Vehicles with navigation system
45
SWITCHES
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the rear window, be
careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or
connectors.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switch off when the engine is not running.
46
SWITCHES
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
DEFOGGER SWITCH
CAUTION
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch them
when the switch is on.
If further defrosting or defogging is desired, simply actuate the
switch again. When the surface has cleared, push the switch
once again to turn the defogger off. Continuous use may cause
the battery to discharge, especially during stop–and–go
driving. The defogger is not designed to dry rain water or to
melt snow.
If the outside rear view mirrors are heavily coated with ice, use
a spray de–icer before operating the switch.
To turn the electric outside rear view mirror defogger on,
push the switch.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
The thin heater wires on the heater panels in the outside rear
view mirrors will quickly clear the surface. Keep your hands off
the mirror faces when the switch is on. An indicator light will
illuminate to indicate the defogger is operating.
The system will automatically shut off when the defogger has
operated about 5 minutes.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn the
switch off when the engine is not running.
47
SWITCHES
POWER WINDOW SWITCHES
Operating the switches
1 For driver’s window
2 For front passenger’s window
3 For left rear window
4 For right rear window
To raise or lower the window, pull the switch halfway up or
push it halfway down.
To raise or lower the windows, use the switch on each
door. The passengers’ windows can also be controlled by
the switches on the driver’s door.
To stop the window partway, lightly push or pull the switch in the
opposite direction and then release it.
The power windows work when the ignition key is in the “ON”
position.
Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position with all the doors closed, the window
can be operated until a front door is opened (or for 43 seconds).
48
Automatic operation: To fully raise or lower the window
automatically, pull the switch fully up or push it fully down.
SWITCHES
Operating the window lock switch
Operating the windows from outside the
vehicle
The windows can be operated using an ignition key.*
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivate.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Indicator lights
With the window lock switch pressed in, only the driver’s
window can be raised or lowered.
The indicator lights on the switch tell you which of the switches
can be operated.
Close
Open
Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s
door.
To close the windows: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
After the doors are locked, the windows begin to close. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
49
SWITCHES
To open the windows: Turn the key in the unlocking direction
and hold it.
2. Pull up the switches until the windows close and hold the
switches for a second.
After the door is unlocked, the windows begin to open. To stop
in the middle, return the key.
Make sure that the windows open and close automatically. If
the power windows cannot be operated properly, have it
checked by your Lexus dealer.
The windows also can be opened using the wireless remote
control. For details, see page 19.
Jam protection function
During automatic raising operation or key off raising operation,
the window stops and is lowered if something gets caught
between the window and window frame.
If the window receives a strong impact, this function may work
even if nothing is caught.
If the battery is disconnected or run down
The power windows may not operate automatically and the jam
protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. At this time, the
indicator lights of the switches will flash. In any of these cases,
you should normalize the power windows.
To normalize the power windows:
1. Push down the power window switches of each door and
lower the windows halfway.
50
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
Before you close the power windows, always make
sure there is nobody around the power windows. You
must also make sure the heads, hands and other
parts of the bodies of all occupants are kept
completely inside the vehicle. If someone’s neck,
head or hands get caught in a closing window, it
could result in death or serious injury. When anyone
closes the power windows, make sure he or she
operates the windows safely.
When small children are in the vehicle, never let them
use the power window switches without supervision.
Use the window lock switch to prevent them from
making unexpected use of the switches.
Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave
your vehicle.
SWITCHES
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone
in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the power
window switches and get trapped in a window.
Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be
involved in a serious accident.
EMERGENCY FLASHER SWITCH
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate
the jam protection function intentionally.
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the window fully
closed.
To turn on the emergency flashers, push the switch. To
turn them off, push the switch again.
All the turn signal lights will flash. The emergency flashers will
work with the engine running or off and with or without the
ignition key.
Turn on the emergency flashers to warn other drivers if you
must stop your vehicle where it might be a traffic hazard.
Always pull your vehicle as far off the road as possible.
The turn signal light switch will not work when the emergency
flashers are in operation.
51
SWITCHES
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the switch on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
52
SWITCHES
SEAT HEATER SWITCHES
CAUTION
Occupants must use caution when operating the seat
heater because they may experience minor burns even
at low temperatures. Use extra caution for;
Babies, small children, elderly persons, sick persons
or persons with physical disabilities
Persons who have delicate skin
Persons who are exhausted
Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs which
induce sleep (sleeping drug, cold remedy, etc.)
The seat heater has two dials; one marked “L” (for the
driver’s seat) and the other marked “R” (for the front
passenger’s seat). To turn the seat heaters on, turn the
dials forward. The indicator lights come on. To turn them
off, turn the dials backward until they stop. The indicator
lights go off.
To prevent the seat from overheating, do not use the
seat heater with a blanket, cushion, or other insulating
objects which cover the seat.
You can adjust the heating temperature to 5 stages. To
increase the temperature, turn them forward. To decrease the
temperature, turn them backward.
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position to operate seat
heaters.
53
SWITCHES
NOTICE
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and
do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into
the seat.
When cleaning the seats, do not use organic
substances (paint thinner, benzine, alcohol,
gasoline, etc.). They may damage the heater and seat
surface.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, turn
the switches off when the engine is not running.
54
SWITCHES
55
SECTION
1–3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Gauges, meters and service reminder indicators
Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer and trip meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Multi–information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument panel light control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
57
58
60
61
62
75
86
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
FUEL GAUGE
See the inner back cover for fuel capacity and recommended
fuel selection.
Low fuel level warning light
The gauge indicates the approximate quantity of fuel
remaining in the tank when the ignition switch is on.
It is a good idea to keep the tank over 1/4 full.
If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low fuel level warning light
comes on, fill the fuel tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the fuel gauge needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level
warning light may come on earlier than usual.
If the fuel tank is completely empty, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Fill the fuel tank immediately.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
57
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE
Normal range
The gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature when
the ignition switch is on.
The engine operating
temperature will vary with changes in weather and engine
load.
If the needle points to the red zone or higher, stop your vehicle
and allow the engine to cool.
Your vehicle may overheat during severe operating conditions,
such as:
Driving up a long hill on a hot day.
Reducing speed or stopping after high speed driving.
Idling for a long period with the air conditioning on in
stop–and–go traffic.
Towing a trailer.
58
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
NOTICE
Do not remove the thermostat in the engine cooling
system as this may cause the engine to overheat. The
thermostat is designed to control the flow of coolant
to keep the temperature of the engine within the
specified operating range.
Do not continue driving with an overheated engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 496.
59
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in thousands of
rpm (revolutions per minute). Use it while driving to
prevent engine over–revving.
Driving with the engine running too fast causes excessive
engine wear and poor fuel economy. Remember, in most
cases the slower the engine speed, the greater the fuel
economy.
NOTICE
Do not let the indicator needle get into the red zone. This
may cause severe engine damage.
60
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
ODOMETER AND TRIP METER
To set the A trip meter to zero, display the A meter reading,
push the knob and hold it. The same applies for the B trip
meter.
The data of trip meters will be cancelled if the electrical power
source is disconnected.
Trip meter reset knob
This meter displays the odometer and two trip meters. To
change the mode indication, push the trip meter reset
knob briefly. Each time you push the knob, the mode
changes in order from the odometer to trip meter A to trip
meter B, then back to the odometer, etc.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The twin trip meter records two different
distances independently.
For example, you can use one meter to calculate the fuel
economy and the other to measure the distance on each trip.
61
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
AND WARNING BUZZERS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON...
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON...
DO THIS.
(f)
(a)
or
(Indicator and buzzer)
If parking brake is off,
stop immediately and
contact Lexus dealer.
(g)
Close all side doors
and back door.
(h)
Shift four–wheel drive
control out of “N”.
Fasten front
passenger’s seat belt.
(i)
Stop and check.
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer immediately.
(j)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(Indicator and buzzer)
(c)
(d)
62
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
If brake system
warning light is also
on, stop immediately
and contact Lexus
dealer.
Fasten driver’s seat
belt.
(b)
(e)
or
DO THIS.
or
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON...
DO THIS.
IF THIS INDICATOR OR
BUZZER COMES ON...
(k)
Take vehicle to Lexus
dealer.
(q)
(l)
Stop and check.
(r)
(m)
Stop and check.
(n)
Replace engine oil.
(o)
Adjust tire inflation
pressure. If light
remains, contact
Lexus dealer.
(p)
Fill up tank.
DO THIS.
Add washer fluid.
Key reminder buzzer
Remove key.
63
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(a) Brake System Warning Light and Buzzer
This light comes on in the following cases when the ignition key
is in the “ON” position.
When the parking brake is applied...
If any of the following conditions occurs, immediately
stop your vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus
dealer.
This light comes on for a few seconds when the ignition key is
in the “ON” position even after the parking brake is released.
The light does not turn off even after the parking
brake is released while the engine is running.
When the brake fluid level is low...
The warning buzzer comes on together with the
warning light.
CAUTION
It is dangerous to continue driving normally when the
brake fluid level is low.
When the hydraulic brake booster fails...
If the hydraulic booster causes a problem resulting in poor
braking performance, the warning light comes on and buzzer
sounds continuously.
Have your vehicle checked at your Lexus dealer in the
following cases:
The light does not come on even if the parking brake is
applied when the ignition key is in the “ON” position.
The light does not come on even if the ignition key is turned
on with the parking brake released.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
64
CAUTION
In either case, this can indicate that the brakes may not
work properly and your stopping distance will become
longer. Depress the brake pedal firmly and bring the
vehicle to an immediate stop.
The brake system warning light remains on together
with the “ABS” warning light.
In this case, not only the anti–lock brake system will fail,
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Any of the following conditions may occur, but do not
indicate the malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off
after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light turns off and
the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.
You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment
after the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed
repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake
system, and it is not a malfunction.
(c) Front Passenger’s Seat Belt Reminder Light
The light acts as a reminder to have the front passenger buckle
up the seat belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or “START”, the
reminder light flashes if a passenger sits in the front passenger
seat and does not fasten the seat belt.
If luggage or other load is placed on the front passenger seat,
depending on its weight, the reminder light may flash.
(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light and Buzzer
The light and buzzer act as a reminder to buckle up the driver’s
seat belt.
Once the ignition key is turned to “ON” or “START”, the
reminder light flashes and buzzer sounds if the driver’s seat
belt is not fastened. Unless the driver fastens the belt, the light
continues flashing and the buzzer stops after about 4 to 8
seconds.
65
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(d) SRS Warning Light
(e) Malfunction Indicator Lamp
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS airbags and front seat belt pretensioners
are operating properly.
This lamp comes on when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position and goes off after the engine starts. This
means that the warning light system is operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
front passenger occupant classification system, “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s
seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources.
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction somewhere in the parts monitored by the warning
light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible
to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6 seconds
or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If the light stays on, it indicates that the driver and front
passenger airbags and/or front passenger occupant
classification system, “AIRBAG ON” indicator light and
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light fail. If the light flashes, the side
and curtain shield airbags and/or seat belt pretensioners have
a problem.
66
If the lamp remains on, or the lamp comes on while driving,
first check the followings.
Empty fuel tank
If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immediately.
Loose fuel tank cap
If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely tighten it.
These cases are temporary malfunctions. The malfunction
indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the lamp does not go off even after several trips, contact your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel tank cap is not
loose...
There is a problem somewhere in the engine, emission
control system, electronic throttle control system, automatic
transmission electrical system or warning light system itself.
Contact your Lexus dealer as soon as possible to service the
vehicle.
If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal
is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the
electronic throttle control system.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the
accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system
is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is
turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal
operation.
(f) “ABS” Warning Light
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the following systems do not operate, but
the brake system still operates conventionally.
Anti–lock brake system
Brake assist system
Active traction control system
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Vehicle stability control system
Your vehicle may not pass a state emission inspection if the
malfunction indicator lamp remains on. Contact your Lexus
dealer to check your vehicle’s emission control system and
OBD (On–Board Diagnostics) system before taking your
vehicle for the inspection.
Downhill assist control system
For details, see “Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M)
programs” on page 532.
Hill–start assist control
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system does not
operate, so that the wheels will lock up during a sudden braking
or braking on slippery road surfaces.
67
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored
by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
(g) Open Door Warning Light
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
(h) Unengaged “Park” Warning Light
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
This light warns that the transmission “Park” mechanism is not
engaged. If the four–wheel drive control is in the “N” position
while the selector lever is in the “P” position, the transmission
will disengage and the wheels will not lock.
CAUTION
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
To restore the park function, shift the four–wheel drive
control out of “N”.
The light comes on while you are driving.
In this case, not only the anti–lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not
indicate a malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off
after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.
68
This light remains on until all the side doors and back door are
completely closed.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(i)
Automatic Transmission Fluid Temperature
Warning Light
This light warns that the automatic transmission fluid
temperature is too high.
If this light comes on while you are driving, slow down and pull
off the road. Stop the vehicle at a safe place and put the
selector lever in “P” and leave the engine idling until the light
goes off. If the light goes off, you can start the vehicle again.
If the light does not go off, call a Lexus dealer or qualified repair
shop for assistance.
NOTICE
Continued driving with the warning light on may
damage the automatic transmission.
69
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(j)
“VSC TRAC” Warning Light
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
following.
Vehicle stability control system
Active traction control system
Downhill assist control system
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
kinetic dynamic suspension system.
The light will come on when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position and will go off after a few seconds.
Hill–start assist control
If the light comes on while driving, bring your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible and have it checked.
The light will come on when the ignition key turned to “ON”, and
will go off after a few seconds.
(l)
It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay on for 60
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the lights.
It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.
If the light comes on while driving, the above mentioned
systems do not work. However, as conventional braking
operates when applied, there is no problem to continue your
driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
The warning light comes on while driving.
When the brake fluid level is too low, the above–mentioned
systems will not operate and the warning light come on.
70
(k) “KDSS” Warning Light (vehicles with kinetic
dynamic suspension system)
Discharge Warning Light
This light warns that the battery is being discharged.
If it comes on while you are driving, stop the vehicle, turn off the
engine, and check for the cause. Look first at the engine drive
belt.
If it is loose or broken, the generator will not charge the
battery properly.
If the belt is O.K., there is a problem somewhere in the
charging system.
The engine ignition will continue to operate, however, until the
battery is discharged. Turn off the air conditioning, blower,
radio, etc., and drive directly to the nearest Lexus dealer or
repair shop.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
NOTICE
Do not continue driving if the engine drive belt is broken
or loose.
(m) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light warns that the engine oil pressure is too low.
If it flickers or stays on while you are driving, pull off the road
to a safe place and stop the engine immediately. Call a Lexus
dealer or qualified repair shop for assistance.
The light may occasionally flicker when the engine is idling or
it may come on briefly after a hard stop. There is no cause for
concern if it then goes out when the engine is accelerated
slightly.
The light may come on when the oil level is extremely low. It
is not designed to indicate low oil level, and the oil level must
be checked using the oil level dipstick.
NOTICE
Do not drive the vehicle with the warning light on —
even for one block. It may ruin the engine.
71
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(n) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder Light
(for vehicles sold in U.S.A.)
If the system fails to reset, the light will remain flashing. In this
case, return to step 1 and try again.
This light acts as a reminder to replace the engine oil.
(o) Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
This light will come on when the ignition key is turned to “ON”
and will go off after about a few seconds.
This light warns that the tire pressure of one or more of your
tires (including the spare tire) is low. The light comes on when
the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It goes off after
a few seconds. This indicates that the tire pressure warning
system is functioning properly.
When you drive for about 7200 km (4500 miles) after the
engine oil replacement, this light illuminates for about 3
seconds and then flashes for about 12 seconds with the
ignition key turned to “ON” position. If you continue driving
without the engine oil replacement, and if the driving range
exceeds 8000 km (5000 miles), the light will come on after the
ignition key is turned to “ON” position. The light will remain on
thereafter.
If the light is flashing, we recommend that you replace the
engine oil at an early opportunity depending on the driving and
road condition. If the light comes on, replace it as soon as
possible.
You need to reset the light after the engine oil replacement.
Reset the light by following the procedure below:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position with
the odometer reading shown. (For details, see “Odometer and
trip meter” on page 61.)
2. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position while holding down
the trip meter reset knob.
Hold down the knob until the light goes off. Before the light
goes off, it illuminates for 3 seconds, flashes for 2 seconds and
illuminates for 1 second.
72
If the warning light comes on, stop your vehicle in a safe place
as soon as possible and check that the inflation pressure of all
tires (including the spare tire) is as specified on the tire and
loading information label. (See “Checking tire inflation
pressure” on page 574.) The light should go off a few minutes
after the tire pressure is adjusted.
If the warning light blinks, the tire pressure warning system
may be malfunctioning. Contact your Lexus dealer.
For details, see “Tire pressure warning system” on page 446.
(p) Low Fuel Level Warning Light
This light comes on when the fuel level in the tank becomes
very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
On inclines or curves, due to the movement of fuel in the tank,
the low fuel level warning light may come on earlier than usual.
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
(q) Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light comes on when the fluid level in the tank becomes
very low. Fill the tank as soon as possible.
(r) Key Reminder Buzzer
This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove the key when you
open the driver’s door with the ignition key in the “ACC” or
“LOCK” position.
How to check all the service reminder
indicators (except the low fuel level warning
light)
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Open the door.
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off when you close the door completely.
3. Place the four–wheel drive control lever in “N” position and
the selector lever in “P” position and turn the ignition key to
“ACC”.
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off when you place the four–wheel drive control lever in
“H” or “L” position.
73
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
4. Turn the ignition key to “ON”.
The following service reminder indicators should come on.
The following service reminder indicator goes off after a few
seconds.
or
or
or
or
w72a
w73
The anti–lock brake system warning light, vehicle stability
control system off indicator light and vehicle stability control
system, slip indicator light and active traction control system
warning light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the
ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if they
go out after a while.
The following service reminder indicator should come on. It
goes off after about 6 seconds.
If any service reminder indicator or warning buzzer does not
function as described above, have it checked by your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible.
74
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
MULTI–INFORMATION DISPLAY
The multi–information display provides various
information, including clock, outside temperature, and
your vehicle’s driving condition.
When the ignition switch is on, the last previously used mode
displayed just before the ignition switch is off will appear.
If the electrical power source has been disconnected from the
multi–information display, the display will automatically be set
to the initial mode.
When the instrument panel lights are turned on, the brightness
of the display will be reduced.
13PY018
1 “MODE” button
3 “
” button
You can adjust the brightness of the display. To adjust the
brightness, see “ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE
DISPLAY” below.
2 “
” button
4 “RESET” button
75
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE DISPLAY
Clock
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position. To adjust the
brightness of the display, push and hold the “MODE” button for
more than 2 seconds. “ILL” will appear on the display.
To increase the brightness — Push the “
To decrease the brightness — Push the “
” button.
” button.
You can adjust the brightness to 3 levels (when the tail lights
are off) or 6 levels (when the tail lights are on).
After adjusting, the display automatically return to the previous
display.
CAUTION
U.S.A.
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Canada
76
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
The digital clock indicates the time when the key is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
To reset the time, push and hold the “MODE” button for 2
seconds. “ILL” will appear on the display. Then push the
“MODE” button once. The time will blink.
To reset the hour — Push the “ ” button.
To reset the minutes — Push the “ ” button.
To adjust the time to the nearest hour, push the “RESET”
button. For example, if the “RESET” button is depressed when
the time is between 1:01 — 1:29, the time will change to 1:00.
If the time is between 1:30 — 1:59, the time will change to 2:00.
If the electric power source has been disconnected, the time
display will automatically be set to 1:00.
Outside temperature and cruise information
The following information is shown with the ignition
switch turned on. Each time you push the “MODE” button,
the display toggles through this information.
Outside temperature
Average fuel consumption
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Driving range
Average vehicle speed
Barometer
Altimeter
Elapsed time
The displayed values indicate general driving conditions.
Accuracy varies with driving habits and road conditions.
77
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Outside temperature
In outside temperature mode, outside air temperatures
are displayed.
The displayed value is updated every 1 second.
The displayed temperature ranges from –22F (–30C) up to
122F (50C).
If there is some abnormality in the connection of the outside air
temperature sensor, “––” will appear on the display. If “––”
appears on the display, contact your Lexus dealer.
In some cases, “––” may appear momentarily when the ignition
is quickly turned to “ON”. It is normal if it goes out soon.
U.S.A.
Canada
78
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Average fuel consumption
Average fuel consumption is calculated and displayed
based on total driving distance and total fuel consumption
with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds.
To reset the calculations, push and hold the “RESET” button for
more than 1 second.
U.S.A.
Canada
79
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Instantaneous fuel consumption
Instantaneous fuel consumption is calculated and
displayed based on distance and fuel consumption for 2
seconds with the engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 2 seconds.
Note that an accurate figure may not be shown in the following
cases.
When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running, the
display will indicate extremely high fuel consumption.
When the vehicle is driving down a long slope, with the
engine brake applied, the display will indicate extremely low
fuel consumption.
U.S.A.
Canada
80
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Driving range
The distance the vehicle can travel with the remaining fuel
is calculated and displayed based on the quantity of
remaining fuel and past fuel consumption.
The driving range display indicates the approximate distance
that you can drive until the fuel gauge reaches “E”. It is different
from the actual distance traveled.
The displayed value is updated every time the fuel required to
travel 1 mile or 1 km is consumed.
Every time you refuel the vehicle, the calculation is reset.
U.S.A.
The actual driving range varies with driving habits and road
conditions. If fuel consumption is good, the driving range will
be longer. If fuel consumption is poor, the driving range will be
shorter.
If the low fuel level warning light comes on, refuel even if the
display indicates that the vehicle can be driven further.
Canada
81
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Average vehicle speed
Average vehicle speed is calculated and displayed based
on total driving distance and total driving time with the
engine running.
The displayed value is updated every 10 seconds.
To reset the calculations, push and hold the “RESET” button for
more than 1 second.
U.S.A.
Canada
82
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Barometer
In barometer mode, the atmospheric pressure in the
vehicle is displayed.
The displayed atmospheric pressure ranges from 17.8 IN.HG
(600 hPa) up to 31.0 IN.HG (1050 hPa).
The displayed value is updated every 2 seconds.
The displayed value may deviate from the actual atmospheric
pressure depending on opening or closing of the windows and
doors and the driving conditions.
U.S.A.
Canada
83
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Altimeter
In altimeter mode, the approximate altitude is displayed.
The displayed altitude ranges from –1500 ft. (–500 m) up to
13000 ft. (4000 m).
As the altitude value is converted from the atmospheric
pressure, it can be easily affected by air motion and
temperature, so the indication may vary. The indicated altitude
of a single position may deviate according to the atmospheric
pressure and temperature.
The displayed value is updated every 2 seconds.
RECTIFICATION OF THE ALTITUDE
U.S.A.
Rectification is valid only when the correct altitude is known.
While the altitude mode is on the display, push the “ ” or “ ”
button to increase or decrease the altitude by 50 ft. (10 m).
To reset the rectified altitude, push and hold the “RESET”
button for more than 1 second.
Canada
84
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
Elapsed time
The time that has elapsed since the engine started is
displayed.
When the engine is started, driving time is counted from 0:00.
Up to 19:59 (19 hours, 59 minutes) can be displayed. When
the driving time exceeds 19:59, the counter returns to 0:00.
To reset the calculations, push and hold the “RESET” button for
more than 1 second.
U.S.A.
Canada
85
GAUGES, METERS AND SERVICE REMINDER INDICATORS
INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHT
CONTROL
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
turn the dial.
With the dial turned fully up, the intensity of the instrument
panel lights will not be reduced when the headlight switch is on.
86
SECTION
1–4
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Illuminated entry system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Cigarette lighter and ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Rear console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Garage door opener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Overhead console box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Auxiliary box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Floor mat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Warning reflector holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Luggage cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Tie–down hookss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
87
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
SUN VISORS
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Center
To block out glare, move the sun visor as shown.
1
To block out glare from the front, swing the sun visor
down.
2
To block out glare from the side, remove the sun visor
from the hook and swing it to the side.
3
To block out glare coming obliquely from behind you,
slide the visor backwards.
Vehicles without rear seat audio system
At this position, the vanity light does not come on.
4
To block out glare from the front with the sun visor in
the position 2 or 3 , swing the other sun visor
down.
Vehicles with rear seat audio system
88
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.
Rear
The interior light switch has the following positions:
“ON” — Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF” — Turns the light off.
“DOOR” — Turns the light on when any side door is opened.
The light goes off when all the doors are closed. For details,
see “Illuminated entry system” on page 90.
To turn on the interior light, slide the switch.
The interior light switch has the following positions:
“ON” — Keeps the light on all the time.
“OFF” — Turns the light off.
“DOOR” — Turn the light on when the back door is opened.
The light goes out immediately when the back door is closed.
89
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
PERSONAL LIGHTS
1 “DOOR” position
14PY027
2 “OFF” position
To turn on the personal light, push the lens. To turn the
light off, push the lens once again.
The personal light switch has the following positions:
“DOOR” — Turn the lights on when any side door is opened
without pushing the lens. The light goes off when all the doors
are closed. For details, see “Illuminated entry system” on page
90.
“OFF” — Turn the lights on only when you push the lens.
90
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
1 Foot lights
2 Ignition switch light
3 Personal lights (with the “DOOR” position)
4 Center console spot lights
5 Inside door handle lights
6 Center interior light (with the “DOOR” position)
7 Running board lights
All of the lights except the center console spot lights will
come on when any of the side doors are opened.* After all
the doors are closed, the lights remain on for about 15
seconds before fading out.**
NOTE:
* The operating condition can be changed.
** The duration of lighting can be changed, and the foot
lights and inside door handle lights can be set not to come
on.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
However, in the following cases, the lights go out immediately:
All of the lights except the center console spot lights — All
the side doors and back door are locked.
When any of the side doors is unlocked, all of the lights except
the center console spot lights will come on and remain on for
about 15 seconds before fading out.
To prevent the battery being discharged, all of the lights will
automatically turn off when the ignition key removed and the
door is left opened for about 30 minutes.
Ignition switch light, personal lights and center interior
light
The ignition switch light, personal lights and center interior light
also come on and remain on for about 15 seconds before
fading out when the ignition switch is turned to the “LOCK”
position.
Foot lights and inside door handle lights
The foot lights and inside door handle lights also come on when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position with the selector lever
in the “P” position. When the selector lever is moved out of “P”
position, the intensity of the foot lights and inside door handle
lights will be reduced.*
NOTE:
* The intensity of the foot lights and inside door handle lights
can be set not to be reduced.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Ignition switch light, personal lights and center interior light
— All the side doors are closed and the ignition key is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
Center console spot lights
Running board lights — The vehicle speed exceeds about
8 km/h (5 mph).
The center console spot lights come on when the ignition
switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
91
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CIGARETTE LIGHTER AND
ASHTRAY
Front
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, close the lid completely.
To remove the ashtray, press down on the lock spring plate and
pull out.
Use a Lexus genuine cigarette lighter or equivalent for
replacement.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, always completely close the
ashtray after use.
To use the cigarette lighter and ashtray, first push against
the cigarette lighter and ashtray covers. Then when the
cigarette lighter cover opens, press in the cigarette lighter.
After it finishes heating up, it automatically pops out ready
for use.
Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in.
If the engine is not running, the ignition key must be in the
“ACC” position to use the lighter.
92
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Rear
POWER OUTLETS
12 VDC
To use the ashtray, raise the lid.
When finished with your cigarette, thoroughly extinguish it in
the ashtray to prevent other cigarette butts from catching fire.
After using the ashtray, close the lid completely.
The power outlet is designed for power supply for car
accessories.
To remove the ashtray, raise the lid and pull it out.
The ignition key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position for the
power outlet to be used.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, always completely close the
ashtray after use.
93
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
NOTICE
To prevent the fuse from being blown, do not use the
electricity over the total vehicle capacity of 12
VDC/120W.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
use the power outlet longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is
not in use. Inserting anything other than an
appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any
liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical
failure or short circuits.
115 VAC
The key must be in the “ON” position for the power outlet to be
used.
The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W.
If you attempt to use an appliance that requires more than 115
VAC or 100W, the protection circuit will activate and cut the
power supply. The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates within the 115
VAC/100W limits.
This power outlet is designed for use as a power supply
for electric appliances in the vehicle.
94
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
To use the power outlet, push the main switch on the
instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the power outlet
is ready for use.
Push the main switch once again to turn the power outlet off.
When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.
Main switch
95
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
use the power outlet longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is
not in use. Inserting anything other than an
appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any
liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical
failure or short circuits.
The power outlet is not designed for the following electric
appliances even though their power consumption is
under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances may not operate
properly.
GLOVE BOX
Appliances with high initial peak wattage: Cathode–ray
tube type televisions, compressor–driven refrigerators,
electric pumps, electric tools, etc.
Measuring devices which process precise data: Medical
equipment, measuring instruments, etc.
Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power
supply: Microcomputer–controlled electric blankets, touch
sensor lamps, etc.
Certain electrical appliances may cause radio noise.
1 Unlock
2 Open
3 Lock
To use the glove box:
Open by pulling the lever.
Lock by inserting the master key and turning it clockwise.
96
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Unlock by inserting the master key and turning it
counterclockwise.
REAR CONSOLE BOX
With the tail lights on, the glove box light will come on when the
glove box door is open.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed
while driving.
To access the rear console box, push the center of the lid.
The rear console box light comes on when the tail lights are
turned on.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the rear console box closed
while driving.
97
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
GARAGE DOOR OPENER
The garage door opener (
Universal
Transceiver) is manufactured under license from
HomeLink and can be programmed to operate garage
doors, gates, entry doors, door locks, home lighting
systems, and security systems, etc.
(a) Programming the HomeLink
The battery side of the hand–held transmitter must be pointed
away from the HomeLink during the programming process.
For Canadian users, follow the procedure in “Programming an
entrance gate/programming all devices in the Canadian
market”.
1. Decide which of 3 HomeLink buttons you want to program.
2. Place your hand–held garage transmitter 25 to 75 mm (1 to
3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Simultaneously press and hold the hand–held garage
transmitter button along with the selected HomeLink button.
4. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
5. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button. If programming a garage door opener,
check to see if the garage door opens and closes.
1 Indicator light
2 Buttons
HomeLink
The
in your vehicle has 3 buttons and you can
store one program for each button.
To ensure correct programming into the HomeLink, install a
new battery in the hand–held transmitter prior to programming.
98
If the garage door does not operate, identify if your garage
transmitter is of the “Rolling Code” type. Press and hold the
programmed HomeLink button. The garage door has the
rolling code feature if the indicator light (on the HomeLink)
flashes rapidly and then remains lit after 2 seconds. If your
garage transmitter is the “Rolling Code” type, proceed to the
heading “Programming a rolling code system”.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
Programming a rolling code system
If your device is “Rolling Code” equipped, it is necessary
to follow steps 1 through 4 under the heading
“Programming the HomeLink” before proceeding with
the steps listed below.
1. Locate the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor. The exact location and color of the button
may vary by brand of garage door opener. Refer to the owner’s
guide supplied by the garage door opener manufacturer for the
location of this “training” button.
2. Press the “training” button on the ceiling mounted garage
door opener motor.
Following this step, you have 30 seconds in which to initiate
step 3 below.
3. Press and release the vehicle’s programmed HomeLink
button twice. The garage door may open. If the door does
open, the programming process is complete. If the door does
not open, press and release the button a third time. This third
press and release will complete the programming process by
opening the garage door.
The ceiling mounted garage door opener motor should now
recognize the HomeLink unit and be able to activate the
garage door up/down.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another rolling code system.
99
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Programming an entrance gate/programming
all devices in the Canadian market
1. Decide which of the 3 HomeLink buttons you want to
program.
2. Place your hand–held gate/device transmitter 25 to 75 mm
(1 to 3 in.) away from the surface of the HomeLink.
Keep the indicator light on the HomeLink in view while
programming.
3. Press and hold the selected HomeLink button.
4. Continuously press and release (cycle) the hand–held
gate/device transmitter button every two seconds until step 5
is complete.
5. When the indicator light on the HomeLink changes from a
slow to a rapid flash after 20 seconds, you can release both
buttons.
6. Test the operation of the HomeLink by pressing the newly
programmed button. Check to see if the gate/device operates
correctly.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each remaining HomeLink
button to program another device.
100
Programming other devices
To program other devices such as home security systems,
home door locks or lighting, contact your authorized Lexus
dealer for assistance.
Reprogramming a button
Individual HomeLink buttons cannot be erased, however, to
reprogram a single button, follow the procedure “Programming
the HomeLink”.
(b) Operating the HomeLink
To operate the HomeLink, press the appropriate HomeLink
button to activate the programmed device. The HomeLink
indicator light should come on. The HomeLink continues to
send the signal for up to 20 seconds as long as the button is
pressed.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
(c) Erasing the entire HomeLink memory (all
three programs)
To erase all previously programmed codes at one time, press
and hold down the 2 outside buttons for 20 seconds until the
indicator light flashes.
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the programs stored
in the HomeLink memory.
CAUTION
Do not use this HomeLink Universal Transceiver
with any garage door opener that lacks the safety
stop and reverse feature as required by federal safety
standards. (This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.) A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object (signaling
the door to stop and reverse), does not meet current
federal safety standards. Using a garage door opener
without these features increases risk of serious
injury or death.
When programming the HomeLink Universal
Transceiver, you may be operating a garage door or
other device. Make sure people and objects are out
of the way of the garage door or other device to
prevent potential harm or damage.
101
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
and with RSS–210 of the IC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING: This transmitter has been tested and
complies with FCC and IC rules. Changes or
modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the device.
CUPHOLDERS
Front
In front of the rear console box
To use the cupholder, push the cupholder lid.
The cupholder is designed for holding cups or drink–cans
securely.
The cupholder can be adjusted to the size of the cups by
changing the separator position or moving the separator arms.
You can use it as an accessory box by removing the separator
inside.
102
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Rear
In the rear console box
To use the cupholder, open the rear console box and pull
down the cupholder.
The cupholder is designed for holding cups or drink–cans
securely.
CAUTION
Second seat armrest
To use the cupholder, pull down the second seat armrest
and push the cupholder portion of the armrest.
The cupholder is designed for holding cups or drink–cans
securely.
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink–cans in the cupholder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cupholder
closed when not in use.
103
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
OVERHEAD CONSOLE BOX
Beside the third seat
CAUTION
Do not place anything else other than cups or
drink–cans in the cupholder, as such items may be
thrown about in the compartment and possibly injure
people in the vehicle during sudden braking or in an
accident.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or sudden stop while driving, keep the cupholder of
the second seat armrest closed when not in use.
104
To use the overhead console box, push the button.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident
or a sudden stop, always keep the overhead console
box closed while driving.
As this box is designed for holding eyeglasses, do
not place any object heavier than approximately 200
g (0.44 lb.) in it. Heavier objects may cause the box
to open and the contents to fly out resulting in
injuries.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
NOTICE
During hot weather, the interior of the vehicle becomes
very hot.
Do not leave anything flammable or
deformable such as a lighter, glasses, etc. inside.
105
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
AUXILIARY BOX
To use the auxiliary box, open it as shown above.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the auxiliary box closed
while driving.
106
First aid kit holder
1 To loosen
2 To tighten
This auxiliary box is equipped with a belt to hold the first
aid kit. To loosen or tighten the belt, do as shown above.
Although the first aid kit itself is not included as original
equipment, this auxiliary box can be used to store the first aid
kit.
Make sure the first aid kit is securely held.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FLOOR MAT
CAUTION
Use a floor mat of the correct size.
If the floor carpet and floor mat have 2 holes, then they are
designed for use with locking clips. Fix the floor mat with
locking clips into the holes in the floor carpet.
Make sure the floor mat is properly placed on the floor
carpet. If the floor mat slips and interferes with the
movement of the pedals during driving, it may cause an
accident.
107
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
WARNING REFLECTOR HOLDER
1 To disengage
2 To engage
This belt is designed to hold the warning reflector. To
disengage or engage the belt, do as shown above.
Although the warning reflector itself is not included as original
equipment, this auxiliary box can be used to store the warning
reflector.
Make sure the warning reflector is securely held.
108
COAT HOOKS
To use the coat hook, push the hook.
CAUTION
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed object on
the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates, those
items will be hurled away with great force or the curtain
shield airbag may not activate correctly. When you
hang clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly.
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
LUGGAGE COVER
Removing luggage cover
Using luggage cover
To remove the luggage cover, retract and release the both
ends, and lift it out.
To use the luggage cover, pull out the luggage cover and
hook it on the anchors.
After remove the luggage cover, place it somewhere other than
the passenger compartment. This will prevent passengers
from injury in the event of a sudden stop or accident.
CAUTION
When installing the luggage cover, keep the “TOP” mark
of the luggage cover ends upward.
Do not place anything on the luggage cover. Such items
may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the
vehicle during sudden braking or an accident.
109
INTERIOR EQUIPMENT
TIE–DOWN HOOKS
To secure your luggage, use the tie–down hooks as shown
above.
See “Stowage precautions” on page 485 for precautions when
loading luggage.
NOTICE
Do not use the third seat anchors instead of the
tie–down hooks.
110
SECTION
1–5
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Exterior equipment
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel tank cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moon roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Quarter windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roof luggage carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear step bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
113
116
119
120
123
111
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
HOOD
2. Insert your fingers under the hood, push up the
auxiliary catch lever and lift the hood.
1. To open the hood, pull the hood lock release lever under
the instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
Before closing the hood, check to see that you have not
forgotten any tools, rags, etc. Then lower the hood and make
sure it locks.
CAUTION
Before driving, be sure that the hood is closed and
securely locked. Otherwise, the hood may open
unexpectedly while driving and an accident may occur.
112
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
FUEL TANK CAP
1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the lever under the
instrument panel.
This indicates that the fuel filler door is on the left side of
your vehicle.
When refueling, turn off the engine.
CAUTION
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
when refuelling. The fumes are flammable.
When opening the cap, do not remove the cap
quickly. In hot weather, fuel under pressure could
cause injury by spraying out of the filler neck if the
cap is suddenly removed.
113
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn the cap
counterclockwise by 90 degrees (to the pressure point
1 ), and then turn it an additional 30 degrees (to point
2 ). Pause slightly before removing it.
15PY017
It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh when the cap is
opened.
3. The removed cap can be stored on the back side of the
fuel filler door.
Position the cap so that the hooks point to the left and right or
up and down, and set it in the receptacle on the back side of
the door.
114
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
When installing the cap, turn the cap clockwise until you
hear a click. When you hear the click, the cap is fully
closed.
If the cap is not tightened securely, the malfunction indicator
lamp comes on. Make sure the cap is tightened securely.
The indicator lamp goes off after driving several times. If the
indicator lamp does not go off, contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
Make sure the cap is installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
Use only a genuine Lexus fuel tank cap for
replacement. It is designed to regulate fuel tank
pressure.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the cap, apply force only in the
turning direction to the cap. Do not pull or pry it.
115
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
MOON ROOF
To slide open the tilted–up moon roof:
Push the switch on the “SLIDE OPEN” side to tilt down the
moon roof. After releasing the switch, push the switch on the
same side again.
1 Open
2 Close
To slide open the moon roof, push the switch on the
“SLIDE OPEN” side for about 1 second. The moon roof
will fully open. To stop partway, push the same side or
“TILT UP” side briefly.
The sunshade can be opened or closed manually. However,
if you open the moon roof, the sunshade will be opened with
the moon roof.
When the moon roof is fully opened, the wind deflector raises
to reduce the entering of the strong wind. The angle of the
deflector is changed according to the vehicle speed.
To close the moon roof, push the switch on the “TILT UP”
side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully close.
To stop partway, push the same side or “SLIDE OPEN”
side briefly.
116
1 Tilt down
2 Tilt up
To tilt up the moon roof, push the switch on the “TILT UP”
side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully tilt up.
To stop partway, push the same side or “SLIDE OPEN”
side briefly.
To tilt down the moon roof, push the switch on the “SLIDE
OPEN” side for about 1 second. The moon roof will fully
tilt down. To stop partway, push the same side or “TILT
UP” side briefly.
To operate the moon roof, the ignition key must be in the “ON”
position.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Key off operation: Even if the ignition key is turned to the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position, the moon roof can be operated until
a front door is opened (or for 43 seconds).
To tilt up the slide–opened moon roof:
Push the switch on the “TILT UP” side to close the moon roof
fully. After releasing the switch, push the switch on the same
side again.
Operating the moon roof from outside the
vehicle
The moon roof can be operated using an ignition key.*
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivate.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
Close
Open
Insert the ignition key into the key hole on the driver’s
door.
To close the moon roof: Turn the key in the locking direction
and hold it.
To open the moon roof: Turn the key in the unlocking
direction and hold it.
After the door is unlocked, the moon roof begins to open. To
stop in the middle, return the key.
117
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
The moon roof also can be opened using the wireless remote
control. For details, see page 19.
Jam protection function
If something gets caught between the moon roof and frame
during slide closing operation, the moon roof stops and
opens half way, and the deflector stops and raises fully.
If something gets caught between the moon roof and frame
during tilting down operation, the moon roof stops and
opens fully.
If the moon roof receives a strong impact, this function may
work even if nothing is caught.
If the battery is disconnected or run down
The moon roof may not operate automatically and the jam
protection function will not function correctly after you
reconnect, replace or recharge the battery. In any of these
cases, you should normalize the moon roof.
To normalize the moon roof, push and hold the switch on the
“TILT UP” side until the moon roof tilts all the way up and then
tilts down a little automatically.
Make sure that the moon roof opens and closes automatically.
If the moon roof cannot be operated properly, have it checked
by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
To avoid serious personal injury, you must do the
following.
While the vehicle is moving, always keep the heads,
hands and other parts of the bodies of all occupants
away from the roof opening. Otherwise, they could
be seriously injured if the vehicle stops suddenly or
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.
Before you close the moon roof, always make sure
there is nobody around the moon roof. You must also
make sure nobody places his or her head, hands and
other parts of the body in the roof opening. If
someone’s neck, head or hands get caught in the
closing roof, it could result in death or serious injury.
When anyone closes the moon roof, first make sure
it is safe to do so.
Be sure to remove the ignition key when you leave
your vehicle.
Never leave anyone (particularly a small child) alone
in your vehicle, especially with the ignition key still
inserted. Otherwise, he/she could use the moon roof
switch and get trapped in the roof opening.
Unattended person (particularly a small child) can be
involved in a serious accident.
Never sit on top of the vehicle around the roof
opening.
118
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
Never try jamming any part of your body to activate
the jam protection function intentionally.
QUARTER WINDOWS
The jam protection function may not work if
something gets caught just before the moon roof
fully closed.
To open the quarter windows, pull the latch handles
toward you and swing it fully out.
When closing the windows, make sure there are completely
closed.
119
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
ROOF LUGGAGE CARRIER
1 Cross rails
2 Roof rails
The roof luggage carrier consists of roof rails and sliding
cross rails.
120
Adjusting the position of cross rails
1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to loosen the cross
rails.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
There are cross rail stoppers on the roof rails which help you
prevent the cross rails being touched with the tilted–up moon
roof.
2. Slide the cross rails to the appropriate position for
loading the luggages.
NOTICE
Do not remove the cross rail stoppers, or the moon roof
may be damaged when it is tilted.
121
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
CAUTION
When you load cargo on the roof luggage carrier,
observe the following:
Place the cargo so that its weight is distributed
evenly between the front and rear axles.
If loading long or wide cargo, never exceed the
vehicle overall length or width. (See “Specifications”
on page 627 for information on your vehicle overall
length and width.)
3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the cross rails by
turning knobs clockwise.
CAUTION
Make sure the cross rails are fixed securely by pushing
forward and rearward them. Failure to do so may cause
an unexpected accident or severe injury in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions and precautions when
installing the attachments or their equivalent.
NOTICE
When loading the luggages, be careful not to scratch
the surface of the moon roof.
122
Before driving, make sure the cargo is securely
fastened on the roof luggage carrier.
Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make
the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking
or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate
this vehicle correctly.
If driving for a long distance, on rough roads, or at
high speeds, stop the vehicle now and then during
the trip to make sure the cargo remains in its place.
Do not exceed 58 kg (130 lb.) cargo weight on the roof
luggage carrier.
EXTERIOR EQUIPMENT
REAR STEP BUMPER
The rear step bumper is for rear end protection and easier
step–up loading.
CAUTION
Do not allow more than one person to get on the rear
step bumper at a time. It is designed for only one
person.
Never drive the vehicle with anyone on the rear step
bumper.
123
SECTION
1–6
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Occupant restraint systems
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Armrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS driver airbag and front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front passenger occupant classification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving position memory system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
125
125
130
147
149
151
166
179
194
199
200
225
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEATS
While the vehicle is being driven, all vehicle occupants should
have the seatback upright, sit well back in the seat and properly
wear the seat belts provided.
FRONT SEATS
Front seat precautions
Driver seat
CAUTION
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle unless the occupants are
properly seated. Do not allow any passengers to sit
in the luggage compartment or cargo area. Persons
not properly seated and/or not properly restrained by
seat belts can be severely injured in the event of
emergency braking or a collision.
The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force,
and can cause death or serious injury especially if the
driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
During driving, do not allow any passengers to stand
up or move around between seats. Otherwise, severe
injuries can occur in the event of emergency braking
or a collision.
Since the risk zone for driver airbag is the first 50 — 75
mm (2 — 3 in.) of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10
in.) from your driver airbag provides you with a clear
margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you
sit less than 250 mm (10 in.) away now, you can change
your driving position in several ways:
Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still
reaching the pedals comfortably.
Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle
designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm
(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way
forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat
somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes
it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non–slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle
has that feature.
125
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward.
This points the airbag toward your chest instead of
your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by
NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot
pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument
panel controls.
Front passenger seat
CAUTION
The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with
considerable force, and can cause death or serious
injury especially if the front passenger is very close to
the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far
from the airbag as possible with the seatback adjusted,
so the front passenger sits upright.
126
Front seats (with SRS side airbags)
CAUTION
The SRS side airbags are installed in the driver and front
passenger seats. Observe the following precautions.
Do not lean against the front door when the vehicle
is in use, since the side airbag inflates with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, you may
be killed or seriously injured.
Do not use seat accessories which cover the area
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
the seats equipped with side airbags. Such changes
may prevent the side airbag system from activating
correctly, disable the system or cause the side
airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or
serious injury.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat adjustment precautions
CAUTION
Do not adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving as
the seat may unexpectedly move and cause the
driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Be careful that the seat does not hit a passenger,
luggage or the rear seat.
NOTICE
Do not operate the control switch in more than one
dimension at a time. It may cause electrical overload.
127
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting front seats
16PY001
1 Seat position, seat cushion angle and height control
switch
2 Seatback angle control switch
3 Lumbar support control switch
128
Adjusting seat position
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat in that position. Do not
place anything under the seat, as this might interfere with the
seat movement.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting seatback angle
Adjusting seat cushion angle and height
(driver’s seat only)
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seatback in that position.
Move the control switch in the desired direction.
Releasing the switch will stop the seat cushion in that position.
CAUTION
Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a frontal
or rear collision when the driver and the front passenger
are sitting up straight and well back in the seats. If you
are reclined, the lap belt may slide past your hips and
apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your
neck may contact the shoulder belt. In the event of a
frontal collision, the more the seat is reclined, the
greater the risk of death or personal injury.
129
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjusting lumbar support
REAR SEATS
Rear seat precautions
CAUTION
Adjustment should not be made while the vehicle is
moving.
When folding the seat, secure the seat by adjusting
the length of the anchorage strap to prevent the seat
from falling down.
Push the control switch on either side.
The amount of lumbar support will change while the switch is
pushed.
When returning the seat to its original position,
observe the following precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sudden stop.
There is no person or luggage around the seat and
operate slowly by supporting the seat with your
hands.
The seat is securely locked by pushing forward and
rearward on the top of the seatback and by trying to
pull up the edge of the bottom cushion. Failure to do
so will prevent seat belt from operating properly.
The seat belts are not twisted or caught under the
seat and are arranged in their proper position and are
ready to use.
When using the seat, make sure the seat is securely
locked.
130
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
NOTICE
Avoid putting heavy loads on the removed seat. The
metallic tips of the seat legs may be damaged and the
seat cannot be reinstalled.
Tumbling, folding up or removing the seats will enlarge the
luggage compartment. See “Stowage precautions” on page
485 for precautions when loading luggage.
Adjusting rear seats
Second seat
131
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Lean forward and pull the lock release lever. Then lean
back to the desired angle and release the lever.
CAUTION
Third seat
132
Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
The seat belts provide maximum protection when the
passengers are sitting up straight and well back in the
seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt.
In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is
reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal injury.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Tumbling second seat (for third seat entry)
Vehicles with third seat: For easy access to the third seat,
tumble the second seat in accordance with the following
procedure.
Before tumbling the second seat, stow the second seat
buckles as shown above.
This prevents the buckles from falling out when you fold up the
second seat.
Vehicles with rear seat audio system or rear seat
entertainment system: Before tumbling the second seat,
close the headphone input jack lid.
133
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
NOTICE
The seat belt buckles must be stowed before you
tumble the second seat.
The headphone input jack lid of the rear seat audio
system or the rear seat entertainment system must
be closed before you tumble the second seat.
1. Lower the head restraints to the lowest position.
134
2. Fold down the seatbacks while pulling the lock release
levers and swing the whole seats up and forward until they
are locked.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
To return the seats to the original positions, push the red
knobs and swing the whole seats down and swing the
seatback up.
If you cannot raise the left side seatback because of the locked
seat belt, do not try it hard. Release the lock of the seat belt
in the following way.
1
Push in the lower front edge of the seatback to slacken the
seat belt.
2
Let the seat belt retract a little.
135
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Folding up third seats
When returning the seats to their original position,
observe the following precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:
Be careful not get your hands or feet pinched in the
seat.
Make sure the seats are securely locked by pushing
forward and rearward on the top of the seatbacks or
by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushions.
Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from
operating properly.
Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught
under the seat and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
136
Stow the rear seat belt buckles as shown above.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Make sure the tabs are securely locked in the cover.
Seat belt hanger
For the outer seat belts, use the seat belt hangers to
prevent the belts from being tangled.
For the center seat belt, stow the seat belt tabs into the
cover of the roof as shown above.
137
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
To release the concave end tab, see page 156 for instructions.
NOTICE
The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before
you fold up the seats.
1. Lower the outboard head restraints to the lowest
position and remove the center head restraint.
138
2. Unfasten the zippers behind the right side seatback and
stow the center head restraint into the seatback.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
3. Unlock the seatbacks by pushing the lock release
levers forward and fold them down.
5. Retract the seat legs, then take the holding straps out
and hang the straps to the assist grips. Pull the straps on
the free end to secure the seats.
4. Unlock the seat legs by pulling the seat leg lock release
knobs, and lift the whole seats sideward.
139
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
CAUTION
When folding up the third seats, fix the seats securely
by adjusting the length of the holding strap. Failure to
do so may cause an unexpected injury in the event of
emergency braking or collision.
When returning the seats to their original position,
observe the following precautions in order to prevent
personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:
Be careful not get your hands or feet pinched in the
seat.
Make sure the seats are securely locked by pushing
forward and rearward on the top of the seatbacks or
by trying to pull up the edge of the bottom cushions.
Failure to do so will prevent the seat belt from
operating properly.
Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught
under the seat and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
When the third seat to its original position, stow the holding
straps into the holders facing the direction shown in the
illustration.
To return them to the original positions, reverse the steps
above.
140
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Removing third seats
Seat belt hanger
Stow the rear seat belt buckles as shown above.
For the outer seat belts, use the seat belt hangers to
prevent the belts from being tangled.
For the center seat belt, stow the seat belt tabs into the
cover of the roof as shown above.
141
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Make sure the tabs are securely locked in the cover.
142
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
To release the concave end tab, see page 156 for instructions.
NOTICE
The seat belts and the buckles must be stowed before
you remove the seats.
1. Lower the outboard head restraints to the lowest
position and remove the center head restraint.
2. Unfasten the zippers behind the right side seatback and
stow the center head restraint into the seatback.
143
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
3. Unlock the seatbacks by pushing the lock release
levers forward and fold them down.
4. Unlock the seat legs by pulling the seat leg lock release
knobs, and lift the whole seats. Retract the seat legs, then
place the seats on the floor.
144
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
5. Remove the seat lock cover and push the seat lock
release knobs, then pull up the whole seats and remove
them. After removing the seats, reinstall the seat lock
cover.
NOTICE
Avoid putting heavy loads on the removed seats. The
metallic tips of the seat legs may be damaged and the
seats cannot be reinstalled.
145
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
To return them to the original positions, reverse the steps
above.
CAUTION
When removing or reinstalling the seats, observe the
following to prevent personal injury:
Do not remove or reinstall the seats while the vehicle
is moving.
Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the
seats.
Be careful not to hit the removed seats against a
person or drop it on yourself.
Do not try to sit on or place anything on the removed
seat.
146
To prevent personal injury in a collision or sudden stop:
Do not sit on or place anything on the folded seatback
while driving.
Do not leave the removed seat loose in the vehicle.
After reinstalling the seats, make sure the seats are
securely locked by pushing forward and rearward on
the top of the seatbacks or by trying to pull up the
edge of the bottom cushions. Failure to do so will
prevent the seat belt from operating properly.
Install each seat in the same position from which it
was removed. Failure to do so will prevent third seat
occupants from using seat belts properly.
Make sure the seat belts are not twisted or caught
under the seat and are arranged in their proper
position and are ready to use.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
HEAD RESTRAINTS
CAUTION
For your safety and comfort, adjust the head restraint
before driving.
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
Front seat
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down. To
move the head restraint forward or rearward, pull or push
the base of the head restraint.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
147
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Second and third seats
CAUTION
Adjust the center of the head restraint so that it is
closest to the top of your ears.
After adjusting the head restraint, make sure it is
locked in position.
Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Stowing the third center head restraint
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower it, press the
lock release button and push the head restraint down.
Second center head restraint: When an occupant sits on the
second center seat, always pull up the head restraint to the lock
position.
The head restraint is most effective when it is close to your
head. Therefore, using a cushion on the seatback is not
recommended.
The third center head restraint can be stowed in the right
side third seatback when they are not in use.
To stow the head restraint, unfasten the zippers behind
the seatback and stow it into the seatback.
148
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
ARMRESTS
Front seats
To use the armrest, lower the armrest to the lowest
position and raise it to the desired angle. Raising the
armrest to the highest position unlocks the armrest to let
you return it to the lowest position.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy
loads on it.
149
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
To use the armrest, pull it down as shown above.
Second seat
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the armrest, avoid putting heavy
loads on it.
150
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SEAT BELTS
Seat belt precautions
Pregnant woman. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Ask your doctor for specific recommendations. The lap belt
should be worn securely and as low as possible over the hips
and not on the waist.
Lexus strongly urges that the driver and passengers in the
vehicle be properly restrained at all times with the seat belts
provided. Failure to do so could increase the chance of injury
and/or the severity of injury in accidents.
Injured person. Lexus recommends the use of a seat belt.
Depending on the injury, first check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
The seat belts provided for your vehicle are designed for
people of adult size, large enough to properly wear them.
CAUTION
Child. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child
until the child becomes large enough to properly wear the
vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint” on page 200 for
details.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. According to accident statistics, the child is safer
when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
If a child must sit in the front seat, the seat belts should be worn
properly. If an accident occurs and the seat belts are not worn
properly, the force of the rapid inflation of the airbag may cause
death or serious injury to the child.
Do not allow any children to stand up or kneel on either rear or
front seats. An unrestrained child could suffer serious injury or
death during emergency braking or a collision. Also, do not let
the child sit on your lap. Holding a child in your arms does not
provide sufficient restraint.
Persons should ride in their seats properly wearing
their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer serious
bodily injury or death in the event of sudden braking or
a collision.
When using the seat belts, observe the following:
Use the belt for only one person at a time. Do not use
a single belt for two or more people — even children.
Avoid reclining the seatback any more than needed.
The seat belts provide maximum protection in a
frontal or rear collision when the driver and the front
passenger are sitting up straight and well back in the
seats. If you are reclined, the lap belt may slide past
your hips and apply restraint forces directly to the
abdomen or your neck may contact the shoulder belt.
In the event of a frontal collision, the more the seat is
reclined, the greater the risk of death or personal
injury.
151
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or
hardware. Take care that they do not get caught or
pinched in the seat or doors.
Inspect the belt system periodically. Check for cuts,
fraying, and loose parts. Damaged parts should be
replaced. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Keep the belts clean and dry. If they need cleaning,
use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water. Never
use bleach, dye, or abrasive cleaners, or allow them
to come into contact with the belt — they may
severely weaken the belts. (See “Cleaning the
interior” on page 633 for instructions.)
Replace the belt assembly (including bolts) if it has
been used in a severe impact. The entire assembly
should be replaced even if damage is not obvious.
152
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Fastening front, second and third seat belts
When a passenger’s shoulder belt is completely extended and
is then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position
and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child
restraint system securely. (For details, see “Child restraint” on
page 200.) To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then
pull the belt out once more.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the retractor, firmly pull
the belt and release it. You will then be able to smoothly pull
the belt out of the retractor.
CAUTION
Adjust the seat as needed and sit up straight and well back
in the seat. To fasten your belt, pull it out of the retractor
and insert the tab into the buckle.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
The seat belt length automatically adjusts to your size and the
seat position.
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on
impact. It also may lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow,
easy motion will allow the belt to extend, and you can move
around freely.
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the belt is not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot
protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.
153
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Adjust the position of the lap and shoulder belts.
1
Position the lap belt as low as possible on your hips — not
on your waist.
2
Adjust it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder portion
upward through the latch plate.
Front and second outboard seat belts only
Adjust the shoulder anchor position to your size.
To raise the anchor position, push the anchor up. To lower the
anchor position, support the anchor while you push the lock
release button then slide the anchor down. After the
adjustment, make sure the anchor is locked in position.
CAUTION
Both high–positioned lap belts and loose–fitting
belts could cause serious injuries due to sliding
under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on hip as possible.
Do not place the shoulder belt under your arm.
154
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of your shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from your neck, but not falling off your
shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of
protection in an accident and cause serious injuries in
a collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Third center seat belt
To release the belt, press the buckle release button and
allow the belt to retract.
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it out and check for
kinks or twists. Then make sure it remains untwisted as it
retracts.
CAUTION
Buckle with light gray buckle release button
The third center seat belt is a 3–point type restraint with 2
buckles. Both seat belt buckles must be correctly located and
securely latched for proper operation.
Make sure that buckle with light gray buckle release button is
securely latched for ready use of the center seat belt.
Do not separate the buckle with light gray buckle
release button. Otherwise, the seat belt may not work
properly. See the information in the following columns.
155
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Two buckles and tabs for third center seat belt.
The 2 buckles for the third center seat belt are distinguished
with colors of the buckle release button. Also the 2 tabs have
different shape for its end so that the belt is not buckled in the
wrong place.
156
1
Buckle with light gray buckle release button:
Properly matches with concave end tab
2
Buckle with red buckle release button:
Properly matches with round end tab
To release the concave end tab, insert the key into the hole on
buckle with light gray buckle release button and allow the belt
to retract.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
STOWING THE THIRD CENTER SEAT BELT
CAUTION
Do not use the third center seat belt with either buckle
release. Fastening only the shoulder belt or lap belt may
cause severe personal injury in case of sudden braking
or a collision.
Stow the seat belt tabs into the cover of the roof as shown
above.
Make sure the tabs are securely locked in the cover.
157
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
PULLING OUT THE THIRD CENTER SEAT BELT
Stowing the second and third seat belt
buckles
Pull the belt out a little and pull the tabs out from the cover.
Second seat
Third seat
158
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The second and third seat belt buckles can be stowed
when they are not in use.
Hanging the third outboard seat belts
Seat belt extender
If your seat belts cannot be fastened securely because they are
not long enough, a personalized seat belt extender is available
from your Lexus dealer free of charge.
Please contact your local Lexus dealer to order the proper
required length for the extender. Bring the heaviest coat you
expect to wear for proper measurement and selection of
length. Additional ordering information is available at your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Seat belt hanger
The third outboard seat belts can be hung when they are
not in use.
CAUTION
When using the seat belt extender, observe the
following precautions.
Failure to follow these
instructions could reduce the effectiveness of the seat
belt restraint system in case of an accident, increasing
the chance of personal injury.
Remember that the extender provided for you may
not be safe when used on a different vehicle, for
another person, or at a different seating position than
the one originally intended.
The third outboard seat belts must be removed from the
hangers when they are in use.
159
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Make sure the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is
illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the
front passenger seat. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue
from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat
belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making
sure the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illuminated.
If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front
passenger airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger side may not activate correctly, causing
death or serious injury in the event of collision.
If the seat belt extender has been connected to the
driver’s seat belt buckle without wearing the seat belt
when using the extender in the driver’s seat, the SRS
driver’s airbag system will judge that the driver wears
the seat belt even if not wearing it. In this case, the
driver’s airbag may not activate correctly, causing
death or serious injury in the event of collision. Be
sure to wear the seat belt with the seat belt extender.
160
Be sure to wear the seat belt without the seat belt
extender if you can fasten the seat belt without the
extender.
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a
child restraint system on the front or rear passenger
seat. If installing a child restraint system with the
seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system,
which could cause death or serious injury to the child
or other passengers in the event of collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt and the seat belt extender are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent you from properly latching the tab and
buckle.
To connect the extender to the seat belt, insert the tab into
the seat belt buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on the
buckle release buttons of the extender and the seat belt
are both facing outward as shown.
If the seat belt does not function normally,
immediately contact your Lexus dealer. Do not use
the seat until the seat belt is fixed, because it cannot
protect an adult occupant or your child from injury.
You will hear a click when the tab locks into the buckle.
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release
button on the extender, not on the seat belt. This helps prevent
damage to the vehicle interior and extender itself.
As far as the seat belt extender on the front passenger side is
concerned, do not fail to disconnect the extender from the seat
belt after the above operation in order to activate the front
passenger airbag correctly when getting into the vehicle next
time.
When not in use, remove the extender and store in the vehicle
for future use.
161
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Seat belt pretensioners
Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off (RSCA OFF)
indicator light
The driver and front passenger’s seat belt pretensioners
are designed to be activated in response to a severe
frontal impact or a vehicle rollover.
When the sensor detects a severe frontal impact or a vehicle
rollover, the front seat belts are quickly drawn back by the
retractors so that the belts snugly restrain the front seat
occupants.
The front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner will not activate
if no passenger is detected in the front passenger seat by the
front passenger occupant classification system. However, the
front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner may activate if
luggage is put on the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up
regardless of the presence of an occupant in the seat. (As for
the front passenger occupant classification system, see page
194.)
The seat belt pretensioners and SRS airbags may not operate
together in case of collisions at a certain speeds and angles.
162
The seat belt pretensioners will not operate in a vehicle rollover
if the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is on. For details, see “Roll
sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch” on page 199.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Once the front seat belt pretensioners have been activated, the
seat belt retractors remain locked.
CAUTION
1 Front airbag sensors
2 Seat belt pretensioner assemblies
3 Front passenger occupant classification system
(ECU and sensors)
4 SRS warning light
5 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
6 Airbag sensor assembly
The front seat belt pretensioner system consists mainly of the
above components, and their locations are shown in the
illustration.
The front seat belt pretensioners are controlled by the airbag
sensor assembly. The airbag sensor assembly consists of a
safing sensor and airbag sensor.
Do not modify, remove, strike or open the seat belt
pretensioner assemblies, airbag sensor or
surrounding area or wiring. Failure to follow these
instruction may prevent the seat belt pretensioners
from activating correctly, cause sudden operation of
the system or disable the system, which could result
in death or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer
about any repairs and modifications.
Do not modify or change the suspension system.
Such changes may cause the curtain shield airbags
to inflate accidentally, which could result in death or
serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
Do not use tires or wheels other than the
manufacture’s recommended size. Such a use may
cause the curtain shield airbags and seat belt
pretensioners to inflate accidentally, which could
result in death or serious injury. For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on page 589.
When the front seat belt pretensioners are activated, an
operating noise may be heard and a small amount of non–toxic
gas may be released. This does not indicate that a fire is
occurring. This gas is normally harmless.
163
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not place luggage heavier than specified on the
roof luggage carrier. Such luggage may cause the
curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners to
inflate accidentally, which could result in death or
serious injury. For details, see “Roof luggage
carrier” on page 120.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the seat belt
pretensioners in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two–way radio, cassette tape player or CD player
Repairs on or near the front seat belt retractor
assemblies
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the front end structure
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, the front
end structure and console
164
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6 seconds
or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
If either front seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled
out due to a malfunction or activation of the relevant front
seat belt pretensioner.
This indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the seat belt pretensioners are operating properly.
The front seat belt pretensioner assembly or surrounding
area has been damaged.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
front passenger occupant classification system, “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s
seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 62.)
165
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
xSRS DRIVER AIRBAG AND FRONT
PASSENGER AIRBAG
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the front seat belt pretensioners to operate.
The front seat belt pretensioner assembly is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags
are designed to provide further protection for the driver
and front passenger in addition to the primary safety
protection provided by the seat belts.
In response to a severe frontal impact, the SRS front airbags
work together with the seat belts to help reduce injury by
inflating. The SRS front airbags help to reduce injuries mainly
to the driver’s or front passenger’s head or chest caused hitting
the vehicle interior.
166
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no
passenger sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the
front passenger airbag may deploy if luggage is put in the seat,
or the seat belt is buckled up, regardless of the presence of an
occupant in the seat. (As for the front passenger occupant
classification system, see “Front passenger occupant
classification system” on page 194.).
Always wear your seat belt properly.
CAUTION
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the second or third seat of the vehicle and properly
restrained. The second or third seat is the safest for
infants and children. For instructions concerning the
installation of a child restraint system, see “Child
restraint” on page 200.
The SRS front airbag system is designed only as a
supplement to the primary protection of the driver
and front passenger seat belt systems. The driver
and front passenger can be killed or seriously injured
by the inflating airbags if they do not wear the
available seat belts properly. During sudden braking
just before a collision, an unrestrained driver or front
passenger can move forward into direct contact with
or close proximity to the airbag which may then
deploy during the collision. To ensure maximum
protection in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of death or serious
injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 151.
167
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The SRS front airbags are designed to deploy in severe
(usually frontal) collisions where the magnitude and
duration of the forward deceleration of the vehicle
exceeds the designed threshold level.
The SRS front airbags will deploy if the severity of the impact
is above the designed threshold level, comparable to an
approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision when the vehicle has
the impact straight into a fixed barrier that does not move or
deform.
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if
the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign
pole, which can move or deform on impact, or if the vehicle is
involved in an underride collision (e.g. a collision in which the
front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a
truck, etc.).
It is possible that in some collisions where the forward
deceleration of the vehicle is very close to the designed
threshold level, the SRS front airbags and the seat belt
pretensioners may not activate together.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
168
1 Collision from the side
2 Collision from the rear
3 Vehicle rollover
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate
if the vehicle is involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low–speed frontal collision.
But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient
forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the
SRS front airbags may occur.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
16PY180
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact
occurs to the underside of your vehicle. Some examples
are shown in the illustration.
169
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1 Airbag module for front passenger
(airbag and inflator)
2 Front passenger occupant classification system
(ECU and sensors)
3 “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights
4 SRS warning light
5 Airbag module for driver (airbag and inflator)
6 Driver’s seat position sensor
7 Driver’s seat belt buckle switch
8 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
9 Front airbag sensors
10 Airbag sensor assembly
The SRS front airbag system consists mainly of the above
components, and their locations are shown in the illustration.
The airbag sensor assembly consists of a safing sensor and
airbag sensor.
170
The airbag sensors constantly monitor the forward
deceleration of the vehicle. If an impact results in a forward
deceleration beyond the designed threshold level, the system
triggers the airbag inflators. At this time a chemical reaction in
the inflators very quickly fills the airbags with non–toxic gas to
help restrain the forward motion of the occupants. The front
airbags then quickly deflate, so that there is no obstruction of
the driver’s vision should it be necessary to continue driving.
When the airbags inflate, they produce a loud noise and
release some smoke and residue along with non–toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the
vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as
soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you safely exit from the vehicle, you should
do so immediately.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, primarily to the
head and chest, it may also cause other, less severe injuries
to the face, chest, arms and hands. These are usually in the
nature of minor burns or abrasions and swelling, but the force
of a deploying airbag can cause more serious injuries,
especially if an occupant’s hands, arms, chest or head are in
close proximity to the airbag module at the time of deployment.
This is why it is important for the occupant to: avoid placing any
object or part of the body between the occupant and the airbag
module; sit straight and well back into the seat; wear the
available seat belt properly; and sit as far as possible from the
airbag module, while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover
and inflator) may be hot for several minutes after deployment,
so do not touch! The airbags inflate only once. The windshield
may be damaged by absorbing some of the force of the
inflating airbag.
CAUTION
The driver or front passenger who is too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard during airbag deployment
can be killed or seriously injured. Lexus strongly
recommends that:
The driver sit as far back as possible from the
steering wheel while still maintaining control of the
vehicle.
The front passenger sit as far back as possible from
the dashboard.
All vehicle occupants be properly restrained using
the available seat belts.
For instructions and precautions concerning the
seating position, see “Front seat precautions” on page
125.
171
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean over the
dashboard when the vehicle is in use, since the front
passenger airbag could inflates with considerable
speed and force. Anyone who is up against, or very
close to, an airbag when it inflates, can be killed or
seriously injured. Sit up straight and well back in the
seat, and always use your seat belt properly.
172
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Lexus strongly recommends that all infants and
children be placed in the rear seat of the vehicle and
be properly restrained.
Do not hold a child on your lap or in your arms. Use
a child restraint system in the second or third seat.
For instructions concerning the installation of a child
restraint system, see “Child restraint” on page 200.
173
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not put anything or any part of your body on or in
front of the dashboard or steering wheel pad that
houses the front airbag system. They might restrict
inflation or cause death or serious injury as they are
projected rearward by the force of the deploying
airbags. Likewise, the driver and front passenger
should not hold objects in their arms or on their
knees.
Do not modify or remove any wiring. Do not modify,
remove, strike or open any components, such as the
steering wheel pad, steering wheel, column cover,
front passenger airbag cover, front passenger airbag
or airbag sensor assembly. Doing so may prevent the
front airbag system from activating correctly, cause
sudden activation of the system or disable the
system, which could result in death or serious injury.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for a person with a
physical disability, consult your Lexus dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS front airbags
operation.
NOTICE
174
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS front airbag
system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two–way radio, cassette tape player or CD player
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the front end structure
Attachment of a grille guard (bull bar, kangaroo bar,
etc.), snowplow, winches or any other equipment to
the front end
Repairs made on or near the front fenders, front end
structure, console, steering column, steering wheel
or dashboard near the front passenger airbag
175
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6 seconds
or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will
be illuminated if there is a malfunction in the front passenger
occupant classification system.
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS front airbags are operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
front passenger occupant classification system, “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s
seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 62.)
176
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
The SRS front airbags have been inflated.
The front of the vehicle (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS front airbags to inflate.
16PY156
177
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The pad section of the steering wheel or front passenger
airbag cover (shaded in the illustration) is scratched,
cracked, or otherwise damaged.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
178
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
SRS SIDE AIRBAGS AND CURTAIN
SHIELD AIRBAGS
The SRS side airbag on the passenger seat will not activate if
there is no passenger sitting in the front passenger seat.
However, the side airbag on the passenger seat may deploy if
luggage is put in the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up
regardless of the presence of the occupant in the seat. (As for
the front passenger occupant classification system, see “Front
passenger occupant classification system” on page 194.)
Roll sensing function:
In response to a vehicle rollover, the curtain shield airbags on
both sides work with the seat belts to help reduce injury by
inflating. The curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly
to the driver’s, front passenger’s or second passenger’s head
and help prevent them from being thrown out of the vehicle.
(This function can be turned off if inflation is not desired. See
“Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch” on page 199.)
The SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) side airbags
and curtain shield airbags are designed to provide further
protection for the driver, front passenger and rear
outboard passengers in addition to the primary safety
protection provided by the seat belts.
In response to a severe side impact, the SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags work with the seat belts to help reduce
injury by inflating. The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries
mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s torso and the SRS
curtain shield airbags help reduce injuries mainly to the
driver’s, front passenger’s or rear outboard passenger’s head.
The SRS curtain shield airbag on the passenger side are
activated even with no passenger in the front seat or second
outboard seat.
The SRS curtain shield airbags may activate even when the
side airbags are not activated.
Always wear your seat belt properly.
179
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system
is designed only as a supplement to the primary
protection of the driver, front passenger and second
outboard passenger seat belt systems. To ensure
maximum protection in an accident, the driver and all
passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly. Wearing a seat belt properly during an
accident reduces the chances of death or serious
injury or being thrown out of the vehicle. For
instructions and precautions concerning the seat
belt system, see “Seat belts” on page 151.
Do not allow anyone to lean his/her head or any part
of his/her body against the door or the area of the
seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof side rail from which
the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag deploy
even if he/she is a child seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbag and
curtain shield airbag inflate, and the impact of the
deploying airbags could cause death or serious
injury to the occupant.
180
Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and
children can be killed or seriously injured by the
deploying airbags. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using
a child restraint system.
Lexus strongly
recommends that all infants and children be placed
in the second or third seats of the vehicle and
properly restrained. The second or third seats are the
safest for infants and children. For instructions
concerning the installation of a child restraint
system, see “Child restraint” on page 200.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1 Collision from the side to the vehicle body other
than the passenger compartment
2 Collision from the side at an angle
1 Collision from the front
2 Collision from the rear
3 Vehicle rollover
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system may
not activate if the vehicle is subjected to a collision from
the side at certain angles, or a collision to the side of the
vehicle body other than the passenger compartment as
shown in the illustration.
The SRS side airbags are not generally designed to inflate
if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision, if it rolls
over, or if it is involved in a low–speed side collision.
The SRS side airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the
side.
The curtain shield airbags are designed to inflate when the
passenger compartment area suffers a severe impact from the
side or vehicle rollover.
Always wear your seat belts properly.
181
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1 The angle of vehicle tip–up is marginal
2 Skidding vehicle hitting a curb stone
The curtain shield airbags may inflate if the angle of
vehicle tip–up is marginal or if the skidding vehicle’s tires
hit a curb stone laterally as shown in the illustration.
182
1 Collision from the front
2 Collision from the rear
3 Pitching end over end
The curtain shield airbags are not generally designed to
inflate if the vehicle is involved in a front or rear collision,
if it pitches end over end, or if it is involved in a low–speed
side collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or hard surface
2 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
3 Landing hard or vehicle falling
16PY181
The SRS side and curtain shield airbags may deploy if a
serious impact occurs to the underside of your vehicle.
Some examples are shown in the illustration.
183
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1 Curtain shield airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
2 Front passenger occupant classification system
(ECU and sensors)
3 “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights
4 Side airbag modules (airbag and inflator)
5 Curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
6 SRS warning light and “RSCA OFF” indicator light
7 Side and curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies
8 Roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch
9 Front passenger’s seat belt buckle switch
10 Airbag sensor assembly
In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor assembly triggers the
curtain shield airbag inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction
in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non–toxic gas to
help restrain the lateral motion of the occupants.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system consists
mainly of the above components, and their locations are shown
in the illustration.
Deployment of the airbags happens in a fraction of a second,
so the airbags must inflate with considerable force. While the
system is designed to reduce serious injuries, it may also
cause minor burns or abrasions and swelling.
The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag system is
controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag sensor
assembly consists of a safing sensor and airbag sensor.
In a severe side impact, the side and curtain shield airbag
sensor and/or the curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the
side airbag inflators and/or the curtain shield airbag inflators.
At this time a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the
airbags with non–toxic gas to help restrain the lateral motion
of the occupants.
184
When the airbags inflate, they produce a fairly loud noise and
release some smoke and residue along with non–toxic gas.
This does not indicate a fire. This smoke may remain inside the
vehicle for some time, and may cause some minor irritation to
the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to wash off any residue as
soon as possible to prevent any potential skin irritation with
soap and water. If you can safely exit from the vehicle, you
should do so immediately.
Front seats as well as parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof
side rail may be hot for several minutes, but the airbags
themselves will not be hot. The airbags are designed to inflate
only once.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate with
considerable force. To reduce the possibility of death
or serious injury when they inflate, the driver, front
passenger and rear outboard passengers must:
Wear their seat belts properly.
Remain properly seated with their backs upright and
against the seats at all times.
Do not allow anyone to lean against the door when
the vehicle is in use, since the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag could inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, he/she may be killed or
seriously injured. Special care should be taken
especially when you have a small child in the vehicle.
Sit up straight and well back in the seat, distributing
your weight evenly in the seat. Do not apply
excessive weight to the outer side of the seats with a
side airbag and to the front pillar, rear pillar and roof
side rail with a curtain shield airbag.
Improper sitting and wearing of the seat belts may
not retain you inside the vehicle.
185
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Make sure the “RSCA OFF” indicator light is off. The
curtain shield airbags will not inflate in a vehicle
rollover if this indicator light is on and you may be
killed or seriously injured. For details, see “Roll
sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch” on page
199.
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head closer to the
area where the side airbag and curtain shield airbag
inflate, since these airbags could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured. Special care
should be taken especially when you have a small
child in the vehicle.
Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat,
facing the passenger’s side door, since the side
airbag and curtain shield airbag could inflate with
considerable speed and force. Otherwise, he/she
may be killed or seriously injured. Special care
should be taken especially when you have a small
child in the vehicle.
186
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not allow anyone to get his/her head or hands out
of windows, since the curtain shield airbags could
inflate with considerable speed and force.
Otherwise, he/she may be killed or seriously injured.
Special care should be taken especially when you
have a small child in the vehicle.
187
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not attach a cupholder or any other device or
object on or around the door. When the side airbag
and curtain shield airbag inflate, the cupholder or any
other device or object will be thrown with great force,
or the side airbag and curtain shield airbag may not
activate correctly, resulting in death or serious injury.
Likewise, the driver and front passenger should not
hold objects in their arms or on their knees.
188
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not attach a microphone or any other device or
object around the area where the curtain shield
airbag activates such as on the windshield glass,
side door glass, front and rear pillars, roof side rail
and assist grips. When the curtain shield airbag
inflates, the microphone or other device or object will
be thrown away with great force or the curtain shield
airbag may not activate correctly, resulting in death
or serious injury.
Do not hook a hanger, heavy or sharp pointed objects
on the coat hook. If the curtain shield airbag inflates,
those items will be thrown away with great force or
the curtain shield airbag may not activate correctly,
resulting in death or serious injury. When you hang
clothes, hang them on the coat hook directly.
189
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts
where the side airbags inflate. Such accessories may
prevent the side airbags from activating correctly,
causing death or serious injury.
Do not modify or replace the seats or upholstery of
the seats with side airbags. Such changes may
prevent the side airbag system form activating
correctly, disable the system or cause the side
airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or
serious injury.
Do not disassemble or repair the front and rear pillars
and roof side rails containing the curtain shield
airbags. Such changes may disable the system or
cause the curtain shield airbags to inflate
accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.
Do not modify or change the suspension system.
Such changes may cause the curtain shield airbags
to inflate accidentally, which could result in death or
serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
Do not use tires or wheels other than the
manufacture’s recommended size. Such a use may
cause the curtain shield airbags and seat belt
pretensioners to inflate accidentally, which could
result in death or serious injury. For details, see
“Checking and replacing tires” on page 589.
190
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not place luggage heavier than specified on the
roof luggage carrier. Such luggage may cause the
curtain shield airbags and seat belt pretensioners to
inflate accidentally, which could result in death or
serious injury. For details, see “Roof luggage
carrier” on page 120.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death
or serious injury. Consult your Lexus dealer about any
repair and modification.
If you wish to modify your vehicle for a person with a
physical disability, consult your Lexus dealer. It may
dangerously interfere with the SRS side airbags and
curtain shield airbags operation.
NOTICE
Do not perform any of the following changes without
consulting your Lexus dealer. Such changes can
interfere with proper operation of the SRS side airbag
and curtain shield airbag system in some cases.
Installation of electronic devices such as a mobile
two–way radio, cassette tape player or CD player
Modification of the suspension system
Modification of the structure of the passenger
compartment
Repairs made on or near the console or front seat
191
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If any of the following conditions occurs, this indicates a
malfunction of the airbags or seat belt pretensioners. Contact
your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position or remains on for more than 6 seconds
or flashes.
The light comes on or starts flashing while driving.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will
be illuminated if there is a malfunction in the front passenger
occupant classification system.
The indicator comes on when the ignition key is turned to
the “ON” position. It goes off after about 6 seconds. This
means the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are
operating properly.
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor
assembly, front airbag sensors, side and curtain shield airbag
sensor assemblies, curtain shield airbag sensor assemblies,
driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt buckle switch,
front passenger occupant classification system, “AIRBAG ON”
indicator light, “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light, front passenger’s
seat belt buckle switch, front seat belt pretensioner
assemblies, inflators, warning light, “RSCA OFF” indicator
light, interconnecting wiring and power sources. (For details,
see “Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers” on
page 62 for instructions.)
192
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer as soon as
possible:
Any of the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags have
been inflated.
The portion of the doors (shaded in the illustration) was
involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause
the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
16PY177
The surface of the seats with the side airbag (shaded in the
illustration) is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.
The portion of the front pillars, rear pillars or roof side rail
garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags
inside (shaded in the illustration) is scratched, cracked, or
otherwise damaged.
NOTICE
Do not disconnect the battery cables before contacting
your Lexus dealer.
193
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
FRONT PASSENGER OCCUPANT
CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant
classification system. This system detects the conditions
1 — 4 in the table shown below, and based on these
conditions activates or deactivates the airbags. The
system monitors the weight and load on the front
passenger seat, and the seat belt buckle switch in
determining conditions 1 — 4.
In order for the system to detect the conditions correctly,
do not do any of the following:
Apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment
(e.g. armrest).
Attach a commercial seatback table, etc. to the front
passenger seatback.
Put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your
hands or feet on the seat seatback from the rear passenger
seat.
194
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator lights will be illuminated
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and a child
or child restraint system is in the front passenger seat (see
table–condition 2). This indicates that in the event of a
severe frontal or passenger’s side impact, the front
passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger
seat are deactivated and will not deploy.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If the front passenger occupant classification system
determines that a person of adult size sits in the front
passenger seat but the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light is
illuminated, one of the following is likely to have occurred:
The rear passenger lifts the front passenger seat cushion
with their legs.
The “AIRBAG ON” and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light will
be initially illuminated when the ignition switch is turned
to the “ON” position. It will remain for about four seconds
and then go off. After about two seconds, the front
passenger occupant classification system operates and
judges whether to turn the indicator light on or not.
Objects are placed under the front passenger seat.
A front passenger seat seatback is in contact with a rear
seat.
To ensure the system correctly detects an adult sitting in the
front passenger seat, make sure the above do not occur.
Make sure the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illuminated when
an adult sits in the front passenger seat. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up
straight, well back in the seat, and with the seat belt worn
correctly. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light still remains
illuminated, either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat,
or if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat fully
rearward.
The SRS warning light and “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light
will be illuminated if there is a malfunction in the front
passenger occupant classification system.
195
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system
Indicator/warning light
Devices
Condition detected
by the front
passenger occupant
classification system
“AIRBAG
ON” and
“AIRBAG
OFF”
indicator
lights
SRS
warning light
Front
passenger’s
seat belt
reminder
light
1 Adult*1
“AIRBAG
ON”
Off
Flashing*4
2 Child *2 or child
“AIRBAG
OFF”
Off
Flashing*4
Deactivated
Not
illuminated
Off
Off
Deactivated
“AIRBAG
OFF”
On
Off
Deactivated
restraint system*3
3 Unoccupied
4 There is a
malfunction in the
system
Front
passenger
airbag
Side airbag
on the front
passenger
seat
Curtain
shield airbag
in the front
passenger
side
Front
passenger’s
seat belt
pretensioner
Activated
Activated
Activated
Deactivated
Activated
*1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her
as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
*3: Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward–facing child restraint system should
only be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint system” on page 202 as for installing
the child restraint system.)
*4: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
196
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat
or equipment (e.g. armrest).
To avoid potential death or serious injury when the front
passenger occupant classification system does not
detect the conditions correctly, observe the following.
Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by
putting your hands or feet on the front passenger
seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
Wear the seat belt properly.
Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger
seat with their feet or press on the seatback with their
legs.
Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not
been left inserted into the buckle before someone
sits in the front passenger seat.
Make sure the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is
illuminated when using the seat belt extender for the
front passenger seat. If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated, disconnect the extender tongue
from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat
belt. Reconnect the seat belt extender after making
sure the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illuminated.
If you use the seat belt extender while the “AIRBAG
OFF” indicator light is illuminated, the front
passenger airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger side may not activate correctly, which
could cause death or serious injury in the event of
collision.
Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
Do not recline the front passenger seat seatback so
far that it touches a rear seat. This may cause the
“AIRBAG OFF” indicator light to be illuminated,
which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not
deploy in the event of a severe accident. If the
seatback touches the rear seat, return the seatback
to a position where it does not touch the rear seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as
possible when the vehicle is moving. Reclining the
seatback excessively may lessen the effectiveness
of the seat belt system.
197
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the
“AIRBAG ON” indicator light should be illuminated.
If the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator is illuminated, ask the
passenger to sit up straight, well back in the seat, feet
on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If
the “AIRBAG OFF” indicator still remain illuminated,
either ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or
if that is not possible, move the front passenger seat
fully rearward.
When it is unavoidable to install the forward–facing
child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on the front
passenger seat in the proper order. (As for the
installation order, see “Child restraint system” on
page 202.)
Do not remove the seat.
Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to
severe impact. Otherwise, the SRS warning light may
come on to indicate a malfunction of the detection
system. In this case, contact your Lexus dealer
immediately.
Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat
should not contact the front seatbacks.
198
In addition to the precautions outlined above, the “AIRBAG
ON” indicator light may be illuminated when a child sits in the
front passenger seat or a forward–facing child restraint system
is installed on the front passenger seat. If the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is not illuminated in these circumstances, the
front passenger airbag and side airbag on the front passenger
side are in an activated condition — the airbags will deploy if
an impact meets the deployment criteria. Refer to all the
cautions in this Section and “Child restraint system” on page
202.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
ROLL SENSING OF CURTAIN
SHIELD AIRBAGS OFF SWITCH
In a severe side impact, the curtain shield airbags on impacted
side will inflate even if the roll sensing function is turned off.
(For details about the curtain shield airbags, see “SRS side
airbags and curtain shield airbags” on page 179.)
In a severe frontal impact, the seat belt pretensioners will work
even if the roll sensing function is turned off. (For details about
the seat belt pretensioners, see “Seat belt pretensioners” on
page 162.)
If the ignition switch is turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” with the roll
sensing function off and then the ignition switch is turned back
to “ON”, the roll sensing function will turn back on
automatically.
The roll sensing of curtain shield airbags off switch
(“RSCA OFF” switch) can turn off the curtain shield
airbags and seat belt pretensioners in a vehicle rollover.
This switch should only be used if inflation is not desired
(such as extreme off–road driving).
When you push the “RSCA OFF” switch for a few seconds with
the ignition switch on, the “RSCA OFF” indicator light comes
on and the roll sensing function is turned off. When you push
the switch again, the indicator light goes off and the roll sensing
function is turned on. (For details about the roll sensing
function, see “SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags” on
page 179.)
CAUTION
Before normal driving, make sure the “RSCA OFF”
indicator light is off.
When the roll sensing function is turned off (and the
“RSCA OFF” indicator light is on), the curtain shield
airbags and seat belt pretensioners will not work in
a vehicle rollover. Turning off the curtain shield
airbags and seat belt pretensioners reduces
occupant protection which your vehicle safety
systems can provide in accidents and increase the
likelihood of death or serious injuries.
199
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CHILD RESTRAINT
Child restraint precautions
Lexus strongly urges the use of appropriate child restraint
systems for children.
The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A. and Canada now require
the use of a child restraint system.
Your vehicle conforms to SAE J1819.
If a child is too large for a child restraint system, the child should
sit in the rear seat and must be restrained using the vehicle’s
seat belt. See “Seat belts” on page 151 for details.
200
CAUTION
For effective protection in automobile accidents and
sudden stops, a child must be properly restrained,
using a seat belt or child restraint system depending
on age and size of the child. Holding a child in your
arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system.
In an accident, the child can be crushed against the
windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.
Lexus strongly urges use of a proper child restraint
system which conforms to the size of the child
installed on the rear seat. According to accident
statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained
in the rear seat than in the front seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an
accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front
passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury
to the child if the rear–facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat.
A forward–facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front
passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.
On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield
airbags, do not allow the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillar or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side airbags and curtain
shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
201
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a
child restraint system on the front or rear passenger
seat. If installing a child restraint system with the
seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat
belt will not securely hold the child restraint system,
which could cause death or serious injury to the child
or other passengers in the event of collision.
Make sure you have complied with all installation
instructions provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and that the system is properly
secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause
death or serious injury to the child in the event of a
sudden stop or accident.
Child restraint system
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must
itself be properly restrained on the seat with the lap
portion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must carefully
consult
the
manufacturer’s
instructions
which
accompany the child restraint system.
To provide proper restraint, use a child restraint system
following the manufacturer’s instructions about the appropriate
age and size of the child for the child restraint system.
Install the child restraint system correctly following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer. General directions
are also provided under the following illustrations.
The child restraint system should be installed on the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, the child is safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
When not using the child restraint system, keep it secured with
the seat belt or place it somewhere other than the passenger
compartment. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in
the event of a sudden stop or accident.
202
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Types of child restraint system
(B) Convertible seat
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
depending on the child’s age and size.
(A) Infant seat
(B) Convertible seat
(C) Booster seat
Install the child restraint system following the instructions
provided by its manufacturer.
Your vehicle has anchor brackets for securing the top strap of
a child restraint system.
For instructions about how to use the anchor bracket, see
“Using a top strap” on page 219.
(C) Booster seat
The child restraint lower anchorages approved for your vehicle
may also be used. See “Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages” on page 222.
(A) Infant seat
203
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
INSTALLATION WITH 3–POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
(A) Infant seat installation
CAUTION
An infant seat must be used in rear–facing position only.
204
Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an
accident the force of the rapid inflation of the front
passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury
to the child if the rear–facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the second right seat.
Align both third seatbacks at the same angle
When installing a child restraint system in the third
center position, align both seatbacks at the same
angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot
be securely restrained and this may cause death or
serious injuries in a collision.
205
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the infant
seat following the instructions provided by its manufacturer
and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not to twist the
belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
206
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
To hold the infant seat securely, make sure the belt is in the lock
mode before letting the belt retract.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
3. While pressing the infant seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the infant seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
207
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(B) Convertible seat installation
4. To remove the infant seat, press the buckle release button
and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will move
freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older child
passenger.
A convertible seat must be used in forward–facing or
rear–facing position depending on the age and size of the
child.
When installing, follow the manufacturer’s
instructions about the appropriate age and size of the
child as well as directions for installing the child restraint
system.
Install the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a
front passenger occupant classification system. In order to
activate the occupant classification system correctly, install the
forward–facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat in the following order:
1. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position.
2. Move the front passenger seat to the rearward position.
3. Put the child restraint system on the front passenger seat
without putting your weight on the front passenger seat.
4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat belt buckle.
208
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended. To hold the seat securely, make sure the belt is in
the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
6. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
CAUTION
CAUTION
When it is unavoidable to install the forward–facing
child restraint system on the front passenger seat,
install the child restraint system on the front passenger
seat in the proper order. Otherwise, the front passenger
occupant classification system can not detect the
presence of the child restraint system and the front
passenger airbag and side airbag on the front
passenger seat could deploy.
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
7. Put a child on the child restraint system and secure the child,
complying with the instructions provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer.
The “AIRBAG OFF” indicator light should be illuminated when
the ignition key is “ON” and the child is in the child restraint
system after following these procedures. The “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light indicates the SRS front passenger airbag and
side airbag on the passenger side will not deploy. If the
“AIRBAG ON” indicator light is illuminated, remove the child
restraint system and reinstall it with the ignition key in the
“ACC” or “LOCK” position. If the “AIRBAG ON” indicator light
still remains illuminated when the ignition key is turned to the
“ON” position, then the SRS front passenger airbag and side
airbag on the passenger side may deploy in an accident. Do
not drive the vehicle in this condition. Remove the child
restraint system and contact your Lexus dealer.
209
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
Never install a rear–facing child restraint system on
the front passenger seat even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an
accident the force of the rapid inflation of the front
passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury
to the child if the rear–facing child restraint system is
installed on the front passenger seat.
210
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
A forward–facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front
passenger airbag inflate with considerable speed
and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or
seriously injured.
On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield
airbags, do not allow the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillar, or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
211
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
If the driver’s seat position does not allow sufficient
space for safe installation, install the child restraint
system on the second right seat.
212
Align both third seatbacks at the same angle
When installing a child restraint system in the third
center position, align both seatbacks at the same
angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot
be securely restrained and this may cause death or
serious injuries in a collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through or around the
convertible seat following the instructions provided by its
manufacturer and insert the tab into the buckle taking care not
to twist the belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt tight.
2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it in the lock mode.
When the belt is then retracted even slightly, it cannot be
extended.
To hold the convertible seat securely, make sure the belt is in
the lock mode before letting the belt retract.
CAUTION
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
213
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
3. While pressing the convertible seat firmly against the seat
cushion and seatback, let the shoulder belt retract as far as it
will go to hold the convertible seat securely.
CAUTION
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
214
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(C) Booster seat installation
4. To remove the convertible seat, press the buckle release
button and allow the belt to retract completely. The belt will
move freely again and be ready to work for an adult or older
child passenger.
A booster seat must be used in forward–facing position
only.
215
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
On vehicles with side airbags and curtain shield
airbags, do not allow the child to lean his/her head or
any part of his/her body against the door or the area
of the seat, front or rear pillar, or roof side rail from
which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags
deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint
system. It is dangerous if the side airbag and curtain
shield airbag inflate, and the impact could cause
death or serious injury to the child.
Move seat fully back
CAUTION
A forward–facing child restraint system should be
allowed to be installed on the front passenger seat
only when it is unavoidable. Always move the seat as
far back as possible even if the “AIRBAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front
passenger airbag could inflate with considerable
speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured.
216
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Align both third seatbacks at the same angle
When installing a child restraint system in the third
center position, align both seatbacks at the same
angle. Otherwise, the child restraint system cannot
be securely restrained and this may cause death or
serious injuries in a collision.
1. Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the lap and shoulder belt
through or around the booster seat and child following the
instructions provided by its manufacturer and insert the tab into
the buckle taking care not to twist the belt.
Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly across the child’s
shoulder and that the lap belt is positioned as low as possible
on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on page 151 for details.
CAUTION
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the center of child’s shoulder. The belt should
be kept away from child’s neck, but not falling off
child’s shoulder. Otherwise, the child may be killed
or seriously injured in case of sudden braking or a
collision.
217
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Both high–positioned lap belts and loose–fitting
belts could cause death or serious injuries due to
sliding under the lap belt during a collision or other
unintended event. Keep the lap belt positioned as
low on a child’s hips as possible.
For child’s safety, do not place the shoulder belt
under child’s arm.
After inserting the tab, make sure the tab and buckle
are locked and that the lap and shoulder portions of
the belt are not twisted.
Do not insert coins, clips, etc. in the buckle as this
may prevent your child from properly latching the tab
and buckle.
If the seat belt does not function normally, it cannot
protect your child from death or serious injury.
Contact your Lexus dealer immediately. Do not
install the child restraint system on the seat until the
seat belt is fixed.
218
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Using a top strap
2. To remove the booster seat, press the buckle release button
and allow the belt to retract.
Follow the procedure below for a child restraint system
that requires the use of a top strap.
219
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
1 Anchor brackets
2 Symbol mark
1. Remove the head restraint.
Use the anchor brackets on the back of the second seatback
to attach the top strap.
Anchor brackets are installed for each second seating
positions.
This symbol mark indicates the location of the anchor brackets.
2. Open the cover of the anchor bracket.
220
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
3. Fix the child restraint system with the seat belt.
5. Replace the head restraint.
4. Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the
top strap.
Be sure to close the cover when the anchor bracket is not in
use.
For instructions to install the child restraint system, see “Child
restraint system” on page 202.
CAUTION
Make sure the top strap is securely latched, and check
that the child restraint system is securely by pushing
and pulling it in different directions. Follow all the
installation instructions provided by its manufacturer.
221
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Installation with child restraint lower
anchorages
The lower anchorages for the child restraint system
interfaced with the FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2
specification are installed in the second seat.
The anchorages are installed in the seat cushion of the right
side seating position and between the center and left side
seating position.
Child restraint system interfaced with the FMVSS213 or
CMVSS213 specification can be fixed with these anchorages.
In this case, it is not necessary to fix the child restraint system
with a seat belt on the vehicle.
222
1
1st look position
2
5th look position
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM INSTALLATION
1. Fold down the seatback. Make sure the rear seat legs
are relocked into place (folding down the seatback will
disengage them) by pushing downward on the back of the
seat. Adjust the seatback to the 1st lock position (most
upright position) and then to the 5th lock position.
Make sure the seat and seatback is locked securely.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
16PY173
Canada only
Type A
16PY174
Canada only
Type B
223
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
2. Take off the cover on the seat cushion.
3. Widen the slits of the seat cushion a little and confirm
the position of the lower anchorages near the buttons on
the seatback.
4. Type A — Latch the hooks of lower straps onto the
anchorages and tighten the lower straps.
4. Type B — Latch the buckles onto the anchorages.
For owners in Canada — The symbol on a child restraint
system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.
If your child restraint system has a top strap, it should be
anchored. (For the installation of the top strap, see “Using a top
strap” on page 219.)
For installation details, refer to the instruction manual equipped
with each product.
224
CAUTION
When using the lower anchorages for the child
restraint system, be sure that there are no irregular
objects around the anchorages or that the seat belt is
not caught.
Push and pull the child restraint system in different
directions to be sure it is secure. Follow all the
installation
instructions
provided
by
its
manufacturer.
Do not install a child restraint system on the second
seat if it interferes with the lock mechanism of the
front seats. This can cause death or serious injury to
the child and front passenger in case of sudden
braking or a collision.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
SYSTEM
A microcomputer will memorize the position of the driver’s
seat, and the positions of the tilt and telescopic steering, and
outside rear view mirrors. Two different driving position profiles
can be entered into the computer’s memory.
Recording the driving position in the computer’s memory can
only be done when the ignition key is in the “ON” position and
the selector lever is in the “P” position.
When using the left side lower anchorages for the
child restraint system, do not sit in the center seat.
The performance of the center seat belt cannot be
brought out sufficiently because the belt may be
high–positioned or the seat belt may be loose–fitting,
posing the risk of serious injury in the case of
collision.
Setting the driving position
1. Adjust the driver’s seat, tilt and telescopic steering and
outside rear view mirrors to the desired position.
2. While pushing the “SET” button, push button “1” or “2”
until the signal beeps.
225
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
The beep sound means that the positions are recorded in the
computer’s memory.
By repeating these two steps and pressing the remaining
button, the driving position for another driver can be recorded.
Conditions for memorized position activation
Ignition key “ON” and selector lever in “P” position.
All parts of the memorized positions can be activated.
To set a new memorized position, select the desired position
and perform step 2. The previous memory will be erased and
the new position will be set.
Key not in ignition switch and within 30 seconds of opening
driver’s door.
The memorized position can be activated, except for the tilt
and telescopic steering.
To make only slight changes to an already memorized position,
the easiest way is to first activate the memorized position, then
make the desired changes and perform step 2 above.
If any driving position memory switch is pushed while one of the
memorized driving position profiles is being activated, the
operation will stop.
Recalling the memorized position
To activate the system, push the desired button (“1” or “2”)
again.
The driving position memory control system cannot be
operated while the vehicle is moving.
If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected, the computer’s
memory will be erased and the memorized positions will have
to be set again.
When you push button “1” or “2”, the driving position will
be automatically adjusted to the position recorded for that
button.
226
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
CAUTION
Do not start the vehicle while the adjustments are
being made.
Take care not to select the wrong button, or the seat
could strike the rear passenger or hit your body
against the steering wheel. If this happens, you can
stop the movement by pressing another driving
position memory switch.
227
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
228
SECTION
1–7
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Steering wheel and mirrors
Tilt and telescopic steering wheell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
230
231
234
240
229
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
TILT AND TELESCOPIC STEERING
WHEEL
Adjustment of telescopic steering column
Adjustment of steering wheel tilt
To adjust the steering column length, push the control
switch forward or backward to set the steering wheel to
the desired position.
To adjust the tilt of the steering wheel, push the control
switch upward or downward to set it to the desired
position.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering wheel while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
230
CAUTION
Do not adjust the steering column while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle
the vehicle and an accident may occur resulting in death
or serious injuries.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Automatic tilt–away steering column*
When the ignition key is removed, the steering column
moves forward away from the driver and also tilts up for
easy exit and entry.
When the key is inserted in the ignition switch, the steering
column returns to the previously set position.
NOTE:
* This feature can be deactivated.
Ask your Lexus dealer for details.
OUTSIDE REAR VIEW MIRRORS
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the side of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Be careful when judging the size or distance of any object seen
in the outside rear view mirror on the passenger’s side
because it is a convex mirror. Any object seen in a convex
mirror will look smaller and farther away than if seen in a normal
flat mirror.
When you push the outside rear view mirror defogger switch,
the heater panels in the outside rear view mirrors will quickly
clear the mirror surface. (See “Outside rear view mirror
defogger switch” on page 47.)
The rear view mirrors are rain clearing mirrors that clear the
driver’s rear view when it rains. (For details, see “Rain clearing
mirrors” on page 638.)
231
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
CAUTION
Power rear view mirror control
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the
vehicle and an accident may occur, resulting in death
or serious injuries.
Since the mirror surfaces can get hot, do not touch
them when the outside rear view mirror defogger
switch is on.
1 Master switch 2 Control switch
To adjust the power rear view mirror, first place the master
switch at “L” (left) or “R” (right), and push the control
switch on the desired side.
The power rear view mirrors can be adjusted when the key is
in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
232
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
When the automatic transmission selector lever is shifted
into “R” position with the master switch in the “L” or “R”
position, the rear view mirrors automatically down to help
backing up.
The mirrors return to the previous position in the following
operations.
Shift the transmission lever out of “R” position.
Place the master switch in the neutral position.
NOTICE
If ice should jam the mirror, do not operate the control
or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de–icer to free the
mirror.
233
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Folding rear view mirrors
To fold the rear view mirror, push backward.
The rear view mirrors can be folded backward for parking in
compact areas.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the mirrors folded backward. Both the
driver and passenger side rear view mirrors must be
extended and properly adjusted before driving.
INSIDE REAR VIEW MIRROR
Adjust the mirror so that you can just see the rear of your
vehicle in the mirror.
Pushing the “MIRROR” switch changes the mode
between AUTO and DAY.
The indicator comes on when the automatic function mode is
selected.
DAY mode: The mirror surface is normal.
AUTO mode: If the mirror detects light from the headlights
of the vehicle behind you, the mirror surface darkens
slightly to reduce the reflected light.
When the ignition key is inserted and turned on, the inside rear
view mirror always turns on in the automatic function mode.
234
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
When the outside air temperature is low, it may take a little
longer for the mirror to darken in response to the detection of
headlights.
Compass
CAUTION
Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle
and an accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
The compass indicates the direction in which the vehicle
is heading. The illustration shown above indicates the
vehicle is heading north.
Push the “COMP” switch to turn the compass system on
and off.
If the ignition switch was turned off with the system on, the
system will automatically turn back on when the ignition switch
is turned on.
To ensure correct functioning of anti–glare mirror sensors
located on both sides of the mirror, do not touch or cover
the sensors with your finger or a piece of cloth, etc.
235
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Displays
Directions
N
NE
E
SE
S
SW
W
NW
North
Northeast
East
Southeast
South
Southwest
West
Northwest
The compass may not show the correct direction in the
following conditions:
If your vehicle is out of the set zone, refer to “Calibrating the
compass” in this Section to set the zone number.
The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
If the deviation is small, the compass works to calibrate the
direction automatically while the vehicle is in motion.
The compass does not adjust while the vehicle is stopped.
The ignition switch is turned off immediately after turning.
The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
The vehicle is in a place where the earth’s magnetic field is
subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields
(underground parking, under a steel tower, between
buildings, roof parking, near a crossing, near a large vehicle,
etc.).
The vehicle is magnetized. (There is a magnet or a metal
object on or near the inside rear view mirror.)
The battery has been disconnected.
236
For additional precision or for complete calibrating, see
“Calibrating the compass” below.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
If the direction is not indicated or the system does not operate
properly, contact your Lexus dealer.
Compass sensor
NOTICE
Do not put magnets or a metal object on or near the
inside rear view mirror of the vehicle. Doing this may
cause malfunction of the compass sensor in the mirror.
237
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Calibrating the compass (deviation calibration)
The direction display on the compass deviates from the true
direction determined by the earth’s magnetic field. The angle
of deviation varies according to the geographic position of the
vehicle.
To adjust this deviation, stop the vehicle, then push and hold
the “COMP” switch until the zone number appears on the
display. Then push the “COMP” switch, referring to the
following map to select the number of the zone where the
vehicle is.
Samoa: 5
16Z001
Zone numbers
238
Guam:
8
Saipan:
8
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Leaving the system after the calibration for several seconds,
the direction will appear on the display. It shows the zone
number is set.
CAUTION
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
Calibrating the compass (circling calibration)
Drive the vehicle slowly (at 8 km/h [5 mph] or lower) in a circle
until the direction is displayed. If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the block until the direction is
displayed.
After driving in 1 to 3 circles in the above method, calibration
is complete with the direction shown on the display.
To rectify the compass, stop the vehicle and push and hold the
“COMP” switch until “C” appears on the display.
There is also a case that “C” appears on the display in case of
the drastic change of the magnetic field.
239
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
Perform circling calibration just after you have purchased
your Lexus. And then always perform circling calibration
after the battery has been removed, replaced or
disconnected.
VANITY MIRRORS
Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place
where the earth’s magnetic field is subject to interference by
artificial magnetic fields (underground parking, under a steel
tower, between buildings, roof parking, near a crossing,
near a large vehicle, etc.).
During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon
roof, power windows, etc.) as they may interfere with the
calibration.
CAUTION
When doing the circling calibration, be sure to secure
a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles
in the neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic
rules while performing circling calibration.
Do not adjust the display while the vehicle is moving.
Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle is
stopped.
240
To use the vanity mirrors, swing the sun visor down and
slide the cover.
The vanity light comes on when you slide the cover.
STEERING WHEEL AND MIRRORS
241
SECTION
2–1
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Air conditioning
Automatic air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Rear cooler controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
For vehicles equipped with Navigation System,
please refer to the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
242
AIR CONDITIONING
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONING CONTROLS
21PY023
You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 86 for details.
243
AIR CONDITIONING
The automatic air conditioning automatically maintains
the set temperature.
In the automatic operation mode, the air conditioning selects
the most suitable fan speed, air flow, air intake and on–off the
air conditioning according to the temperature.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the air conditioning on longer than necessary
when the engine is not running.
244
The ignition key must be in the “ON” position.
AIR CONDITIONING
1
“AUTO” button
2
“OFF” button
3
Driver side temperature display (in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
10
“A/C” button
4
Fan speed display
11
“MODE”(air flow control) button
5
Air flow display
12
Fan speed control button
6
Passenger side temperature display (in degrees
Fahrenheit or Centigrade)
13
Air intake control button
14
“TEMP” (driver side temperature control) button
7
8
“PASSENGER TEMP” (passenger side temperature
control) button
9
“DUAL” (temperature setting mode change) button
Windshield air flow button
245
AIR CONDITIONING
21PY024
Air flow selection
246
AIR CONDITIONING
(a) Climate control
SETTING OPERATION — automatic control
2. Use the “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button to set
the desired temperature.
1. Push the “AUTO” button.
An indicator light will illuminate to show that the automatic
operation mode has been selected.
Air flow quantity, switching of the diffusers, on–off of the air
conditioning and switching of the air intake between
RECIRCULATED AIR and OUTSIDE AIR are automatically
adjusted. The operation status is shown by each indicator.
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed while
operating in automatic mode, the operation corresponding to
the button depressed is set. Other conditions continue to be
adjusted automatically.
Push the “OFF” button to turn the air conditioning system off.
The “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button is used to set the
desired temperature. The temperature will be controlled on the
driver and passenger sides simultaneously or individually.
“TEMP” button — Changes the temperature on the driver and
passenger sides simultaneously or the driver side only.
“PASSENGER TEMP” button — Changes the temperature
settings separate from driver side.
“DUAL” button — Changes the mode of the temperature
setting.
The indicator on the “DUAL” button has two modes:
With the indicator on — For individual temperature setting
With the indicator off — For simultaneous temperature
setting
247
AIR CONDITIONING
SETTING OPERATION — manual control
When one of the manual control buttons is depressed
while operating in automatic mode, the mode relevant to
the depressed button is set. Other conditions continue to
be adjusted automatically.
If manual air flow selection is desired —
21PY027
The outlets from which air is delivered can be selected
manually by pushing the button. The function of each mode is
as follows:
Driver side setting
Passenger side setting
Mixed setting
248
1
Panel — Air flows mainly from the instrument panel vents.
2
Bi–level — Air flows from both the floor vents and the
instrument panel vents.
3
Floor — Air flows mainly from the floor vents.
4
Floor/Windshield — Air flows mainly from the floor vents
and windshield vents.
AIR CONDITIONING
If quick heating or cooling is desired —
If manual switching of air intake is desired —
Push the “TEMP” or “PASSENGER TEMP” button on either
side and hold it until “MAX. HOT” or “MAX. COLD” appears on
the display.
If manual fan speed control is desired —
Each time you push the air intake control button, the mode
changes in order from the RECIRCULATED AIR mode to
OUTSIDE AIR mode, then back to the RECIRCULATED AIR
mode. Each indicator light shows which mode is now selected.
1 Fan speed at low
2 Fan speed at high
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing the
appropriate side of fan speed control button. The higher the fan
speed is, the more air is delivered. Pushing the “OFF” button
turns off the fan.
To remove exterior windshield frost, use the high speed setting.
1
RECIRCULATED AIR mode — If quick circulation of
cooled air is desired, select this mode.
2
OUTSIDE AIR mode — The system will take fresh
outside air into the vehicle.
To prevent fogging up of the windshield, the air intake mode
may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR mode
depending on the condition of the air conditioning system.
For example, when the ambient temperature is low, the air
intake mode may change automatically to the OUTSIDE AIR
mode. This is not a malfunction.
249
AIR CONDITIONING
If quick circulation of cooled air is desired, push the air intake
control button for RECIRCULATED AIR. The indicator light will
come on.
(b) Windshield defogging and defrosting
For normal use, it is best to keep the air intake control button
set to the OUTSIDE AIR mode. If recirculated air is used during
heating, the windows will fog up more easily.
If manual on–off of the air conditioning is desired —
Push the “A/C” button to turn the air conditioning on and push
it again to turn the air conditioning off.
The air conditioning does not work if the outside temperature
is lowered down to around 0C (32F).
If the system is used for ventilation, heating in dry weather or
removing frost or exterior fog on the windshield, turn the air
conditioning off once it is no longer required. This will improve
fuel economy. The air conditioning can be used for year–round
automatic temperature control including cooling and
dehumidifying operation.
To remove interior fog on the windshield —
If the air conditioning compressor does not operate, the
indicator of the “A/C” button will blink. If the indicator of the
“A/C” button blinks even when the “A/C” button is pushed
again, have the compressor checked by your nearest Lexus
dealer.
2. Push the windshield air flow button.
Push the windshield air flow button.
To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield —
1. Push the “TEMP” button to set the maximum temperature.
3. Push the fan speed control button on the right side to obtain
a maximum air flow.
4. Leave the “A/C” button off.
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function
with the purpose of clearing the front view.
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the
last one used.
250
AIR CONDITIONING
This button allows the air intake to select the OUTSIDE AIR
mode automatically. This is to clean up the front view more
quickly.
If you want to return the setting to the
RECIRCULATED AIR mode, push the air intake control button
once again.
Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This
setting clears the front view more quickly.
CAUTION
Do not use the windshield air flow button during cooled
air operation in extremely humid weather.
The
difference between the temperature of the outside air
and that of the windshield could cause the outer surface
of the windshield to fog up blocking your vision.
(c) Operating tips
To help cool down the interior after parking in the hot sun,
drive for the first few minutes with the windows open. After
the excess heat has blown away, close the windows.
Make sure the air inlet grilles in front of the windshield are
not blocked by leaves or other obstructions.
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the side vents and
rear vents. (See “(d) Center vents and side vents”.)
On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield. The
windshield could fog up because of the difference in air
temperature on the inside and outside of the windshield.
Keep the area under the front seats clear to allow air to
circulate throughout the vehicle.
On cold days, set the fan speed to high for a minute to help
clear the intake ducts of snow or moisture. This can reduce
the amount of fogging on the windows.
When driving on dusty roads, close all windows. If dust
thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehicle after
closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake
be set to the OUTSIDE AIR mode and the fan speed to any
setting except “OFF”.
251
AIR CONDITIONING
If following another vehicle on a dusty road, or driving in
windy and dusty conditions, it is recommended that the air
intake be temporarily set to the RECIRCULATED AIR
mode, which will close off the outside passage and prevent
outside air and dust from entering the vehicle interior.
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature — To the desired temperature
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning — OFF
Heating
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation —
For manual operation —
Fan speed — To the desired fan speed
Temperature — Towards high temperature
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow — FLOOR
Air conditioning — OFF
For quick heating, select RECIRCULATED AIR for a few
minutes. To keep the windows from fogging, select
OUTSIDE AIR after the vehicle interior has been warmed.
Air conditioning
Push the “A/C” button on for dehumidified heating.
For automatic operation —
Choose floor/windshield air flow to heat the vehicle interior
while defrosting or defogging the windshield.
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature — To the desired temperature
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning — ON
For manual operation —
252
For best results, set controls to:
AIR CONDITIONING
Fan speed — To the desired fan speed
Temperature — Towards low temperature
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow — PANEL
Air conditioning — ON
For quick cooling, select RECIRCULATED AIR for a few
minutes.
Ventilation
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation —
Push in the “AUTO” button.
Temperature — Towards low temperature
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air conditioning — OFF
For manual operation —
Fan speed — To the desired fan speed
Temperature — Towards low temperature
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow — PANEL
Air conditioning — OFF
Defogging and defrosting
For best results, set controls to:
— The inside of the windshield
For automatic operation —
Temperature — Towards high temperature to heat;
low temperature to cool
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow — WINDSHIELD
253
AIR CONDITIONING
For manual operation —
Fan speed — To the desired fan speed
Temperature — Towards high temperature to heat;
low temperature to cool
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow — WINDSHIELD
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function
with the purpose of clearing the front view.
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the
last one used.
This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode
automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode,
push the air intake control button once again.
Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This
setting clears the front view more quickly.
On humid days, do not blow cold air on the windshield — the
difference between the outside and inside temperatures
could make the fogging worse.
Temperature — Towards high temperature
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow — WINDSHIELD
For manual operation —
Fan speed — To the desired fan speed
Temperature — Towards high temperature
Air intake — OUTSIDE AIR
Air flow — WINDSHIELD
254
— The outside of the windshield
For best results, set controls to:
For automatic operation —
AIR CONDITIONING
When the windshield air flow button is pushed, air flows mainly
from the windshield vents and turns on the defogging function
with the purpose of clearing the front view.
Pushing this button once again returns the air flow mode to the
last one used.
This button allows the air intake to select OUTSIDE AIR mode
automatically. This is to clean up the front view more quickly.
If you want to return the setting to RECIRCULATED AIR mode,
push the air intake control button once again.
Push the “A/C” button for dehumidified heating or cooling. This
setting clears the front view more quickly.
To heat the vehicle interior while defrosting the windshield,
choose floor/windshield air flow.
255
AIR CONDITIONING
(d) Center vents and side vents
(e) Checking and replacing the air conditioning
filter
Center vents
The air conditioning filter information label is placed in the
glove box as shown and indicates that a filter has been
installed.
The air conditioning filter prevents dust from entering the
vehicle through the air conditioning vent.
Side vents
If air flow control is not satisfactory, check the center
vents and side vents. The center vents and side vents may
be opened or closed as shown.
256
AIR CONDITIONING
The air conditioning filter is behind the glove box.
The air conditioning filter may clog after long use. The filter
may need to be replaced if the air flow of the air conditioner and
heater experiences extreme reductions in operating efficiency,
or if the windows begin to fog up easily.
1. Open the glove box and unhook the cip as shown
above.
To maintain the air conditioning efficiency, inspect and replace
the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance
schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, such
as inner city or desert areas, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.)
2. Push in each side of the glove box to disconnect the
claws.
257
AIR CONDITIONING
3. Take out the filter case.
4. Remove the filter from the filter case.
5. Inspect the filter on the surface.
If it is dirty, it should be replaced.
When installing the filter in the filter case, keep the arrow
pointing up.
258
AIR CONDITIONING
INFORMATION
The air conditioning filter should be installed properly
in position. The use of air conditioning with the filter
removed
may
cause
deteriorated
dustproof
performance and then affect air conditioning
performance.
259
AIR CONDITIONING
REAR COOLER CONTROLS
21PY038
260
1
2
3
4
Rear cooler vents
Fan speed control button
“REAR COOL” button
“TEMP” (temperature control) button
AIR CONDITIONING
(a) Rear cooler ON–OFF
To turn the rear cooler on, push the “REAR COOL” button
with front air conditioning on. To turn the rear cooler off,
push the button once again.
When you turn the rear cooler on with the front air conditioning
off, the cooling device is not operated.
(b) Air flow control
“AUTO” mode: The fan speed is automatically adjusted only
when the air flow setting of the front air conditioning is in the
panel mode.
(c) Temperature control
The temperature of the cooled air can be adjusted between
10F (5C) of the temperature of the front air
conditioning system. Push the left side of the button to
lower the temperature.
The fan speed can be set to your desired speed by pushing
the appropriate side of the fan speed control button.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the rear cooler on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
261
AIR CONDITIONING
262
SECTION
2–2
AIR CONDITIONING AND AUDIO
Audio
Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear seat entertainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio/video system operating hints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
264
287
294
311
383
For vehicles equipped with Navigation System,
please refer to the separate “Navigation System
Owner’s Manual”.
263
AUDIO
AUDIO SYSTEM
Quick reference for your audio system
22PY155
You can adjust the brightness of the display. See “Instrument panel light control” on page 86 for details.
If a Mark Levinson brand audio system is installed, the “Mark Levinson” logo is shown on the panel.
264
AUDIO
1
Ejecting a CD
(See page 281 for details.)
2
CD slot
(See page 279 for details.)
3
Display of functions in TAPE or CD mode
6
Radio mode:
Radio text message
(See page 275 for details.)
CD mode:
CD text
(See page 284 for details.)
7
Automatic repeat
(See page 277 or 283 for details.)
CD load button
(See page 279 for details.)
8
DOLBY NR
(See page 276 for details.)
AUDIO·TUNE knob
(See page 268 for details.)
9
:
Side change
(See page 277 for details.)
Traffic announcement button
(See page 275 for details.)
10
:
Rewinding or reversing
(See page 277 or 283 for details.)
Program type button
(See page 274 for details.)
11
:
Fast forwarding
(See page 277 or 283 for details.)
Mode selectors
(See page 267 for details.)
12
Radio mode:
RPT:
:
RAND: Random access
(See page 284 for details.)
:
TAPE mode:
CD mode:
CD selection
(See page 282 for details.)
Seek tuning
(See page 273 for details.)
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 278 for details.)
Direct access to a desired program
(See page 283 for details.)
4
Station selector and function buttons
(See page 273 for details.)
13
Cassette tape slot
(See page 276 for details.)
5
Radio mode:
Scan tuning
(See page 274 for details.)
14
Stopping and ejecting a cassette tape
(See page 276 for details.)
CD mode:
Scan selection
(See page 282 for details.)
15
Turning the system on and adjusting the volume
(See page 267 for details.)
265
AUDIO
Using your audio system: some basics
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus
audio system. Some information may not pertain to your
system.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the audio system on longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
266
Your audio system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality automatically. While the system is adjusting the audio
sound, the audio sound fades out and then fades in.
Your audio system works when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
AUDIO
(a) Turning the system on and off
Push this knob to turn the audio system on and off. Turn
this knob to adjust the volume.
The system turns on in the last mode used.
Push the “AM”, “FM”, “TAPE” or “DISC” button to turn on
that mode. The selected mode turns on directly.
Push these buttons if you want to switch from one mode to
another.
If the tape or CD is not set, the cassette player or CD player
does not turn on.
You can turn off each player by ejecting the cassette tape or
CD. If the audio system was previously off, then the entire
audio system will be turned off when you eject the cassette
tape or CD. If the other function was previously playing, it will
come on again.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system —
The “DISC” button may also be used to operate a DVD player.
Pressing the “DISC” button changes between the CD player
and DVD player. When the DVD player is in operation, “AUX”
appears on the display.
267
AUDIO
In the “TAPE” or “CD” mode, the applicable functions are
shown in the lowest part of the display. Push the switch
just below to turn on each function.
(b) Tone and balance
How good an audio program sounds to you is largely
determined by the mix of the treble, mid–range, and bass
levels. In fact, different kinds of music and vocal programs
usually sound better with different mixes of treble, mid–range
and bass.
A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the
front and rear sound levels is also important.
Keep in mind that if you are listening to a stereo recording or
broadcast, changing the right/left balance will increase the
volume of one group of sounds while decreasing the volume
of another.
268
Each time you push the “AUDIO·TUNE” knob, the display
changes as in the following. To adjust the tone and
balance or turn on or off the automatic sound levelizer,
turn the knob.
BAS: Adjusts low–pitched tones.
MID: Adjusts mid–pitched tones.
TRE: Adjusts high–pitched tones.
FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between the front and rear
speakers.
BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between the right and left
speakers.
ASL: Turns on or off the automatic sound levelizer.
AUDIO
Automatic sound levelizer (ASL): When the audio sound
becomes difficult to be heard due to road noise, wind noise, etc.
during driving, the system adjusts to the optimum volume and
tone quality according to the noise level. While the automatic
sound levelizer is on, “ASL” appears on the display.
(c) Your radio antennas
The wire antenna is mounted inside the quarter windows.
NOTICE
When cleaning the inside of the quarter windows, be
careful not to scratch or damage the wire antennas or
connectors.
Putting a window tint (especially, conductive or
metallic type) on the quarter windows may affect the
reception of radio or mobile telephone. For the
installation of the window tint, consult with your
Lexus dealer.
269
AUDIO
(d) Your cassette player
NOTICE
Do not oil any part of the cassette player, and do not
insert anything except a cassette tape into the slot.
270
When you insert a cassette, the exposed tape should face to
the right.
AUDIO
(e) Your CD player with changer
Your CD player with changer can store up to 6 CDs and play
selected CDs or continuously play all the CDs set in the player.
When you set CDs into the player, make sure their labels face
up. If not, the player will display “ERROR 1” and the CD
number.
NOTICE
Do not stack up two CDs for insertion, or it will cause
damage to the CD changer. Insert only one CD into
slot at a time.
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the CD
player. Do not insert anything other than CD into the
slot.
The player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) CDs only.
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
271
AUDIO
Push these buttons to choose either an AM or FM station.
“AM”, “FM1”, “FM2” or “FM TYPE” appears on the display.
Turn this knob to the right to step up the frequency or to
the left to step down.
Your radio automatically changes to stereo reception when a
stereo broadcast is received. “ST” appears on the display. If
the signal becomes weak, the radio reduces the amount of
channel separation to prevent the weak signal from creating
noise. If the signal becomes extremely weak, the radio
switches from stereo to mono reception. In this case, “ST”
disappears from the display.
272
AUDIO
(b) Presetting a station
(c) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
1. Tune in the desired station.
2. Push one of the station selector buttons (1 — 6) and
hold it until a beep is heard. This sets the station to the
button and the button number (1 — 6) appears on the
display.
Seek tuning: Push the “SEEK” button. The radio will begin
seeking up or down for a station of the nearest frequency and
will stop on reception. Each time you push the button, the
stations will be searched automatically one after another.
Each button can store one AM station and two FM stations. To
change the preset station to a different one, follow the same
procedure.
Preset tuning: Push the button (1 — 6) for the station you
want. The button number (1 — 6) and station frequency
appear on the display.
The preset station memory is cancelled when the power
source is interrupted by battery disconnection or a blown fuse.
Manual tuning: Turn the “AUDIO·TUNE” knob. The radio will
step up or down to another frequency.
273
AUDIO
(d) RDS (Radio Data System)
TYPE (Program type):
To scan all the frequencies: Push the “SCAN” button briefly.
“SCAN” appears on the display. The radio will find the next
station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then
scan again. To select a station, push the “SCAN” button a
second time.
To scan the preset stations: Push the “SCAN” button until
you hear a beep. “SCAN” appears on the display. The radio
will tune in the next preset station up the band, stay there for
a few seconds, and then move to the next preset station. To
select a station, push the “SCAN” button a second time.
When you push the “TYPE” button, the current program type
receiving from RDS station appears on the display.
If the system receives no RDS stations, “NO PTY” appears on
the display.
Each time you pushy the “” or “” button, the program type
changes as in the following:
ROCK
EASY LIS (Easy listening)
CLS/JAZZ (Classical music and jazz)
R&B (Rhythm and Blues)
INFORM (Information)
RELIGION
274
AUDIO
MISC (Miscellaneous)
Radio text message:
ALERT (Emergency message)
Push the “SEEK TRACK” or “SCAN” button with the program
type shown on the display and the radio seeks or scans the
station in the relevant program type.
TRAF (Traffic) function: A station that regularly
broadcasts traffic information is automatically located.
When you push the “TRAF” button, “TRAF SEEK” appear on
the display and the radio will start seeking any traffic program
station.
If no traffic program station is found, “NO TRAF INFO” appears
on the display for a few seconds and the display returns to the
previous mode.
If the radio receives a radio text from RDS station, “MSG”
appears on the display. Push the “TEXT” button, and a text
message is displayed.
If the entire the message is not displayed, “” will appear on
the display. To display the rest of the message, push and hold
the “TEXT” button until you hear a beep.
After the entire message has been displayed, the message will
disappear.
In case a text message is not accepted on the display, you can
push the “TEXT” button and hold it to display the rest of the
message.
When the system can show the station name, “RDS” appears
on the display. Each time you push the “TEXT” button,
indication on the display changes form the band to the station
name, a radio text in this order. After 6 seconds passes,
indication returns to the band.
275
AUDIO
Cassette tape player operation
(a) Playing a cassette tape
If a cassette is already in the slot, push the “TAPE” button.
When you insert a cassette tape, the exposed tape should
face to the right.
The player will automatically start when you insert a cassette
tape. At this time, “TAPE” appears on the display.
To stop or eject the cassette tape, push the “EJECT” button.
Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
276
Dolby Noise Reduction* feature: If you are listening to a
tape that was recorded with Dolby Noise Reduction, push the
” button. The display will indicate that the Dolby noise
“
reduction system is on.
The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise by about 10 dB. For
best sound reproduction, play your tapes with the Dolby NR on
or off according to the mode used for recording the tape.
To play a tape recorded without Dolby NR, push the button
again to turn off the Dolby NR.
* Dolby noise reduction manufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories Licensing Corporation. “DOLBY” and the double–D
symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
AUDIO
(b) Manual program selection
(c) Automatic program selection
“Program” button: Push the “ ” button to select the
other side of a cassette tape. The display indicates which side
is currently selected (“” indicates top side, “” indicates
bottom side).
“RPT” button: The repeat feature automatically replays the
current program.
“Rewind” button: Push the “” button to rewind a tape.
“REW” appears on the display.
To stop rewinding, push the same button or “TAPE” button.
Push the “RPT” button while the program is playing. When the
program ends, it will automatically be rewound and replayed.
Push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for the repeat feature to work correctly.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “” button to fast forward
a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button or “TAPE”
button.
277
AUDIO
Push this button on the lower side to skip backward. Push the
button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear on
the display.
If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
Push this button on the upper side to skip forward. “FF” and
the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
“RPT” and “Automatic program selection” features:
These features may not work well with some spoken word, live
or classical recordings.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
278
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
AUDIO
CD player operation
(a) Inserting or ejecting CDs
If the label faces down, the CD cannot be played. In this case,
“ERROR 1” and CD number appear on the display.
The ignition switch must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
If you need to insert the next CD, repeat the same procedure
to insert another CD.
Your CD player with changer can store up to 6 CDs.
Setting all the CDs:
1. Push the “LOAD” button until you hear a beep.
The umber indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators
change to green and stay on, and “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD”, the CD door opens.
2. Insert only one CD while the CD door is open.
The CD door closes and “WAIT” appears again.
3. Insert the next CD after the “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD” and the CD door opens.
Setting a single CD:
4. Repeat this procedure until you insert all the CDs.
1. Push the “LOAD” button briefly.
To cancel the operation, push the “LOAD” or “DISC” button.
The umber indicators at both ends of the slot start blinking and
“WAIT” appears on the display. After the blinking indicators
change to green and stay on, and “WAIT” changes to the
“LOAD”, the CD door opens.
If you do not insert CDs within 15 seconds after pushing the
“LOAD” button and “LOAD” is displayed, the operation will be
canceled automatically.
2. Insert only one CD while the CD door is open.
You can set a CD at the lowest empty CD number.
After insertion, the set CD is automatically loaded.
279
AUDIO
NOTICE
Do not insert one CD stacked on top of another one or
feed them in continuously, to prevent CDs from getting
stuck in the player.
280
AUDIO
(b) Playing a CD
Ejecting a single CD alone:
1. Push the “ ” or “
you want to eject.
” button to display the CD number
Push the “DISC” button if the CDs are already loaded in
the player.
2. Push the “EJECT” button for the CD briefly.
“CD” appears on the display.
At this time, the display shows “EJECT” and the indicators at
both ends of the slot as well as CD number light up.
The CDs set in the player are played continuously, starting with
the last CD you inserted. The CD number of the CD currently
being played, the track number and the time from the beginning
of the program appear on the display.
Ejecting all the CDs:
Push the “EJECT” button for the CD until you hear a beep.
When play of one CD ends, the first track of the following CD
starts. When play of the final CD ends, play of the first CD
starts again.
The player will skip any empty CD trays.
281
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a desired CD
(d) Searching for a desired track or CD
Searching for a desired CD:
Searching for a desired track:
Push the “
Push the “SCAN” button briefly. “SCAN” will appear on the
display. The CD player will play the next track for 10 seconds,
then scan again. To select a track, push the “SCAN” button a
second time. If the player reaches the end of the CD, it will
continue scanning at track 1.
” or “
” button to select the CD number.
Push the button several times until the desired CD number
appears on the display.
After all the tracks are scanned in one pass, normal play
resumes.
Searching for a desired CD:
”
Push the “SCAN” button until you hear a beep. With “
on the display, the program at the beginning of each CD will be
played for 10 seconds. To continue listening to the program of
your choice, push the button a second time.
After all the CDs in the automatic changer are scanned in one
pass, the scan function is cancelled.
282
AUDIO
(e) Selecting a desired track
“Reverse” button:
Push the “” button and hold it to reverse the CD. When you
release the button, the CD player will resume playing.
(f) Repeating a track or a CD
“TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.
Push either side of the “TRACK” button several times until the
desired track number appears on the display. As you release
the button, the player will start playing the selected track from
the beginning.
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system —
While the DVD player is in operation, the chapter or track can
be changed by pushing the “” or “” side of the “TRACK”
button.
“Fast forward” button:
“RPT” button: There are 2 repeat features — you can either
replay a CD track or a whole CD.
Repeating a track: Push the “RPT” button briefly while the
” will appear on the display. When the
track is playing. “
track ends, it will automatically be replayed. This process will
be continued until you push the button again to turn off the
repeat feature.
Push the “” button and hold it to fast forward the CD. When
you release the button, the CD player will resume playing from
that position.
283
AUDIO
Repeating a CD: Push the “RPT” button and hold it until you
hear a beep. “
” will appear on the display. The player
will repeat all the tracks on the CD you are listening to. When
the CD ends, the player will automatically go back to the first
track on the CD and replay. This process will be continued until
you push the button again to turn off the repeat feature.
Random playing for all the tracks in the automatic
changer: Push the “RAND” button and hold it until you hear a
” will appear on the display and the player will
beep. “
perform all the tracks on all the CDs in the automatic changer
in random order. To turn off the random feature, push “RAND”
a second time.
(g) Random playing
When a track is skipped or the system is inoperative, push the
button to reset.
(h) CD text
“RAND” button: There are 2 random features — you can
either listen to the tracks on all the CDs in the player in random
order, or only listen to the tracks on a specific CD in random
order.
Random playing for the tracks on a CD: Push the “RAND”
” will appear on the display and play
button briefly. “
the CD you are listening to in random order.
284
When you push the “TEXT” button while the CD with CD
text display function (the logo “CD TEXT” marked on the
CD) is being played, the track number, elapsed time, CD
title and then track title appear on the display.
When you push this button if the CD does not have a text
display function, “NO TITLE” appears on the display.
AUDIO
The display can show up to 12 letters at once. If the CD title
or music title is longer than 12 letters, hold down the button for
longer than 1 second. The letters after the 12th one are shown.
However, 24 letters at maximum can be shown on the display.
Audio remote controls (steering switches)
When you push this button for longer than 1 second or play no
operation for about 6 seconds with the letters after the 13th one
on the display, the display returns and shows the first 12 letters.
Even if the CD title or music title is longer than 24 letters, the
display can show up to 24 letters.
(i) If the player malfunctions
If the player or another unit equipped with the player
malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the four
following error messages.
The switches are installed on the left side of the steering wheel.
If “WAIT” appears on the display: It indicates that the inside
of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient
temperature. Remove the CD from the player and allow the
player to cool down.
“MODE” switch: Use this switch to turn on or off the audio
system, or change the audio mode.
If “ERROR 1” appears on the display: It indicates that the CD
is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted up–side down. Clean the
CD or insert it correctly.
To change the audio mode, turn on the system and push the
switch briefly. If a tape or CD is not inserted, the “TAPE” or
“CD” mode is skipped.
To turn on the system, push the switch briefly. To turn off the
system, push and hold the switch until you hear a beep.
If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display: It
indicates there is a trouble inside the system. Eject the CD.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
285
AUDIO
The DVD player will be selectable if a rear seat entertainment
system is installed in your vehicle.
“+
–” switch: Use this switch to adjust the volume.
“ ” or “
or CD.
” switch: Use this switch to select a desired track
To increase the volume, push the “+” side. To decrease the
volume, push the “–” side. The volume continues to increase
or decrease while the switch is being pressed.
To select a desired track, push this switch briefly.
(a) When the radio mode is selected
Vehicles with rear seat entertainment system —
“ ” or “ ” switch: Use this switch for seek tuning or to
select a preset station.
While the DVD player is in operation, the chapter or track can
be changed by pushing the “” or “” side of the switches.
To select a preset station, push this switch briefly. The
station you assigned to a switch on the audio system will be
selected.
CAUTION
To seek a station, push and hold this switch until you hear
a beep. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station,
and will stop on reception.
(b) When the “TAPE” mode is selected
“ ” or “ ” switch: Use this switch to fast forward or rewind
the tape or for automatic program selection.
To skip forward or reward for automatic program selection,
push this switch briefly. When automatically selecting a
program, you can skip up to 9 programs at a time. For
details, see page 278 for details.
To fast forward or rewind the tape, push this switch until you
hear a beep. To stop fast forwarding or rewinding, push and
hold the same side on the switch until you hear a beep.
286
(c) When the “CD” mode is selected
To select a desired CD, push and hold this switch until the
desired number of the CD appears and you hear a beep.
Operate the switches with due care while you are
driving to avoid accidents.
AUDIO
AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio system operations:
Be careful not to spill beverages over the audio
system.
Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or CD
into the cassette tape slot or CD slot.
The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle
may cause a noise from the speakers of the audio
system which you are listening to. However, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
Radio reception
FM
Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is
a problem with your radio — it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
Fading and drifting stations — Generally, the effective range
of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you
may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance
from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by
distortion.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with
FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited
range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal
will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as
your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do
not indicate a problem with your radio:
Multi–path — FM signals are reflective, making it possible for
two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a
momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Static and fluttering — These occur when signals are
blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing
the bass level may reduce static and fluttering.
287
AUDIO
Station swapping — If the FM signal you are listening to is
interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked up again.
AM
Fading — AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper
atmosphere — especially at night. These reflected signals can
interfere with those received directly from the radio station,
causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Station interference — When a reflected signal and a signal
received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult
to hear the broadcast.
Static — AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical
noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical
motors. This results in static.
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality
and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean
them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is
recommended.)
288
AUDIO
Use high–quality cassettes:
Caring for your CD player and CDs
Low–quality cassette tapes can cause many problems,
including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto–reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled
in the cassette player.
Your CD player is intended for use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) CDs
only.
Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or
if its label is peeling off.
Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening
to it, especially if it is hot outside.
Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these
cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the
cassette player.
Extremely high temperature can keep your CD player from
working. On hot days, use air conditioning to cool the
vehicle interior before you listen to a CD.
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your CD player
skip.
If moisture gets into your CD player, you may not hear any
sound even though your CD player appears to be working.
Eject all CDs from the player and wait until the player dries.
CAUTION
CD players use an invisible laser beam which could
cause hazardous radiation exposure if directed outside
the unit. Be sure to operate the player correctly.
289
AUDIO
Use only CDs marked as shown above. The following
products may not be playable on your CD player.
Special shaped CDs
Copy–protected CD
CD–R (CD–Recordable)
CD–RW (CD–Re–writable)
CD–ROM
SACD
dts–CD
Transparent/translucent CDs
290
AUDIO
Low quality CDs
Labeled CDs
291
AUDIO
NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low
quality or labeled CDs such as those shown in the
illustrations. The use of such CDs may damage the
player or changer, or it may be impossible to eject the
CD.
292
AUDIO
Correct
Wrong
Handle CDs carefully, especially when you set them into the
player. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid
getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.
To clean a CDs: Wipe it with a soft, lint–free cloth that has been
dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center
to the edge of the CD (not in a circle). Do not use a
conventional record cleaner or anti–static device.
Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other CD damage
could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a
track. (To see a pin hole, hold the CD up to the light.)
293
AUDIO
REAR SEAT AUDIO SYSTEM
The rear seat audio system is designed for the rear seat
passengers to enjoy the audio sound separately between
the front seats and the rear seats.
The rear seat audio system can be turned on with the rear
audio system remote control even if the front audio system is
off. When the front audio is turned off, the rear audio system
will be turned off simultaneously.
The rear passengers can enjoy all the modes (AM and FM
radio, cassette tape player and CD player with changer) with
the rear seat audio system when a cassette tape and a CD are
loaded in the front audio system.
22PY142
When the same mode is selected on the front and rear audio
systems at the same time, the system can be operated on the
front audio system.
If the radio mode is selected on the front and rear audio
systems at the same time, AM and FM modes cannot be
changed on the rear seat audio system.
1 Front audio system
2 Rear seat audio system display
3 Rear seat audio system remote control
4 Headphone input jacks
5 Headphone volume control dials
6 Remote control holder
294
AUDIO
Rear seat audio system remote control
The rear seat audio system can be operated with the rear
seat audio system remote control.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the remote control. It
may cause an accident, fire or electric shock.
NOTICE
Keep the remote control away from direct sunlight, high
heat and high humidity. These conditions could cause
the case to deform or the battery to explode or leak.
295
AUDIO
(a) Before using the remote control (for new vehicle
owners)
A battery is already set in the remote control with an
insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being
discharged. Before using the remote control, remove the
insulating sheet.
(b) Using the remote control
NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the remote control
may be damaged.
Do not drop or strongly knock the remote control
against hard objects.
Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote
control.
296
To use the rear seat audio system remote control, direct
the signal output portion of the remote control to the
signal reception portion of the rear seat audio system
display.
The rear seat audio system remote control can be operated
when the ignition switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The remote control does not operate properly when the signal
reception portion of the display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.
AUDIO
(c) Remote control holder
The remote control can be stowed in the holder when it is
not in use. The holder can be hooked on the back of the
driver’s or front passenger’s seatback.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop while driving, stow the remote control in
the holder when it is not in use.
NOTICE
Do not leave the remote control exposed to high
temperatures (such as on the instrument panel) for a
long time, otherwise the remote control may be
damaged.
297
AUDIO
Quick reference for your remote control
Using your rear seat audio system: some
basics
The following instructions are for the rear passengers.
Please let the rear passengers read and follow the
instructions when the rear passengers use the rear audio
system.
This section describes some of the basic features of the Lexus
audio system. Some information may not pertain to your
system.
Your audio system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality automatically. While the system is adjusting the audio
sound, the audio sound fades out and then fades in.
22PY112
Your audio system works when the ignition switch is in the
“ACC” or “ON” position.
You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with
commercial headphone. See “Headphone input jacks” on
page 308 for details.
You can also enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with a
wireless headphone. The wireless headphone can be used
within rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the headphone
will mute. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
With some wireless headphone generally available in the
market, it may be difficult to catch sound properly. Lexus
recommends the use of Lexus genuine wireless headphone.
1 “DISC/CH/PROG” buttons
2 “TUNE/TRACK” buttons
3 “ON/SOURCE” button
4 “OFF” button
298
You can purchase a wireless headphone at a Lexus dealer.
AUDIO
CAUTION
Do not drive with using the headphone. Otherwise,
you may be hard to hear the sound from the outside
while using the headphone and may cause an
accident.
With DVD player:
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at
a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound
effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the
conversations represent the maximum volume level
that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder
sound effects or when you change to a different
audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this
in mind.
Make sure the volume is not increased, before you
turn on the headphone.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the audio system on longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
299
AUDIO
Turning the system on and off
If you push “ON/SOURCE” button while receiving an
emergency broadcast, a beep sounds and “INVALID” appears
on the screen to indicate that no button can be operated.
Push “ON/SOURCE” button to turn on the rear seat audio
system.
Use “ON/SOURCE” button to select an audio mode when the
rear seat audio system is on. Each time you push this button,
the system changes between the radio, cassette player and
CD player.
When you change the mode, the display indicates which mode
is selected.
When a cassette tape and CDs are not loaded in the front audio
system, only a radio mode can be selected in the rear seat
audio system.
If you push “ON/SOURCE” button on rear seat audio system
remote control to select the casette tape player mode or CD
player mode in that case, a beep sounds from front audio
system and “INVALID” flashes on the screen for 6 seconds,
and then the rear audio system returns to the radio mode.
300
Push the “OFF” button to turn off the rear audio system.
AUDIO
Radio operation
(b) Selecting a station
(a) Listening to the radio
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
Push the “ON/SOURCE” button to choose either an AM or
FM station.
Seek tuning: Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)
button. The radio will begin seeking up or down for a station
of the nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time
you push the button, the stations will be searched out one after
another.
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the display.
If the front audio system receives a traffic announcement (TA)
while the rear seat audio system is in the radio mode, “TRAF”
will flash on the screen and the rear seat audio system will turn
off. When the front audio receives a traffic announcement (TA),
the rear seat audio system cannot select the AM/FM mode.
Manual tuning: Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button. The radio will step up or down to
another frequency.
To scan the preset stations: Push the “ ” or “ ”
(DISC/CH/PROG) button. The radio will tune in the next preset
station up the band, stay there for a few seconds, and then
move to the next preset station. To select a station, push the
“SCAN” button a second time.
You can scan only the preset stations for the band of the front
audio system. (For instructions, see “(b) Presetting a station”
on page 273.)
301
AUDIO
Cassette tape player operation
(b) Manual program selection
(a) Playing a cassette tape
Push the “ON/SOURCE” button to choose tape mode.
The player will automatically start.
appears on the display.
At this time, “TAPE”
You can play a cassette tape when a cassette tape is loaded
in the front audio system.
Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
302
“Program” button: Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The display
indicates which side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates the
top side, “ ” indicates the bottom side.)
“Rewind” button: Push and hold the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)
button until “REW” appears on the display.
To stop rewinding, push the same button.
“Fast forward” button: Push and hold the “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button until “FF” will appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button.
AUDIO
Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to skip backward. Push
the button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear
on the display.
If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to skip forward. “FF” and
the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
“Automatic program selection” feature: This feature may
not work well with some spoken word, live or classical
recordings.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
303
AUDIO
CD player operation
(b) Selecting a desired CD
(a) Playing a CD
Searching for a desired CD:
Push the “ON/SOURCE” button to choose CD mode.
“CD” appears on the display.
You can play a CD when a CD is loaded in the front audio
system.
The CDs set in the front audio system are played continuously,
starting with the last CD you inserted. The CD number of the
CD currently being played, the track number and the time from
the beginning of the program appear on the display.
When play of one CD ends, the first track of the following CD
starts. When play of the final CD ends, play of the first CD
starts again.
The player will skip any empty CD trays.
304
Push the “ ” or “
CD number.
” (DISC/CH/PROG) button to select the
Push the button several times until the desired CD number
appears on the display. When you release the button, the
player will start playing the selected CD from the first track.
AUDIO
(c) Selecting a desired track
(d) If the player malfunctions
If the player or another unit equipped with the player
malfunctions, your audio system will display one of the four
following error messages.
If “WAIT” appears on the display: It indicates that the inside
of the player unit may be too hot due to the very high ambient
temperature. Remove the CD from the player and allow the
player to cool down.
If “ERROR 1” appears on the display: It indicates that the CD
is dirty, damaged, or it was inserted up–side down. Clean the
CD or insert it correctly.
“TRACK” button: Use for direct access to a desired track.
Push the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button several times until
the desired track number appears on the display. As you
release the button, the player will start playing the selected
track from the beginning.
If “ERROR 3” or “ERROR 4” appears on the display: It
indicates there is a trouble inside the system. Eject the CD.
If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your
Lexus dealer.
“Fast forward” button:
Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) and hold it to fast forward the
CD. When you release the button, the CD player will resume
playing from that position.
“Reverse” button:
Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) and hold it to reverse the CD.
When you release the button, the CD player will resume
playing.
305
AUDIO
Replacing remote control battery
For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium battery or equivalent.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken that small children do not
swallow the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the
components.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type of
battery recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the local
regulations.
306
AUDIO
1. Pull the case out while pushing the lock release button to the
side.
2. Remove the discharged battery.
3. Put in a new battery with the positive (+) side up.
4. Put in the case securely.
307
AUDIO
NOTICE
Make sure that the positive side of the remote control
battery is facing correctly.
Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside of the
remote control, or it may interfere with proper
operation.
Be careful not to bend the electrode of the remote
control battery insertion and that dust or oil does not
adhere to the transmitter case.
Close the battery case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the remote control
operates properly. If the remote control still does not operate
properly, contact your Lexus dealer.
Headphone input jacks
To use the jack, push the lid.
308
AUDIO
You can enjoy the rear seat audio system with commercial
headphone.
To use the headphones, connect them to the jack.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
To adjust the volume of the headphones, turn the knob.
Turn right to increase the volume. Turn left to decrease the
volume.
The maximum volume depends on the type of headphones.
With some headphone generally available in the market, it may
be difficult to catch sound properly. Lexus recommends the
use of Lexus genuine headphone.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Wireless headphone: You can also enjoy the rear seat audio
system with a wireless headphone. For details, ask your Lexus
dealer.
CAUTION
Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones
to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact
on the human body.
309
AUDIO
NOTICE
The headphone input jack lid must be closed before you
tumble the second seat.
310
AUDIO
REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT
SYSTEM
1 Front audio system
2 Rear seat entertainment system display
3 Rear seat entertainment system remote control
4 DVD player
5 Power outlet
6 Input terminal adapter
7 Headphone volume control dials
8 Headphone input jacks
9 Remote control holder
10 Power outlet main switch
22PY140
311
AUDIO
Display
To close, push up the display until you hear a click.
To use the display, push the lock release button and lower
the display until you hear a click.
You can adjust the display to your desired angle.
The illumination of the screen is automatically turned off when
the display is closed. However, the rear seat entertainment
system is not turned off.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
sudden stop while driving, close the display when it is
not in use.
312
AUDIO
NOTICE
The screen should be cleaned with a dry soft cloth.
If the screen is pushed by hand or wiped with a hard
cloth, the surface of the screen may be scratched.
Benzene or alkaline solutions may damage the
coated surface of the screen.
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
turn on the rear seat entertainment system longer
than necessary when the engine is not running.
313
AUDIO
Rear seat entertainment system remote
control
The rear seat entertainment system can be operated with
the rear seat entertainment system remote control. The
system cannot be operated by touching the switches on
the screen directly.
NOTICE
Keep the remote control away from direct sunlight, high
heat and high humidity. These conditions could cause
the case to deform or the battery to explode or leak.
314
CAUTION
Do not disassemble or modify the remote control. It
may cause an accident, fire or electric shock.
AUDIO
(a) Before using the remote control (for new vehicle
owners)
A battery is already set in the remote control with an
insulating sheet, which prevents the battery from being
discharged. Before using the remote control, remove the
insulating sheet.
(b) Using the remote control
To use the rear seat entertainment system remote control,
direct the signal output portion of the remote control to the
signal reception portion of the rear seat entertainment
system display.
The remote control does not operate properly when the signal
reception portion of the display is exposed to direct sunlight.
Block the display from direct sunlight.
315
AUDIO
NOTICE
Observe the followings, otherwise the remote control
may be damaged.
Do not drop or strongly knock the remote control
against hard objects.
Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote
control.
316
AUDIO
(c) Remote control holder
The remote control can be stowed in the holder when it is
not in use. The holder can be hooked on the back of the
driver’s or front passenger’s seatback.
CAUTION
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop while driving, stow the remote control in
the holder when it is not in use.
317
AUDIO
NOTICE
Do not leave the remote control exposed to high
temperatures (such as on the instrument panel) for a
long time, otherwise the remote control may be
damaged.
318
AUDIO
Quick reference for your remote control
22PY153
319
AUDIO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
320
“CURSOR” button:
Indicates the control switches on the screen when the
DVD player is operated.
Joy stick:
Select a control switch, mode switch on the screen or
the menu for the CD.
“ENT” button:
Input the selected switch or the selected menu for the
CD.
“SOURCE” button:
Turn on the rear seat entertainment system and selects
the mode.
“DISPLAY” button:
Adjust the color, tone, contrast and brightness of the
screen.
“VIDEO” button:
Turn on the video mode when your personal audio
device is connected.
“DVD” button:
Turn on the DVD mode.
“RETURN” button:
Skip to the predetermined scene for the CD.
“SET UP” button:
Indicate the initial set up screen when the DVD player
is operated.
“SEARCH” button:
Indicate the title search screen when the DVD player is
operated.
“ANGLE” button:
Select the angle of the screen when the DVD player is
operated.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
“” button: Fast forwards a screen when the DVD
player is operated.
“” button: Play a screen when the DVD player is
operated.
“ ” button: Pause a screen when the DVD player is
operated.
“” button: Reverse a screen when the DVD player
is operated.
“TOP MENU” button:
Indicate the title selection screen for DVD video when
the DVD player is operated.
“AUDIO” button:
Indicate the changing audio screen when the DVD
player is operated.
“SUB TITLE” button:
Indicate the changing subtitle screen when the DVD
player is operated.
“MENU” button:
Indicate the menu screen for DVD video when the DVD
player is operated.
“OFF” button:
Turn off the rear seat entertainment system.
“TUNE/TRACK” buttons:
Operate the front audio system or select the
track/chapter when the DVD player is operated.
“DISC/CH/PROG” buttons:
Skip directly to a desired preset station, CD, track or
chapter.
AUDIO
Using your audio system: some basics
The following instructions are for the rear passengers.
Please let the rear passengers read and follow the
instructions when the rear passengers use the rear seat
entertainment system.
This section describes some of the basic features of the rear
seat entertainment system. Some information may not pertain
to your system.
Your audio system adjusts to the optimum volume and tone
quality automatically. While the system is adjusting the audio
sound, the audio sound fades out and then fades in.
The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear
passengers to enjoy audio and DVD video separately from the
front audio system.
The rear seat entertainment system can be operated when the
ignition key is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
The rear passengers can enjoy all modes (AM and FM radio,
cassette tape player, CD player with changer and DVD player)
on the rear seat entertainment system only if a cassette tape
and a CD are loaded in the front audio system.
The rear seat entertainment system can play DVD video, audio
CD, video CD, CD text, dts–CD or DVD audio only when a disc
is loaded in the DVD player.
You can enjoy videos and sound when your personal audio
system is connected to the input terminal adapter on the rear
console box. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with
commercial headphone. See “Headphone input jacks” on
page 380 for details.
You can also enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with a
wireless headphone. The wireless headphone can be used
within rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the headphone
will mute. For details, refer to the manufacturer’s instructions.
With some wireless headphone generally available in the
market, it may be difficult to catch sound properly. Lexus
recommends the use of Lexus genuine wireless headphone.
You can purchase a wireless headphone at a Lexus dealer.
321
AUDIO
CAUTION
Do not drive with using the headphone. Otherwise,
you may be hard to hear the sound from the outside
while using the headphone and may cause an
accident.
With DVD player:
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at
a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound
effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the
conversations represent the maximum volume level
that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder
sound effects or when you change to a different
audio source. Be sure to adjust the volume with this
in mind.
Make sure the volume is not increased, before you
turn on the headphone.
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
leave the audio system on longer than necessary when
the engine is not running.
322
AUDIO
Turning the system on and off
To turn off the system, push the “OFF” button.
To turn on the system, push the “SOURCE” button.
The screen indicates which mode can be selected. Push the
“DVD” or “VIDEO” button when the connected DVD player or
your personal audio machine is on.
The rear seat
entertainment system will be turned on.
When the front audio system is turned off, the rear audio
system and the DVD player will be turned off simultaneously.
The rear seat entertainment system can select all the modes.
When a cassette tape, a CD, a DVD video CD, an audio CD,
a video CD, a CD text, a dts–CD or a DVD audio disc is not
loaded on the front audio system or the DVD player, only the
radio mode can be selected on the rear seat entertainment
system.
323
AUDIO
Front audio system operation
All the modes of the front audio system can be operated on the
rear seat entertainment system.
When the same mode is selected on the front and rear audio
systems simultaneously, the system can be operated on the
front audio system.
If the radio mode is selected on the front and rear audio
systems at the same time, AM and FM modes cannot be
changed on the rear seat audio system.
Selecting the mode
The mode display which is selected by the joy stick is
colored blue. When the “ENT” button is pushed, the mode
display changes to green. If the mode display is gray, it
cannot be selected.
The “Speaker sound” on the mode display is selected on the
front audio system.
When you select a mode, the screen indicates which is
selected.
Use the joy stick to select the mode. Push the “ENT”
button to enter the mode.
324
AUDIO
Radio operation
(a) Listening to the radio
Using joy stick and the “ENT” button to select either AM or FM
mode.
“AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” appears on the screen.
If the front audio system receives a traffic announcement (TA)
while the rear seat audio system is in the radio mode, “TRAF”
will flash on the screen and the rear seat audio system will turn
off. When the front audio receives a traffic announcement (TA),
the rear seat audio system cannot select the AM/FM mode.
AM mode
FM mode
325
AUDIO
(b) Selecting a station
Tune in the desired station using one of the following methods.
Seek tuning: Push and hold the “ ” or “ ” (TUNE/TRACK)
button. The radio will seek up or down for a station of the
nearest frequency and will stop on reception. Each time you
push the button, the stations will be searched one after
another.
326
Manual tuning: Quickly push and release the “ ” or “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button. Each time you push the button, the
radio will step up or down to another frequency. If you push and
hold the button, and the radio will go into the seek mode.
To scan the preset stations: You can scan only the preset
stations for the band of the front audio system. Push the “ ”
or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG) button. The radio will tune in the next
preset station up or down the band. The station frequency will
appear on the screen.
AUDIO
Cassette tape player operation
(b) Manual program selection
(a) Playing a cassette tape
Using joy stick and the “ENT” button to select the cassette tape
mode.
“Program” button: Push the “ ” or “ ” (DISC/CH/PROG)
button to select the other side of a cassette tape. The screen
indicates which side is currently selected. (“ ” indicates the
top side, “ ” indicates the bottom side.)
“TAPE” appears on the display.
Auto–reverse feature: After the cassette player reaches the
end of a tape, it automatically reverses and begins to play the
other side, regardless of whether the cassette was playing or
fast forwarding.
327
AUDIO
(c) Automatic program selection
“Rewind” button: Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to
rewind a tape. “REW” appears on the display.
To stop rewinding, push the same button.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button
to fast forward a cassette tape. “FF” appears on the display.
To stop fast forwarding, push the same button.
“Automatic program selection” button: The automatic
program selection feature allows you to program your cassette
player to skip forward or backward to locate the song you want
to hear. You can skip up to 9 programs at a time.
Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button to skip forward. “FF” and
the number will appear on the display. Push the button until the
number you want to skip appears on the display. After that, the
player will automatically skip forward.
When the end of the tape is reached, the player automatically
reverses sides and resumes normal play.
328
AUDIO
Push the “ ” (TINE/TRACK) button to skip backward. Push
the button until “REW” and the number you want to skip appear
on the display.
CD player operation
(a) Playing a CD
If you set “REW 1”, the player will rewind to the beginning
of the current program.
When counting the number of programs you want to rewind,
remember to count the current program as well. For
example, if you want to rewind to a song that is two before
the song you are listening to, push this button until “REW
3” appears on the display.
When the beginning of the tape is reached, the player
automatically resumes normal play.
There must be at least 3 seconds of blank space between
programs for this feature to work correctly.
This feature may not work well with some spoken word, live or
classical recordings.
Using joy stick and the “ENT” button to select the CD
mode.
“CD” appears on the display.
The CDs set in the player are played continuously, starting with
the last CD you inserted. The CD number of the CD currently
being played, the track number and the time from the beginning
of the program appear on the display.
When play of one CD ends, the first track of the following CD
starts. When play of the final CD ends, play of the first CD
starts again.
The player will skip any empty CD trays.
329
AUDIO
(b) Selecting a desired CD
Searching for a desired CD: Push the “ ” and “
(DISC/CH/PROG) button to select the CD number.
(c) Selecting a desired track
”
Push the button several times until the desired CD number
appears on the display. When you release the button, the
player will start playing the selected CD from the first track.
To select a desired track: Push the “ ” or “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button until the number of the track you want
to listen to appears on the screen. If you want to return to the
beginning of the current track, quickly push the “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button one time.
“Fast forward” button: Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button
and hold it to fast forward the CD. When you release the
button, the CD player will resume playing from that position.
“Reverse” button: Push the “ ” (TUNE/TRACK) button and
hold it to reverse the CD. When you release the button, the CD
player will resume playing.
330
AUDIO
Replacing remote control battery
For replacement, use a CR2025 lithium battery or equivalent.
CAUTION
Special care should be taken that small children do not
swallow the removed battery or components.
NOTICE
When replacing the battery, be careful not to lose the
components.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type of
battery recommended by a Lexus dealer.
Dispose of used batteries according to local
regulations.
331
AUDIO
1. Pull the case out while pushing the lock release button to the
side.
2. Remove the discharged battery.
3. Put in a new battery with the positive (+) side up.
4. Put it in the case securely.
332
AUDIO
NOTICE
Be sure that the positive side of the remote control
battery is facing correctly.
Do not replace the battery with wet hands. Water may
cause rust.
Do not touch or move any components inside of the
remote control, or it may interfere with proper
operation.
Be careful not to bend the electrode of the remote
control battery insertion and that dust or oil does not
adhere to the transmitter case.
Close the battery case securely.
After replacing the battery, check that the remote control
operates properly. If the remote control still does not operate
properly, contact your Lexus dealer.
DVD player operation
The DVD player can play audio CDs, DVD video discs, CD
texts, dts–CDs, DVD audio discs and video CDs.
For appropriate discs for this player, see “Audio/video system
operating hints” on page 383.
The DVD player works when the ignition key is in the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
To turn on the DVD player, a disc must be loaded in the player.
To turn off the player, eject the disc.
(a) Inserting the disc
333
AUDIO
1. Push the center of the rear console box lid.
2. Push this button to open the cover.
3. Pull the lid forward.
334
AUDIO
4. Insert a disc with the label side backward and close the
lid.
The indicator light turns on while the disc is loaded.
The player is intended for the use with 12 cm (4.7 in.) discs only.
The player will play the track or chapter, and it will play from the
beginning of the track or chapter again after it reaches the end.
If the label faces forward, the disc cannot be played. In this
case, “DISC CHECK” appears on the screen.
CAUTION
If a disc which is not playable is inserted, “DISC CHECK” will
also appear on the screen. For appropriate discs for this
player, see “Audio/video system operating hints” on page 383.
To reduce the chance of injury in case of an accident or
a sudden stop, always keep the console box closed
while driving.
NOTICE
Never try to disassemble or oil any part of the DVD
player. Do not insert anything other than a disc into the
slot.
5. Close the cover and console box.
(b) Ejecting the disc
335
AUDIO
Pull the lid forward to open the DVD player. Push the disc
eject button to eject a disc.
NOTICE
Do not place anything on the opened cover. It could
damage the cover.
336
AUDIO
(c) Selecting the DVD mode
1 Remote control button
2 Mode selection screen
The “DVD Hint!” screen appears when the DVD mode is
first selected after you turn the ignition key to the “ACC”
or “ON” position.
Push the “OK” switch when you read the message.
To select the DVD mode, push the “DVD” button on the
remote control.
You can also select the DVD mode on the mode selection
screen mentioned above.
“DVD” appears on the screen.
337
AUDIO
(d) DVD player operation switches
The DVD player can be operated with the remote control
buttons directly.
The player can also be operated with the switches on the
screen.
To operate the switches on the screen, select the switch by the
joy stick and push the “ENT” button. You cannot select the
switches on the screen by touching them directly.
When the switch is selected by the joy stick, the outline of the
switch changes to blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the switch
will be highlighted in green.
338
AUDIO
(e) Turning the operation switches on and off
To turn on the operation switches, push the “CURSOR”
button on the remote control.
339
AUDIO
22PY056
340
AUDIO
1
Top page (DVD video operation switch)
2
Second page (DVD video operation switch)
3
Top page (DVD audio operation switch)
4
Second page (DVD audio operation switch)
5
Top page (video CD)
6
Second page (video CD)
There are operation switches on the “Top Page” and
“Second Page” screens.
To change the screen, push the “Top Page” or “Second
Page” switch on the screen.
If “ ” appears on the screen when you select a switch,
it indicates that the switch cannot work.
1 Remote control button
2 Screen switch
To turn off the switches on the screen, push the
“CURSOR” button on the remote control once again or
push the “Hide Keys” on the screen.
341
AUDIO
DVD video/DVD audio player operation
NOTE: The playback condition of some DVD discs may be
determined by a DVD software producer. This DVD player
plays a disc as the software producer intended. So, some
functions may not work properly. Be sure to read the
instruction manual for the DVD disc separately provided.
For the detailed information about DVD video discs, see
“DVD video disc information” on page 375.
Precautions for DVD video discs
When recording on a DVD video, DVD audio, video CD or
audio tracks may not record in some cases while the menu is
displayed. As audio will not play in this case, verify that the
video tracks are playing and then activate playback.
When playback of a disc is completed:
If an audio CD is playing, the first track starts.
If a DVD video, DVD audio or video CD is playing, playback
will stop or the menu screen will be displayed.
The title/chapter number and playback time display may not
appear while playing back certain DVD video discs.
342
CAUTION
Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a
low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects.
If you adjust the volume assuming that the
conversations represent the maximum volume level
available for the DVD, you may be startled by louder
sound effects or when you change to a different audio
source. Loud sounds may have a significant impact on
the human body or pose a driving hazard. Keep this in
mind when you adjust the volume.
AUDIO
(a) Turning the menu screen for the disc on or off
DVD video: To turn on the menu screen for the disc, push
the “Top Menu” or “Menu” switch on the screen, or the
“MENU” or “TOP MENU” button on the remote control.
DVD audio: To turn on the menu screen for the disc, push
the “Top Menu” switch on the screen or the “TOP MENU”
button on the remote control.
For the operation of the menu screen, see the separate manual
for the DVD disc.
22PY059
To turn on the selecting switch, push the “
” switch.
2 For DVD audio
1 For DVD video
3 Remote control button
343
AUDIO
(b) Operating the
switches/buttons
“
”,
“”,
1 Selecting switch on screen
2 Selecting switch off screen
To select the menu for the disc, push the “ ”, “ ”, “ ” or
“ ” switches on the screen. Push the “Enter” switch to
select the menu for the disc.
You can also select the menu for the disc by the joy stick
and the “ENT” button on the remote control when the
control switches are not indicated on the screen.
Push the “Shift Keys” on the screen, and the switches (“ ”,
“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “Enter” and “Shift Keys” switches) will move up
and down.
To turn off the switch, push the “OFF” switch on the screen. To
turn on the switch again, push the “ON” switch on the screen.
To return to the previous screen, push the “Back” switch on the
screen.
344
22PY062
“”
and
“”
AUDIO
2 For DVD audio
1 For DVD video
3 Remote control button
(c) Skipping to the predetermined screen
“ ” switch/button: Push this switch/button to pause the
disc.
“” switch/button: Push this switch/button to cancel the
pause and return to normal playing.
“” and “” switches/buttons: Push and hold the
“” or “” switch/button to fast forward or reverse. If you
want to return to the beginning of the current track, release the
switch/button.
DVD video only: Push the “” or “” switch/button while
pausing, the DVD video plays the slow–motion video replay or
the slow–motion video replay in reverse.
22PY063
2 For DVD audio
1 For DVD video
3 Remote control button
345
AUDIO
To skip to the predetermined screen, push the “Return”
switch on the screen or the “RETURN” button on the
remote control. The DVD player starts playing from the
beginning of the predetermined screen.
(d) Selecting the title/group
For further details of the predetermined screen, see the
separate manual for the DVD disc.
22PY064
2 For DVD audio
1 For DVD video
3 Remote control button
346
AUDIO
To display the searching title (DVD video) or group (DVD
audio) screen, push the “Search” switch on the screen or
the “SEARCH” button on the remote control.
1 For DVD video
2 For DVD audio
DVD video: Select the title number by using the “–”, “+”
and “+10” switches and push the “Enter” switch to enter
the number. The player starts playing disc for that title
number. The selected title number will appear on the
screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the menu screen.
DVD audio: Enter the group number by using the “–” and
“+” switches. The selected group number will appear on
the screen. Push the “Enter” switch. The player starts
playing the disc from the entered group number.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the previous screen.
347
AUDIO
(e) Selecting the bonus group (DVD audio only)
(f) Changing the still picture (DVD audio only)
Enter the bonus group number on the searching group
screen and push the “Enter” switch on the screen. The
“Enter Key Code” screen will appear. To enter the number
of the group you want to play, push the group number.
Push the “Still Prev.” or “Still Next” switch on the screen
to forward or reverse the still pictures.
If you enter the wrong number, push the “Clear” switch on the
screen to delete the number.
Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. The player starts
playing the disc from the selected bonus group number.
348
AUDIO
(g) Changing the subtitle language
Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen or the “SUB
TITLE” button on the remote control, and the changing
subtitle language screen will appear.
22PY068
Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch, another
language stored on the disc is selected.
To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide” switch.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the previous screen.
The selected subtitle language will appear on the screen.
2 For DVD audio
1 For DVD video
3 Remote control button
349
AUDIO
(h) Changing audio language
1 Remote control button
2 Screen switch
DVD video only —
Push the “Audio” switch on the screen or the “AUDIO”
button on the remote control, and the changing audio
language screen will appear.
350
Each time you push the “Audio” switch, another language
stored on the disc is selected.
The selected audio language will appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the previous screen.
AUDIO
(i) Changing audio format
1 Remote control button
2 Screen switch
Each time you touch the “Audio” switch, another audio
format stored on the disc is selected.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the previous screen.
DVD audio only —
Push the “Audio” switch on the screen or the “AUDIO”
button on the remote control and the changing audio
format screen will appear.
351
AUDIO
(j) Changing angle screen
Push the “Angle” switch on the screen or the “ANGLE”
button on the remote control, and the changing angle
screen will appear.
22PY072
The angle can be selected for discs that are multi–angle
compatible when the “
” mark appears on the screen. Each
time you push the “Angle” switch, the angle changes. The
angle number which you can select will appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the previous screen.
2 For DVD audio
1 For DVD video
3 Remote control button
352
AUDIO
(k) Changing the initial setting
Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen or the “SET UP”
button on the remote control, and the initial setting screen
will appear. You can change the initial setting.
After the setting is done, the player plays from the beginning
of the chapter or the track.
22PY074
There are initial setting switches on the “Setup Menu 1”
screen ( 1 ) and “Setup Menu 2” screen ( 2 ).
To change the screen, push the “Top Page” or “Second Page”
switch on the screen.
After you change the initial setting, push the “Enter” switch.
The initial setting switch will be turned off and return to the
picture previously.
When the “Initial Setting” switch on “Setup Menu 2” is pushed,
all menus are initialized.
2 For DVD audio
1 For DVD video
3 Remote control button
353
AUDIO
(l) Changing the audio language
Push the “Audio Lang.” switch on the “Setup Menu 1”
screen ( 1 ) and the “Select Audio Language” screen
( 2 ) appear.
Select the language you want to hear on the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to hear, push the
“Others” switch. The “Enter Audio Lang. Code” screen will
appear.
354
To enter the code of the language you want to hear, push the
number of the language code. For details about the language
codes, see the language code list. If you enter a wrong
number, push the “Clear” switch to delete the number.
If numbers which are not on the list are entered and the “Enter”
switch is pushed, the “Incorrect Code” screen will appear.
Push the language code you want to hear again.
To return to the “Select Audio Language” screen, push the
“Back” switch.
AUDIO
(m) Changing the subtitle language
Push the “Subtitle Lang.” switch on the “Setup Menu 1”
screen ( 1 ) and the “Select Subtitle Lang.” screen ( 2 )
appear.
Select the language you want to read on the screen.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to read, push the
“Others” switch. The “Enter Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will
appear.
To enter the code of the language you want to read, push the
number of the language code. For details about the language
codes, see the language code list. If you enter a wrong
number, push the “Clear” switch to delete the number.
Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. If numbers which are
not on the list are entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed, the
“Incorrect code” screen will appear. Push the language code
you want to read again.
To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.” screen, push the “Back”
switch on the screen.
355
AUDIO
(n) Changing the DVD language
Push the “DVD Language” switch on the “Setup Menu 1”
screen ( 1 ) and “Select DVD Language” screen ( 2 )
appear.
Select the language you want to read on the screen.
If you cannot find a language you want to read, push the
“Others” switch. The “Enter DVD Language Code” screen will
appear.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, push the “Back” switch.
If you cannot find a language you want to read, push the
“Others” switch. The “Enter DVD Language Code” screen will
appear.
356
To enter the code of the language you want to read, push the
number of the language code. For details about the language
codes, see the language code list. If you enter a wrong
number, push the “Clear” switch to delete the number.
Push the “Enter” switch on the screen. If numbers which are
not on the list are entered and the “Enter” switch is pushed, the
“Incorrect code” screen will appear. Push the language code
you want to read again.
To return to the “Select DVD Language” screen, push the
“Back” switch on the screen.
AUDIO
(o) Turning the angle mark on or off
(p) Setting level of viewer restrictions
The angle mark can be turned on for discs that are
multi–angle compatible.
You can restrict the play back screen by setting the viewer
restrictions. You can prevent the restriction with a
password. Some discs do not supply a restriction.
Each time you push the “Angle Mark” switch on the screen, the
angle mark turns on or off alternately.
To set the level of viewer restriction, push the “Parental” switch
on the “Setup Menu 1” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”
screen will appear.
357
AUDIO
Push the number for the password and the “Enter” switch. The
“Select Restriction Level” screen will appear.
If you enter a wrong number, push the “Clear” switch to delete
the number.
You cannot change the setting without inputting the password.
When you forget or change the password, push the “Clear”
switch ten times to initialize the password.
To return to the “Setup Menu 1” screen, push the “Back” switch.
358
Push a parental level (1 — 8). The smaller the level number,
the stricter the age limit. Push the “Back” switch to return to the
“Setup Menu 1” screen.
AUDIO
(q) Setting the display mode
(r) Language code list
Each time you push the “Display Mode” switch on the
“Setup Menu 2” screen, the display mode is changed from
wide mode to auto mode.
Language
Code
1001
Japanese
0514
English
0618
French
0405
German
0920
Italian
0519
Spanish
2608
Chinese
1412
Dutch
1620
Portuguese
1922
Swedish
359
AUDIO
360
1821
Russian
1115
Korean
0512
Greek
0101
Afar
0102
Abkhazian
0106
Afrikaans
0113
Amharic
0118
Arabic
0119
Assamese
0125
Aymara
0126
Azerbaijani
0201
Bashkir
0205
Byelorussian
0207
Bulgarian
0208
Bihari
0209
Bislama
0214
Bengali
0215
Tibetan
0218
Breton
0301
Catalan
0315
Corsican
AUDIO
0319
Czech
0325
Welsh
0401
Danish
0426
Bhutani
0515
Esperanto
0520
Estonian
0521
Basque
0601
Persian
0609
Finnish
0610
Fiji
0615
Faroese
0625
Frisian
0701
Irish
0704
Scots–Gaelic
0712
Galician
0714
Guarani
0721
Gujarati
0801
Hausa
0809
Hindi
0818
Croatian
0821
Hungarian
361
AUDIO
362
0825
Armenian
0901
Interlingua
0905
Interlingue
0911
Inupiak
0914
Indonesian
0919
Icelandic
0923
Hebrew
1009
Yiddish
1023
Javanese
1101
Georgian
1111
Kazakh
1112
Greenlandic
1113
Cambodian
1114
Kannada
1119
Kashmiri
1121
Kurdish
1125
Kirghiz
1201
Latin
1214
Lingala
1215
Laothian
1220
Lithuanian
AUDIO
1222
Latvian
1307
Malagasy
1309
Maori
1311
Macedonian
1312
Malayalam
1314
Mongolian
1315
Moldavian
1318
Marathi
1319
Malay
1320
Maltese
1325
Burmese
1401
Nauru
1405
Nepali
1415
Norwegian
1503
Occitan
1513
(Afan) Oromo
1518
Oriya
1601
Punjabi
1612
Polish
1619
Pashto, Pushto
1721
Quechua
363
AUDIO
364
1813
Rhaeto–Romance
1814
Kirundi
1815
Romanian
1823
Kinyarwanda
1901
Sanskrit
1904
Sindhi
1907
Sangho
1908
Serbo–Croatian
1909
Sinhalese
1911
Slovak
1912
Slovenian
1913
Samoan
1914
Shona
1915
Somali
1917
Albanian
1918
Serbian
1919
Siswati
1920
Sesotho
1921
Sundanese
1923
Swahili
2001
Tamil
AUDIO
2005
Telugu
2007
Tajik
2008
Thai
2009
Tigrinya
2011
Turkmen
2012
Tagalog
2014
Setswana
2015
Tonga
2018
Turkish
2019
Tsonga
2020
Tatar
2023
Twi
2111
Ukrainian
2118
Urdu
2126
Uzbek
2209
Vietnamese
2215
Volapük
2315
Wolof
2408
Xhosa
2515
Yoruba
2621
Zulu
365
AUDIO
(s) Selecting the chapter/track
(t) Using the control screen
To select the chapter/track, push the “ ” or “ ”
(TUNE/TRACK) button on the remote control until the
number of the chapter/track you want to select appears on
the screen.
1 For DVD video
2 For DVD audio
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” button on the remote
control. The control screen will appear on the screen.
Details of the specific switches, controls and features are
described below.
“PICTURE” switch: Push the “PICTURE” switch to turn off the
control screen and return to the picture previously displayed.
“RPT” switch (DVD audio only): Push the “RPT” switch while
the track is playing. When the track ends, it will automatically
replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this switch again.
“RAND” switch (DVD audio only): Push the “RAND” switch.
The player will play the tracks on the disc in random order. To
turn off the random feature, push this switch again.
366
AUDIO
“SCAN” switch (DVD audio only): Push the “SCAN” switch.
The player will scan all the tracks on the disc you are listening
to. To stop scanning, push this switch again. If the player
scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will stop scanning.
” and “
” switches: Push and hold the “
” or
“
” switch to fast forward or reverse a disc. When you
“
release the switch, the DVD player will resume playing.
(u) Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one
of the three following error messages.
If “DISC CHECK” appears on the screen: It indicates that the
disc is dirty, damaged or it was inserted upside down. Clean
the disc or insert it correctly.
If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen: It
indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.
If “DVD ERROR” appears on the screen: There is a problem
inside the player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.
If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
367
AUDIO
Video CD/audio CD/CD text player operation
(a) Selecting the disc menu number (video CD only)
1 Remote control button
2 Screen switch
Push the “SEARCH” button on the remote control or the
“Sel. Number” switch on the screen, and the disc menu
number search screen will appear.
368
Enter the disc menu number by using the “–”, “+” and “+10”
switches and push the “Enter” switch. The player starts playing
the disc from the entered disc menu number. The entered disc
menu number will appear on the screen.
Push the “Back” switch to return to the menu screen.
Move up and down the switches by pushing the “Shift keys” on
the screen.
AUDIO
(b) Operating the
switches/buttons
“
”,
“”,
“”
and
“”
1 Remote control button
2 Screen switch
(c) Turning on the disc menu (video CD only)
1 Remote control button
2 Screen switch
“ ” switch/button: Push this switch/button to pause the
disc.
Push the “RETURN” button on the remote control or the
“Return” switch on the screen to turn on the menu screen
for the disc.
“” switch/button: Push this switch/button to cancel the
pause and return to normal playing.
For the operation of the menu screen, see the manual for the
video CD.
“” and “” switches/buttons: Push this switch/button
to fast forward or reverse. If you want to return to the beginning
of the current track, release the switch/button.
Video CD only: Push the “” switch/button while pausing,
the video CD plays the slow–motion video replay.
369
AUDIO
(d) Changing menu page or track (video CD only)
(e) Changing a multiplex transmission (video CD only)
Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. Menu Prev.” switch while
the disc menu is displayed. The next or previous page will
appear on the screen.
Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a multiplex
transmission. The mode changes from Main/Sub to Main
to Sub and back to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”
switch.
Push the “D. Menu Next” or “D. Menu Prev.” switch while
the player is playing video. The next or previous track will
be searched and played.
370
AUDIO
(f) Changing the initial setting (video CD only)
1 Remote control button
2 Screen switch
Push the “SET UP” button on the remote control or the
“Set Up” switch on the screen, and the initial setting
screen will appear. You can change the initial setting. (See
“(k) Changing the initial setting” on page 353 for details.)
(g) Using the control screen
22PY095
After the setting is done, the player plays from the beginning
of the chapter or the track.
1 For video CD
3 For CD text
2 For audio CD
371
AUDIO
When playing a disc, push the “DVD” button on the remote
control. The control screen will appear on the screen.
CD text only — The CD title and track title will appear on the
screen when pushing the “DVD” button.
Details of the specific switches, controls and features are
described below.
“PICTURE” switch (video CD only): Push the “PICTURE”
switch to turn off the control screen and return to the picture
previously displayed.
“RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text): Push the “RPT”
switch while the track is playing. When the track ends, it will
automatically replay. To turn off the repeat feature, push this
switch again.
“RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text): Push the “RAND”
switch. The player will play the tracks on the CD in random
order. To turn off the random feature, push this switch again.
“SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text): Push the “SCAN”
switch. The player will scan all the tracks on the CD. To stop
scanning, push this switch again. When the player has
scanned all the tracks on the CD, it will stop scanning.
” and “
” switches: Push the “
” or “
” switch
“
to fast forward or reverse the disc. When you push the switch
again, the DVD player will resume playing.
372
(h) Error messages
If the player malfunctions, your audio system will display one
of the three following error messages.
If “DISC CHECK” appears on the screen: It indicates that the
disc is dirty, damaged or it was inserted upside down. Clean
the disc or insert it correctly.
If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen: It
indicates that the DVD region code is not set properly.
If “DVD ERROR” appears on the screen: There is a problem
inside the player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.
If the malfunction still exists, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer.
AUDIO
Screen adjustment
You can adjust the color, contrast, tone and brightness of
the screen.
Each time you push the “+” or “–” switch, you can adjust the
color, contrast, tone and brightness of the screen.
Push the “DISPLAY” button on the remote control (
and then the “Display” screen ( 2 ) will appear.
1
)
The screen may turn purple to deflect the sunlight. This is not
a malfunction.
“+” or “GREEN”
“–” or “RED”
COLOR
Strengthens the
green color
Strengthens the
red color
CONTRAST
Strengthens the
contrast
Weakens the
contrast
TONE
Strengthens the
tone
Weakens the tone
BRIGHTNESS
Brightens
Darkens
373
AUDIO
After adjusting the screen, push the “OK” switch to return to the
previous screen.
Selecting the video mode
The audio machine connected to the input terminal
adapter can be played in the video mode.
To select the video mode, push the “VIDEO” button on the
remote control ( 1 ). You can also select the video mode
on the mode selection screen ( 2 ) mentioned above.
374
AUDIO
DVD video disc information
Marks shown on DVD video discs:
(a) DVD player and DVD video discs
This DVD player conforms to NTSC color TV formats. DVD
video discs conforming to other formats such as PAL or
SECAM cannot be used.
Region codes: Some DVD video discs have a region code
indicating where you can use. If the DVD video disc is not
labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in this DVD player. If you
attempt to play an inappropriate DVD video disc in this player,
“REGION CODE ERROR” appears on the screen. Even if the
DVD video disc does not have a region code, in some cases
you cannot use it.
Indicates NTSC format of color TV.
Indicates the number of audio
tracks.
Indicates the number of language
subtitles.
Indicates the number of angles.
Indicates the screen to be selected.
Wide screen: 16:9
Standard: 4:3
Indicates regions in which this video
disc can be played.
ALL: all countries
Number: region code
375
AUDIO
(b) DVD video disc glossary
DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc that holds video. DVD
video discs have adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world
standards of digital compression technologies. The picture
data is compressed by 1/40 on average and stored. Variable
rate encoded technology in which the volume of data assigned
to the picture is changed depending on the picture format has
also been adopted. Audio data is stored using PCM and Dolby
digital, which enables higher quality of sound. Furthermore,
multi–angle and multi–language features will also help you
enjoy the more advanced technology of DVD video.
Viewer restrictions: This feature limits what can be viewed in
conformity with the level of restrictions of the country. The level
of restrictions varies depending on the DVD video disc. Some
DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are
skipped or replaced with other scenes.
Level 1: DVD video discs for children can be played.
Level 2 — 7: DVD video discs for children and G–rated movies
can be played.
Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can be played.
Multi–angle feature: You can enjoy the same scene at
different angles.
Multi–language feature: You can select the language of the
subtitles and audio.
376
Region codes: Region codes are provided on DVD players
and DVD discs. If the DVD video disc does not have the same
region code as the DVD player, you cannot play the disc on the
DVD player. For region codes, see page 375.
Audio: This DVD player can play liner PCM, Dolby digital, dts
and MPEG audio format DVD. Other decoded type cannot be
played.
Title and chapter: Video and audio programs stored on DVD
video discs are divided in parts by title and chapter.
Title: The largest unit of the video and audio programs stored
on DVD video discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one album,
or one audio program is assigned as a title.
Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title comprises plural
chapters.
AUDIO
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and “
” are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential unpublished works.
1992 — 1997 Dolby Laboratories. All rights reserved.
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims of certain
U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned
by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use
of this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended
for home and other limited viewing uses only unless
otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
Input terminal adapter
The rear entertainment system plays videos and sound when
your audio system is connected to the input terminal adapter
on the rear console box.
For details, refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions.
“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
To use the input terminal adapter, push the lid.
377
AUDIO
To use the input terminal adapter, open the cover.
The input terminal adapter is composed of 3 input terminal
adapters.
“VIDEO”: Image input adapter
“MONO L”: Audio input adapter
“R”: Audio input adapter
NOTICE
Close the input terminal adapter lid when the input
terminal adapter is not in use. Inserting a foreign
object other than the appropriate plug that fits the
adapter may cause electrical failure or short circuit.
The input terminal lid must be closed before you fold
up the second seat.
378
AUDIO
Power outlet (115 VAC)
Main switch
This power outlet is designed for use as a power supply
for the audio device connected to the input terminal
adapter.
The key must be in the “ON” position for the power outlet to be
used.
The maximum capacity for this power outlet is 115 VAC/100W.
If you attempt to use an appliance that requires more than 115
VAC or 100W, the protection circuit will activate and cut the
power supply. The power supply will restart automatically
when you use an appliance that operates within the 115
VAC/100W limits.
To use the power outlet, push the main switch on the
instrument panel.
An indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the power outlet
is ready for use.
Push the main switch once again to turn the power outlet off.
When the power outlet is not in use, make sure that the main
switch is turned off.
379
AUDIO
NOTICE
To prevent the battery from being discharged, do not
use the power outlet longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is
not in use. Inserting anything other than an
appropriate plug that fits the outlet, or allowing any
liquid to get into the outlet may cause electrical
failure or short circuits.
The power outlet is not designed for the following electric
appliances even though their power consumption is
under 115 VAC/100W. These appliances may not operate
properly.
Headphone input jacks
Appliances with high initial peak wattage: Cathode–ray
tube type televisions, compressor–driven refrigerators,
electric pumps, electric tools, etc.
Measuring devices which process precise data: Medical
equipment, measuring instruments, etc.
Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power
supply: Microcomputer–controlled electric blankets, touch
sensor lamps, etc.
Certain electrical appliances may cause radio noise.
380
To use the jack, push the lid.
AUDIO
You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment system with
commercial headphones.
To use the headphones, connect them to the jack.
The key must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
To adjust the volume of the headphones, turn the knob.
Turn right to increase the volume. Turn left to decrease the
volume.
The maximum volume depends on the type of headphones.
With some headphone generally available in the market, it may
be difficult to catch sound properly. Lexus recommends the
use of Lexus genuine headphone.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
Wireless headphone: You can also enjoy the rear seat
entertainment system with a wireless headphone. For details,
ask your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Adjust the volume when you connect the headphones
to the jack. Loud sounds may have a significant impact
on the human body.
381
AUDIO
NOTICE
The headphone input jack lid must be closed before you
tumble the second seat.
382
AUDIO
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM OPERATING
HINTS
NOTICE
To ensure correct audio/video system operation:
Be careful not to spill beverages over the system.
Do not put anything other than a cassette tape or CD
into the slot.
Do not put anything other than a DVD video, DVD
audio, video CD, dts–CD and audio CD into the DVD
player.
The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle
may cause a noise from the speakers of the system
which you are listening to. However, this does not
indicate a malfunction.
383
AUDIO
Radio reception
FM
Usually, a problem with radio reception does not mean there is
a problem with your radio — it is just the normal result of
conditions outside the vehicle.
Fading and drifting stations — Generally, the effective range
of FM is about 40 km (25 miles). Once outside this range, you
may notice fading and drifting, which increase with the distance
from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by
distortion.
For example, nearby buildings and terrain can interfere with
FM reception. Power lines or telephone wires can interfere
with AM signals. And of course, radio signals have a limited
range. The farther you are from a station, the weaker its signal
will be. In addition, reception conditions change constantly as
your vehicle moves.
Here are some common reception problems that probably do
not indicate a problem with your radio:
Multi–path — FM signals are reflective, making it possible for
two signals to reach your antenna at the same time. If this
happens, the signals will cancel each other out, causing a
momentary flutter or loss of reception.
Static and fluttering — These occur when signals are
blocked by buildings, trees, or other large objects. Increasing
the bass level may reduce static and fluttering.
Station swapping — If the FM signal you are listening to is
interrupted or weakened, and there is another strong station
nearby on the FM band, your radio may tune in the second
station until the original signal can be picked up again.
384
AUDIO
AM
Use high–quality cassettes.
Fading — AM broadcasts are reflected by the upper
atmosphere — especially at night. These reflected signals can
interfere with those received directly from the radio station,
causing the radio station to sound alternately strong and weak.
Low–quality cassette tapes can cause many problems,
including poor sound, inconsistent playing speed, and
constant auto–reversing. They can also get stuck or tangled
in the cassette player.
Station interference — When a reflected signal and a signal
received directly from a radio station are very nearly the same
frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult
to hear the broadcast.
Do not use a cassette if it has been damaged or tangled or
if its label is peeling off.
Static — AM is easily affected by external sources of electrical
noise, such as high tension power lines, lightening, or electrical
motors. This results in static.
Store cassettes in their cases and out of direct sunlight.
Do not leave a cassette in the player if you are not listening
to it, especially if it is hot outside.
For the best performance for your cassette player and tapes:
Avoid using cassettes with a total playing time longer than
100 minutes (50 minutes per side). The tape used in these
cassettes is thin and could get stuck or tangled in the
cassette player.
Clean the tape head and other parts regularly.
Caring for your CD player, DVD player and CDs
A dirty tape head or tape path can decrease sound quality
and tangle your cassette tapes. The easiest way to clean
them is by using a cleaning tape. (A wet type is
recommended.)
Your CD player and DVD player are intended for use with 12
cm (4.7 in.) CDs only.
Caring for your cassette player and tapes
Extremely high temperatures can keep your CD player and
DVD player from working. On hot days, use the air
conditioning to cool the vehicle interior before you use the
players.
Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make your CD player
and DVD player skip.
385
AUDIO
If moisture gets into your CD player and DVD player, the
players may not play even though they appear to be
working. Remove the CD from the player and wait until it
dries.
CD player
CAUTION
CD players and DVD players use an invisible laser beam
which could cause hazardous radiation exposure if
directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the players
correctly.
Use only CDs marked as shown above. The following
products may not be playable on your CD player.
Copy–protected CDs
CD–Rs (CD–Recordable)
CD–RWs (CD–Re–writable)
CD–ROMs
SACDs
dts–CDs
386
AUDIO
DVD player
Audio CDs
DVD video discs
DVD audio discs
Use only discs marked as shown above. The following
products may not be playable on your DVD player.
SACDs
Copy–protected CDs
CD–Rs (CD–Recordable)
CD–RWs (CD–Re–writable)
CD–ROMs
DVD–Rs
DVD+Rs
DVD–RWs
DVD+RWs
DVD–ROMs
DVD–RAMs
Video CDs
387
AUDIO
388
Special shaped CDs
Low quality CDs
Transparent/translucent CDs
Labeled CDs
AUDIO
NOTICE
Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low
quality or labeled CDs such as those shown in the
illustrations. The use of such CDs may damage the
player or changer, or it may be impossible to eject the
CD.
389
AUDIO
Correct
Wrong
Handle CDs carefully, especially when you are inserting
them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid
getting fingerprints on them, particularly on the shiny side.
Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or other CD damage
could cause the player to skip or to repeat a section of a
track. (To see a pin hole, hold the CD up to the light.)
Remove CDs from the CD player when you are not listening
to them. Store them in their plastic cases away from
moisture, heat, and direct sunlight.
390
To clean a CD: Wipe it with a soft, lint–free cloth that has been
dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center
to the edge of the CD (not in circles). Dry it with another soft,
lint–free cloth. Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
anti–static device.
AUDIO
391
SECTION
3–1
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting and driving
Three–way catalytic converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine exhaust caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to start the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four–wheel drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear view monitor system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear height control air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic modulated suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Active traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle stability control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downhill assist control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill–start assist control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire pressure warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Brake pad wear limit indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limited–slip differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
392
393
396
398
398
400
401
403
411
415
419
422
429
430
433
436
439
442
446
456
457
STARTING AND DRIVING
THREE–WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTERS
Three–way catalytic converters are emission control
devices installed in the exhaust system.
The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the exhaust gas.
CAUTION
Keep people and combustible materials away from
the exhaust pipe while the engine is running. The
exhaust gas is very hot.
Do not idle or park your vehicle over anything that
might burn easily such as grass, leaves, paper or
rags.
393
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE
A large amount of unburned gases flowing into the
three–way catalytic converter may cause it to overheat
and create a fire hazard. To prevent this and other
damage, observe the following precautions:
Use only unleaded gasoline.
Do not drive with an extremely low fuel level; running
out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, creating
an excessive load on the three–way catalytic
converter.
Do not allow the engine to run at idle speed for more
than 20 minutes.
Avoid racing the engine.
Do not push–start or pull–start your vehicle.
Do not turn off the ignition while the vehicle is
moving.
Keep your engine in good running order.
Malfunctions in the engine electrical system, electric
ignition system or fuel system could cause an
extremely high three–way catalytic converter
temperature.
394
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, take your vehicle in for a check–up as
soon as possible. Remember, your Lexus dealer
knows your vehicle and its three–way catalytic
converter system best.
To ensure that the three–way catalytic converter and
the entire emission control system operate properly,
your vehicle must receive the periodic inspections
required by the Lexus Maintenance Schedule. For
scheduled maintenance information, refer to the
“Owner’s
Manual
Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
395
STARTING AND DRIVING
ENGINE EXHAUST CAUTION
CAUTION
Avoid inhaling the engine exhaust. It contains
carbon monoxide, which is a colorless and odorless
gas. It can cause unconsciousness or even death.
Make sure the exhaust system has no holes or loose
connections. The system should be checked from
time to time. If you hit something, or notice a change
in the sound of the exhaust, have the system checked
immediately.
Do not run the engine in a garage or enclosed area
except for the time needed to drive the vehicle in or
out. The exhaust gases cannot escape, making this
a particularly dangerous situation.
Do not remain for a long time in a parked vehicle with
the engine running. If it is unavoidable, however, do
so only in an unconfined area and adjust the heating
or cooling system to force outside air into the vehicle.
Keep the back door closed while driving. An open or
unsealed back door may cause exhaust gases to be
drawn into the vehicle.
396
STARTING AND DRIVING
To allow proper operation of your vehicle’s
ventilation system, keep the inlet grilles in front of the
windshield clear of snow, leaves, or other
obstructions.
If you smell exhaust fumes in the vehicle, drive with
the windows open and the back door closed. Have
the cause immediately located and corrected.
397
STARTING AND DRIVING
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
IGNITION SWITCH
1. Check the area around the vehicle before entering it.
2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle, head restraint height
and steering wheel angle.
3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
4. Lock all doors.
5. Fasten seat belts.
Remember to check that the service reminder indicators
function when turning the key to “ON”, and check the fuel
gauge to see that you have sufficient fuel.
“START” — Starter motor on. The key will return to the
“ON” position when released.
For starting tips, see page 401.
“ON” — Engine on and all accessories on.
This is the normal driving position.
NOTICE
Do not leave the key in the “ON” position if the engine
is not running. The battery will discharge and the
electronic ignition system could be damaged.
398
STARTING AND DRIVING
“ACC” — Accessories such as the radio operate, but the
engine is off.
If you leave the key in the “ACC” or “LOCK” position and open
the driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to remove the key.
“LOCK” — Engine is off and the steering wheel is locked.
The ignition key can be removed only at this position.
To turn the key from “ACC” to the “LOCK” position, you must
put the transmission selector lever in the “P” position.
Once you remove the key, the engine immobilizer system is
automatically set. See “Engine immobilizer system” on page
14.
When starting the engine, the key may seem stuck at the
“LOCK” position. To free it, first be sure the key is pushed all
the way in, and then rock the steering wheel slightly while
turning the key gently.
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may
hear sound coming from underneath the luggage compartment
for several minutes. This is normal operation and does not
indicate a malfunction. (See “Leak detection pump” on page
vi.)
If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the
vehicle is moving, turn the key only to “ACC”.
399
STARTING AND DRIVING
If is not a malfunction if the needles on all meters and gauges
move slightly when the key is turned tp the “ACC”, “ON” or
“START” position.
PARKING BRAKE
U.S.A.
Canada
400
STARTING AND DRIVING
To set: Pull up the lever. For better holding power, first
depress the brake pedal and hold it while setting the
parking brake.
To release: Pull up the lever slightly ( 1 ), press the lock
release button ( 2 ), and lower the lever ( 3 ).
Before leaving your vehicle, firmly apply the parking brake. For
better holding power, first depress the brake pedal and hold it
while setting the parking brake.
CAUTION
Before driving, make sure the parking brake is fully
released and that the parking brake reminder light is off.
HOW TO START THE ENGINE
Cranking hold function
Once you turn the ignition key to “START” position and release
it, the cranking hold function continues to crank the engine in
“ON” position until it starts.
The function stops cranking the engine after about 25 seconds
maximum if the engine has not started yet. When you crank
the engine again, wait a few seconds and restart it.
If you hold the key in “START” position, the function will keep
cranking for about 30 seconds maximum.
Before cranking
1. Apply the parking brake firmly.
2. Turn off unnecessary lights and accessories.
3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you need to restart the engine
while the vehicle is moving, put the selector lever in “N”. A
starter safety device will prevent the starter from operating if
the selector lever is in any drive position.
4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to the floor until driving
off.
401
STARTING AND DRIVING
Starting the engine
Before starting the engine, be sure to follow the instructions in
“Before cranking”.
Normal starting procedure
The multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system in your engine automatically controls the
proper air–fuel mixture for starting. You can start a cold or hot
engine as follows:
With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to
“START” position, then release it.
NOTICE
Do not race a cold engine.
If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls
frequently, have the engine checked immediately.
402
Engine should be warmed up by driving, not in idle. For
warming up, drive with smoothly turning engine until engine
coolant temperature is within normal range.
If the engine stalls...
Simply restart it, using the correct procedure given in normal
starting.
If the engine will not start...
See “If your vehicle will not start” on page 491.
STARTING AND DRIVING
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Your automatic transmission has a shift lock system to
minimize the possibility of incorrect operation. This
means you can only shift out of “P” position when the
brake pedal is depressed with the ignition switch in “ON”
position. ()
The shift position is displayed beside the selector lever
and on the instrument cluster.
P: Parking, engine starting and key removal position
R: Reverse position
N: Neutral position
D: Normal driving position (Shifting into overdrive possible)
4: Position for engine braking (Shifting into overdrive not
possible)
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be
enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. For
the operation to decrease the vehicle speed, see page
421.
31PY039
3, 2: Position for more powerful engine braking
L: Position for maximum engine braking
403
STARTING AND DRIVING
Correct use of the automatic transmission is explained in
the following parts.
(a) Normal driving
(a) Normal driving
(b) Using engine braking
(c) Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions
(d) Backing up
(e) Parking
(f) Good driving practice
(g) If you cannot shift the selector lever
(h) Driving in second start mode
1 “P” (Park) position
2 “N” (Neutral) position
1. Start the engine as instructed in “How to start the
engine” on page 401.
The transmission must be in “P” or “N”. The engine will not start
in any drive position even if the ignition key is turned to
“START”.
404
STARTING AND DRIVING
3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal. Depress
the accelerator pedal slowly for smooth starting.
In normal cruising, the vehicle will start in first gear and
automatically shift up to the most suitable gear. On inclines,
declines or winding roads, etc., the vehicle shifts up and down
automatically according to the running conditions to obtain the
suitable driving power and engine braking.
When the lever is in the “4” position, the automatic
transmission system will select the most suitable gear for the
running conditions such as hill climbing, hard towing, etc.
1 Brake pedal
2 “D” (Drive) position
2. With your foot holding down the brake pedal, shift the
selector lever to “D”.
Always use the “D” position to improve fuel economy and quiet
driving. Only in this position, shifting into the overdrive gear is
possible. However, while the engine coolant temperature is
low, the transmission will not shift into the overdrive gear even
in the “D” position. (See “(b) Using engine braking” and “(f)
Good driving practice” for exceptions.)
If you need to accelerate rapidly while driving, depress the
accelerator pedal to the full throttle position. This provides
more acceleration by automatically downshifting the
transmission to the next lower gear or beyond, depending on
the vehicle speed.
If engine braking is needed, such as in descending a long hill,
see “(b) Using engine braking”.
CAUTION
Never put your foot on the accelerator pedal while
shifting.
405
STARTING AND DRIVING
3
(b) Using engine braking
Shift into the “2” position. The transmission will downshift
to second gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes
lower than the speed listed below and more powerful
engine braking than that of “3” position will be enabled.
Transfer
4
1
Shift into the “4” position. The transmission will downshift
to fourth gear and engine braking will be enabled.
When the cruise control is being used, even if you
downshift from “D” to “4”, engine braking will not be
enabled because the cruise control is not cancelled. If
you need to decrease the vehicle speed, see page 421.
2
Shift into the “3” position. The transmission will downshift
to third gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower
than the speed listed below and stronger engine braking
will be enabled.
Transfer
406
“H”
“L”
135 km/h
52 km/h
(84 mph)
(32 mph)
89 km/h
34 km/h
(55 mph)
(21 mph)
Shift into the “L” position. The transmission will downshift
to first gear when the vehicle speed is or becomes lower
than the speed listed below and maximum engine braking
will be enabled.
Transfer
To use the braking power of the engine, downshift the
transmission in the way described below:
“H”
“L”
“H”
“L”
39 km/h
15 km/h
(24 mph)
(9 mph)
CAUTION
Be careful when downshifting on a slippery surface.
The abrupt change in engine speed could cause the
vehicle to skid or spin.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(c) Using the “3”, “2” and “L” positions
The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for strong engine braking
as described previously.
With the selector lever in “3”, “2” or “L”, you can start the vehicle
in motion as with the lever in “D”.
With the selector lever in “3” or “2”, the vehicle will start in first
gear and automatically shift to second gear.
With the selector lever in “L”, the transmission is engaged in
first gear.
NOTICE
Be careful not to over–rev the engine. Watch the
tachometer to keep engine rpm from going into the
red zone. The approximate maximum allowable
speed for each position is given below for your
reference:
Transmission
“3”
“2”
“L”
Transfer
“L”
60 km/h (37 mph)
41 km/h (25 mph)
24 km/h (15 mph)
“H”
154 km/h (96 mph)
105 km/h (65 mph)
61 km/h (38 mph)
Do not continue hill climbing or hard towing for a long
time in the “3”, “2” or “L” position. This may cause
severe automatic transmission damage from
overheating. To prevent such damage, “4” position
should be used in hill climbing or hard towing.
407
STARTING AND DRIVING
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
(d) Backing up
2. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “R” position.
1 Brake pedal
2 “R” (Reverse) position
NOTICE
Never shift into reverse while the vehicle is moving.
When the shift lever is shifted into “R” position, the outside rear
view mirrors automatically down to help backing up. For
details, see page 232.
408
Vehicles with rear view monitor system —
When the selector lever is shifted into “R” position with the
ignition switch in the “ON” position, rear view monitor system
will activate. For instructions, see “Rear view monitor system”
on page 415.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(e) Parking
(f) Good driving practice
If the transmission repeatedly shifts up and down between
the fourth and overdrive gears when climbing a gentle slope,
shift the selector lever to the “4” position. Be sure to shift the
selector lever to the “D” position after climbing the slope.
1 Brake pedal
2 Parking brake lever
3 “P” (Park) position
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.
2. Apply the parking brake fully.
3. With the brake pedal held down with your foot, shift the
selector lever to the “P” position.
CAUTION
While the vehicle is moving, never attempt to move the
selector lever into “P” under any circumstances.
Serious mechanical damage and loss of vehicle control
may result.
409
STARTING AND DRIVING
When towing a trailer, in order to maintain efficient engine
braking and electrical charging performance, do not use
overdrive.
CAUTION
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped
with the engine running. This prevents the vehicle from
creeping.
NOTICE
Always use the brake pedal or parking brake to hold the
vehicle on an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold the
vehicle using the accelerator pedal, as this can cause
the transmission to overheat.
410
STARTING AND DRIVING
(g) If you cannot shift the selector lever
If you cannot shift the selector lever even though the brake
pedal is depressed, use the shift lock override button. For
instructions, see “If you cannot shift automatic transmission
selector lever” on page 524.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM
(a) Four–wheel drive control
(h) Driving in second start mode
Use the four–wheel drive control lever and center
differential lock switch to select the following transfer and
center differential modes.
In the second start mode, the transmission system shifts up
from second gear. Use this mode when starting your vehicle
in sand, mud, ice or snow.
To set the second start mode, push the “2nd STRT” switch. In
the second start mode, the “2nd STRT” indicator light comes
on. To cancel the second start mode, push the “2nd STRT”
switch once again.
The “H” and “L” position of the four–wheel drive control lever
provides either lock or unlock mode of the center differential
depending on the center differential lock switch position.
Use the center differential lock system if your wheels get stuck
in a ditch, or when you are driving on a slippery or bumpy
surface. When the center differential is locked, the vehicle
stability control system is automatically turned off and the
center differential lock and “VSC OFF” indicator lights come on
because the function that controls engine performance
interferes with the process of freeing your wheels.
411
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE
As soon as the center differential lock switch is turned
on, the “VSC OFF” indicator light comes on. After the
wheels are out of the ditch or off the slippery or bumpy
surface, turn the center differential lock switch off.
Make sure the center differential lock indicator light and
vehicle stability control system off indicator light turn
off.
“H” (high speed position, center differential unlocked):
Lever at “H”, center differential lock switch left out
“L” (low speed position, center differential unlocked):
Lever at “L”, center differential lock switch left out
Use this for normal driving on all types of roads, from dry
hard–surfaced roads to wet, icy or snow–covered roads. This
position gives greater economy, quietest ride, least wear and
better vehicle control.
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for climbing
or descending steep hills, off–road driving, and hard pulling in
sand or mud.
“H” (high speed position, center differential locked): Lever
at “H”, center differential lock switch pushed in
Use this for greater traction when you experience a loss of
power, such as wheel slipping, in the center differential unlock
mode.
“N” (neutral position): Lever at “N”
No power is delivered to the wheels. The vehicle must be
stopped.
412
In this mode, the braking feeling that occurs when the wheels
are negotiating a sharp corner is further reduced than in the “L”
(low position, center differential locked) mode.
“L” (low speed position, center differential locked): Lever
at “L”, center differential lock switch pushed in
Use this for maximum power and traction. Use this for hard
pulling in situations the vehicle cannot negotiate even in the “L”
(low speed position, center differential unlocked) mode. Also,
using this mode when driving down steep off–road inclines will
help contribute to increased vehicle stability.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The indicator light tells when the differential lock is engaged.
Note that the differential is not still locked as long as the
indicator light remains off.
If the indicator light does not go off when you push out the
center differential lock switch, drive straight ahead while
accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
When the operation is not completed, the indicator blinks. If the
indicator light does not go off when you push out the center
differential lock switch, drive straight ahead while accelerating
or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
See “(b) Shifting procedure” for further instructions.
The center differential lock system operation is not completed
within 5 seconds while the cruise control system is set, cancel
the cruise control system. To cancel the cruise control system,
see “Cruise control” on page 419.
(b) Shifting procedure
To shift between unlock and lock modes in “H”, push the
center differential lock switch.
To shift between unlock and lock modes in “L”, push the
center differential lock switch.
To shift between “H” and “L”, stop the vehicle, put the
transmission into “N” and move the four–wheel drive control
lever.
CAUTION
Never move the four–wheel drive control lever if wheels
are slipping. Stop the slipping or spinning before
shifting.
413
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE
For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads,
unlock the center differential. To prevent damage to the
center differential lock system, do not push the center
differential lock switch when the vehicle is cornering or
when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground. If the
indicator light does not go off when unlocking the
center differential, drive straight ahead while
accelerating or decelerating, or drive in reverse.
414
STARTING AND DRIVING
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
The rear view monitor system assists the driver by
displaying an image of the rear of the vehicle while
backing up. The displayed image on the screen is a
horizontally reversed mirror image of the inside rear view
mirror.
To display the rear view image on the screen, place the
selector lever in the “R” position when the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position.
If you move the selector lever out of the “R” position, the screen
returns to the previous screen. Operating another function of
the navigation system will display another screen.
The rear view monitor system is a supplemental device
intended to assist back up. When backing up, be sure to check
behind and all around the vehicle visually.
CAUTION
Never depend on the rear view monitor system
entirely when backing up. Always make sure your
intended path is clear.
Use caution just as you would when backing up any
vehicle.
Never back up while looking only at the screen. The
image on the screen is different from actual
conditions. Depicted distances between objects and
flat surfaces will differ from actual distances. If you
back up while looking only at the screen, you may hit
a vehicle, a person or an object. When backing up, be
sure to check behind and all around the vehicle
visually and with mirrors before proceeding.
Do not use the system when the back door is not
completely closed.
If the back of the vehicle is hit, the position and
mounting angle of the camera may change. Be sure
to have the camera’s position and mounting angle
checked at your Lexus dealer.
If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot
water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the
system may not operate normally.
415
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the camera lens becomes dirty, it cannot transmit
a clear image. If water droplets, snow, or mud adhere
to the lens, rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth.
If the lens is extremely dirty, wash it with a mild
cleanser and rinse.
The displayed image may become darker and moving
images may be slightly distorted when the system is
cold. When backing up, be sure to check behind and
all around the vehicle visually and with mirror before
proceeding.
416
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN
Image is displayed approximately level on screen.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects
which are close to either corner of the bumper or under
the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.
The area displayed on the screen may vary according
to vehicle orientation or road conditions.
31PY046
If the above screen appears on the display, the back door is
open. When backing up the vehicle, make sure the back door
is securely closed.
Corners of bumper
417
STARTING AND DRIVING
THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM CAMERA
Check surroundings for safety.
The rear view monitor system camera is located on the back
door as shown in the illustration. The camera uses a special
lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen
differs from the actual distance.
In the following cases, it may become difficult to see the images
on the screen, even when the system is functioning.
In the dark (for example, at night)
When the temperature near the lens is extremely high or low
When water droplets are adhering to the camera, or when
humidity is high (for example, when it rains)
When foreign matter (for example, snow or mud) adheres
to the camera lens
When the sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly
into the camera lens
418
If a bright light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle
body) is picked up by the camera, the smear effect* peculiar to
the camera may occur.
*: Smear effect — A phenomenon that occurs when a bright
light (for example, sunlight reflected off the vehicle body) is
picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the
light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below
it.
STARTING AND DRIVING
CRUISE CONTROL
Turning the system on
The cruise control allows you to cruise the vehicle at a
desired speed over about 40 km/h (25 mph) with your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
Your cruising speed can be maintained although a slight speed
change may occur when driving up or down a gradient, within
the limits of engine performance. On steeper hills, a greater
speed change will occur so it is better to drive without the cruise
control.
CAUTION
To help maintain maximum control of your vehicle,
do not use the cruise control when driving in heavy
or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or
snow–covered) or winding roads.
Avoid vehicle speed increases when driving
downhill. If the vehicle speed is too fast in relation to
the cruise control set speed, cancel the cruise
control then downshift the transmission to use
engine braking to slow down.
To operate the cruise control, push the “ON–OFF” button. This
turns the system on. The indicator light in the instrument
cluster shows that you can now set your desired cruising
speed. Another push on the switch will turn the system
completely off.
When the ignition key is turned off, the “ON–OFF” button is also
automatically turned off. To use the cruise control again, push
the “ON–OFF” button again to turn it on.
CAUTION
To avoid accidental cruise control engagement, keep
the “ON–OFF” button off when not using the cruise
control.
419
STARTING AND DRIVING
Setting operation
2
Cancelling the preset speed
You can cancel the preset speed by either of the following:
a. Pulling the control lever in the “CANCEL” direction.
b. Depressing the brake pedal.
c. Pushing the “ON–OFF” button.
If the vehicle speed falls below about 40 km/h (25 mph), the
preset speed will be automatically cancelled.
If the vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10 mph) below the preset
speed, the preset speed will also automatically be cancelled.
Each function is described below.
1
Setting at a desired speed.
The transmission must be in “D” or “4” before you set the cruise
control speed.
Bring the vehicle to the desired speed, press the control lever
downward in the “– SET” direction and release it. This sets the
vehicle at that speed. Now you may take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. If you need acceleration — for example,
when passing — depress the accelerator pedal enough for the
vehicle to exceed the set speed. When you release the
accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the speed set prior
to the acceleration.
420
If the preset speed automatically cancels out for other than
these reasons, have your vehicle checked by your Lexus
dealer at the earliest opportunity.
3
Resetting to a faster speed
Press the control lever upward in the “+ RES” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held upward, the vehicle will gradually gain
speed.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
increased 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever upward in the “+ RES” direction quickly.
However, a quicker way to reset is to accelerate the vehicle and
then press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction.
STARTING AND DRIVING
4
Resetting to a slower speed
Cruise control failure warning
Press the control lever downward in the “– SET” direction and
hold it. Release the lever when the desired speed is attained.
While the lever is held downward, the vehicle speed will
gradually decrease.
If the “CRUISE” indicator light in the instrument cluster flashes
when using the cruise control, push the ”ON–OFF” button to
turn the system off and then push it again to turn it on.
When the difference between the actual vehicle speed and the
set speed is less than 5 km/h (3 mph), the set speed can be
lowered 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time by pressing the control
lever downward in the “– SET” direction quickly.
The indicator light does not come on.
However, a quicker way to reset is to depress the brake pedal
and then press the control lever downward in the “– SET”
direction.
Even if you downshift the transmission from the “D” position to
“4” position with the cruise control on, engine braking will not
be applied because the cruise control is not cancelled. To
decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a slower speed with the
cruise control lever or depress the brake pedal. If you use the
brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.
5
If any of the following conditions then occurs, there is some
trouble in the cruise control system.
The indicator light flashes again.
The indicator light goes out after it comes on.
If this is the case, contact your Lexus dealer and have your
Lexus inspected.
Resuming the preset speed
If the preset speed is cancelled by pulling the control lever or
by depressing the brake pedal, pushing the lever up in the “+
RES” direction will restore the speed set prior to cancellation.
421
STARTING AND DRIVING
REAR HEIGHT CONTROL AIR
SUSPENSION
“HI” (high) mode: The vehicle height is about 40 mm (1.6 in.)
higher at the rear than the “N” mode height.
This mode is suitable when driving on the bumpy roads and
through water.
However, when the vehicle speed exceeds about 30 km/h (19
mph) or over in the “HI” mode, the “N” mode is automatically
selected.
CAUTION
The “HI” mode should be used for severe off–road
driving condition only. As the vehicle’s center of gravity
is higher in this setting, the vehicle may become
unstable when turning abruptly resulting in accident.
This rear height control air suspension controls the
vehicle height depending on the vehicle driving condition.
Select your desired height among the “HI” (high), “N”
(normal) and “LO” (low) modes with the height select
switch.
(a) Vehicle height modes
“N” (normal) mode: The vehicle height in this mode is
standard. Regardless of the number of occupants or the
luggage loading condition, the vehicle height is always
automatically adjusted to a fixed height in any mode while the
engine is running.
This mode is suitable for ordinary driving.
422
“LO” (low) mode: The vehicle height is about 20 mm (0.8 in.)
lower at the rear than the “N” mode height.
This mode allows you easy access to the vehicle (getting in and
out) and easy loading and unloading operation.
This mode is available when the vehicle speed is under about
12 km/h (7 mph).
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE
Use the “LO” mode when the vehicle is stopped.
Otherwise, when the vehicle speed exceeds about 12
km/h (7 mph), “N” mode is selected automatically. So
be careful when you drive in any place where the
overhead height is limited.
(b) Vehicle height mode changing condition
To change the vehicle height, it is necessary to meet the
following conditions.
The engine should be running.
When selecting a mode, there is a vehicle speed limit. Refer
to the following table.
Yes = The mode can be selected.
No = The mode cannot be selected.
The height control “OFF” indicator light should go off.
“LO”
“N”
“HI”
mode
mode
mode
Under about
12 km/h (7 mph)
Yes
Yes
Yes
Under about
30 km/h (19 mph)
No
Yes
Yes
About 30 km/h
(19 mph) or over
No
Yes
No
423
STARTING AND DRIVING
In the following cases, the rear height control suspension
will not operate.
The underbody of the vehicle has touched the surface on
bumpy roads.
The area around the rear suspension is coated with ice.
If the vehicle is moved to its usual location or the ice is removed
and the height select switch is pressed, the vehicle height
control cannot be operated. In this case, turn off and restart the
engine, then push the control switches.
(c) Vehicle height adjustment
The height control indicator light indicates which mode is
selected. (See “(e) Height control indicator light” described
below.)
Selecting the “HI” mode
Push the height select switch on the “” side when the vehicle
speed is under about 30 km/h (19 mph).
To change the “N” mode to “HI”: Push the switch once.
To change the “LO” mode to “HI”: Push the switch twice. It
takes about 30 seconds until the “LO” mode changes to the “HI”
mode.
Selecting the “N” mode
To change the “HI” mode to “N”: Push the height select
switch on the “” side once.
To change the “LO” mode to “N”: Push the height select
switch on the “” side once.
Selecting the “LO” mode
Push the height select switch on the “” side while the vehicle
is stopped.
To change the “N” mode to “LO”: Push the switch once.
1 Higher
2 Lower
To change the mode, push the height select switch on
either side of “” (higher) or “” (lower).
424
To change the “HI” mode to “LO”: Push the switch twice.
Even if the engine is stopped while the vehicle height is being
lowered, the operation continues for up to 25 seconds. If within
this 25 seconds, any of the side doors or the back door is
opened, operation will continue for a further 15 seconds.
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE
If the vehicle height is changed frequently when the
vehicle is heavily loaded, the compressor may
overheat causing the vehicle height adjustment
operation to stop.
Before you lower the vehicle height with the height
select switch, check under the vehicle to make sure
nothing to damage the vehicle or no one to be injured
is there and that the underbody of the vehicle does
not touch the ground.
After unloading, the height of a vehicle equipped with
the rear height control air suspension becomes
slightly higher than the normal vehicle height. Take
sufficient care where the overhead height is
restricted.
Do not select the “LO” mode in the bumpy roads. If
the underbody of the vehicle touches the rugged
road surface, the vehicle may be damaged.
425
STARTING AND DRIVING
(d) Turning off the rear height control air
suspension
CAUTION
If you drive through deep water over about 700 mm (28
in.) in depth, put the vehicle height in the “HI” mode with
the height select switch and then turn off the rear height
control air suspension by pushing the “HEIGHT
CONTROL OFF” switch.
To turn off the rear height control air suspension with the
vehicle stopped, push the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF”
switch. The height control “OFF” indicator light comes on
and the vehicle height is fixed in the same mode as the
height control switch is pushed.
This status is memorized in the system even after the engine
is stopped.
If you push the switch again, the height control “OFF” indicator
light goes out and the rear height control air suspension is
turned on.
Even after the rear height control air suspension is turned off
with the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch, if the vehicle speed
exceeds 30 km/h (19 mph), the rear height control air
suspension automatically selects the “N” mode.
426
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE
When jacking up or installing tire chains, be sure to
turn off the rear height control air suspension with
the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch and stop the
engine. Otherwise, the vehicle height may change
because of the automatic leveling function resulting
in accident.
If your vehicle must be towed, put the vehicle height
in the “N” mode and turn off the rear height control air
suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may
change because of the automatic leveling function
resulting in accident.
If your vehicle gets ditched, turn off the rear height
control air suspension with the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch. Otherwise, the vehicle height may
change because of the automatic leveling function
resulting in accident.
427
STARTING AND DRIVING
(e) Height control indicator lights
If the underbody of the vehicle has touched the surface on
bumpy roads or the area around the rear suspension is
coated with ice, the height control suspension will not
operate and the indicator lights change as follows:
1. The present mode indicator light goes off and the selected
mode indicator light blinks.
2. The selected mode indicator light goes off. (The vehicle
height does not change.) The present mode indicator light
comes on again.
1 Height control indicator lights
2 Height control “OFF” indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned on, all the indicator lights
come on. Only the indicator light showing the present mode
remains on and all other lights go off after a few seconds. This
means the system operates correctly.
When you change the vehicle height mode, the indicator lights
change as follows:
When changing the vehicle height from the “N” mode to
“HI”:
1. The “N” mode indicator light goes off and the “HI” mode
indicator light blinks.
2. After the vehicle height control reaches the “HI” mode, the
“HI” mode indicator light remains on.
428
Height control “OFF” indicator light: When the ignition
switch is turned on, this light comes on. If it goes out after a few
seconds, the rear height control air suspension operates
correctly. If you push the “HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch,
the rear height control air suspension is turned off. The height
control “OFF” indicator light comes on.
In the following cases, there is a problem somewhere in the
rear height control air suspension. Although there is no
problem to continue normal driving, have the rear height
control air suspension checked by your Lexus dealer as soon
as possible.
The height control “OFF” indicator light does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned on.
The height control “OFF” indicator light blinks.
STARTING AND DRIVING
(f) Parking and stopping tips
If you immediately stop the engine to park the vehicle after
off–road driving, the vehicle height is lowered slightly as the
vehicle becomes cool. When parking, make sure there is
nothing that will be in contact with the underbody of the vehicle.
When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous
height.
If you park the vehicle for a long time, the vehicle height may
be gradually lowered. When parking for a long time, make sure
there is nothing that will be in contact with the underbody of the
vehicle. When you start the engine, the vehicle returns to the
previous height.
ELECTRONIC MODULATED
SUSPENSION
This electronic modulated suspension adjusts the
damping effect on the shock absorbers with the control
switch. Select one of the 4 modes which is suited to the
driving conditions with the control switch to provide good
riding comfort and stability.
If you stop the engine, the vehicle height may change in
accordance with the change in the temperature. When you
start the engine, the vehicle returns to the previous height.
(g) Rear height control failure warning
If there is a problem somewhere in the rear height control air
suspension, the “N” mode is automatically selected. If this
occurs, the height control “OFF” indicator light blinks and the
vehicle height control cannot be activated until the malfunction
is corrected. If this is the case, bring your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible and have it checked.
For driving on a bumpy road
For ordinary driving such as in the city traffic
For moderate high speed driving
For sporty type driving such as on winding mountain
roads and high speed driving
5 Soft
6 Firm
1
2
3
4
429
STARTING AND DRIVING
We recommend you to select the mode 2 for ordinary
driving. The damping effect will be changed automatically to
provide good riding comfort.
ACTIVE TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM
When your vehicle is loaded heavily or you are driving in an
unpaved road, the mode 3 or 4 will be recommended. To
provide good vehicle stability, the damping effect will be harder
than for ordinary driving mode.
The active traction control system automatically helps
prevent the spinning of 4 wheels when the vehicle is
started or accelerated on slippery road surfaces.
With the four–wheel drive control lever at “L”, the damping
effect suitable for off–road driving will be provided in any mode.
When the ignition key is turned to “ON”, the system
automatically turns on.
CAUTION
Under certain slippery road conditions, full traction of
the vehicle and power to the 4 wheels cannot be
maintained, even though the traction control system is
in operation. Do not drive the vehicle under any speed
or maneuvering conditions which may cause the
vehicle to lose traction control. In situations where the
road surface is covered with ice or snow, your vehicle
should be fitted with snow tires or tire chains. Always
drive at an appropriate and cautious speed for the
present road conditions.
430
STARTING AND DRIVING
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
The brake actuator temperature increase during continuous
operation of the following systems.
Active traction control system
Vehicle stability control system
Downhill assist control system
Slip indicator light
Leave the system on during the ordinary driving so that it
can operate when needed.
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the active traction control
system is in the self–check mode, but does not indicate a
malfunction.
When the active traction control system is operating, the
following conditions occur:
The system controls the spinning of the 4 wheels. At this
time, the slip indicator light blinks.
You may feel vibration or noise in your vehicle, caused by
operation of the brakes. This indicates the system is
functioning properly.
Hill–start assist control
If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any
of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound
intermittently to indicate that the active traction control system
can no longer operate. In this case, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place.
If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes
from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.) At the time, the slip indicator light
will come on and the active traction control system temporarily
stops operating in order to protect the brake actuator.
(Although the active traction control system does not operate,
there is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will
be automatically restored after a short time and the slip
indicator light goes out.
431
STARTING AND DRIVING
“VSC TRAC” warning light
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light.
It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip indicator light comes
on while driving, the active traction control system does not
work. However, as normal braking operates when being
applied, there is no problem to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
This light warns that there is a problem somewhere in the
following.
Active traction control system
Vehicle stability control system
Downhill assist control system
Hill–start assist control
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to
“ON”, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few
seconds. It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay
on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position.
432
The warning light comes on while driving.
STARTING AND DRIVING
VEHICLE STABILITY CONTROL
SYSTEM
The vehicle stability control system helps provide
integrated control of the systems such as anti–lock brake
system, traction control, engine control, etc. This system
automatically controls the output of the brakes or engine
to help prevent the vehicle from skidding when cornering
on a slippery road surface or operating steering wheel
abruptly.
Only use tires of specified size.
The size,
manufacturer, brand and tread pattern for all 4 tires
should be the same. If you use the tires other than
specified, or different type or size, the vehicle
stability control system may not function correctly.
When replacing the tires or wheels, contact your
Lexus dealer.
In situations where the road surface is covered with
ice or snow, your vehicle should be fitted with snow
tires or tire chains.
This system activates when the vehicle speed about more than
15 km/h (9mph).
You may hear a sound in the engine compartment for a few
seconds when the engine is started or just after the vehicle
begins to move. This means that the system is in the
self–check mode, but does not indicate a malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on the vehicle stability
control system. Even if the vehicle stability control
system is operating, you must always drive carefully
and attentively to avoid serious injury. Reckless
driving will result in an unexpected accident. If the
slip indicator light blinks and an alarm sounds,
special care should be taken while driving.
Slip indicator light
If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, the slip indicator
light blinks and an alarm sounds intermittently. Special care
should be taken while driving.
433
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the brake pedal is depressed while the vehicle stability
control system is active, the brake pedal will become hard at
an earlier position than usual. However, the brakes will
respond to the pedal force if depressed further.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
Pushing the center differential lock switch automatically
turns the vehicle stability control system off. At this time,
the “VSC OFF” indicator comes on with the center
differential lock indicator light.
“VSC OFF” indicator light comes on for a few seconds when
the ignition key is turned to “ON”. It will come on again when
you push the center differential lock switch to turn off the
system.
434
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The indicator light does not come on when the ignition key
is turned “ON”.
The indicator light remains on after the ignition is turned on.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The indicator light comes on when the system is on while
driving.
NOTICE
Make sure that the center differential lock indicator light
goes off before normal driving.
“VSC TRAC” warning light
Vehicle stability control system
Active traction control system
Downhill assist control system
Hill–start assist control
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to
“ON”, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few
seconds. It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay
on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light.
It is normal if they go out after a few seconds.
This light warns that when there is a problem somewhere in the
following.
If the light comes on while driving, the vehicle stability control
system does not work. However, as normal braking operates
when being applied, there is no problem to continue your
driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
435
STARTING AND DRIVING
The warning light comes on while driving.
DOWNHILL ASSIST CONTROL
SYSTEM
The downhill assist control system is a system that
assists the deceleration of the engine brake when you
drive down a steep hill. When you are driving down a hill
with the four–wheel drive control lever in the “L” position,
push the “DAC” switch to limit the vehicle’s acceleration.
If the vehicle is traveling at a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or
less, you can descend at a constant speed.
Turning on the system
1. Shift the four–wheel drive control lever to the “L”
position.
The system will not operate if the four–wheel drive control lever
is in the “H” position.
2. In order to make full use of the engine brake, putting the
transmission in “L” or “2” is recommended.
The system will operate even if the transmission selector lever
is in “D”, “4”, “3” or “N”. However, when it is in “L” or “2” the
engine brake can also be utilized enabling the system to
operate more effectively.
CAUTION
Do not rely excessively on the downhill assist control
system. It may not be able to maintain a low speed over
road surfaces or off–road surfaces on which sliding can
easily occur, such as extremely steep slopes or icy or
muddy roads.
3. Push the “DAC” switch to turn the system on. The
downhill assist control system indicator light on the
instrument panel will come on.
436
STARTING AND DRIVING
If the downhill assist control system indicator light flashes, the
transmission selector lever may be in “N” or four–wheel drive
control lever may be in the “H” position.
If the indicator light does not come on when the switch is
pushed, contact your Lexus dealer.
If you push the “DAC” switch to turn the system off while it is
in operation, the system will stop operating gradually. The
downhill assist control system indicator light will flash to alert
the driver. To continue driving at a low speed, push the “DAC”
switch to turn the system on.
The slip indicator light and downhill assist control system
indicator light come on for a few seconds when the ignition key
is turned to “ON”. If any of the indicator lights does not come
on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus dealer.
The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous
operation of the following systems.
Active traction control system
Vehicle stability control system
Downhill assist control system
Hill–start assist control
Slip indicator light
With the vehicle traveling at a speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or
less, release your foot from the accelerator or brake pedal to
activate the system. The vehicle will descend the hill at a low
speed. While the system is operating, the slip indicator light on
the instrument panel will flash and the stop lights and high
mounted stoplight will be lit.
If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any
of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound
intermittently to indicate that the downhill assist control system
can no longer operate. In this case, stop your vehicle
immediately at a safe place.
If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes
from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.) At this time, the slip indicator light
will come on and the downhill assist control system stops
operating temporarily in order to protect the brake actuator.
(Although the downhill assist control system does not operate,
it is no problem to continue your driving.) The system will be
automatically restored after a short time and the slip indicator
light goes out.
437
STARTING AND DRIVING
“VSC TRAC” warning light
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes on, there may be an
abnormality in any of the following systems in addition to the
downhill assist control system.
Hill–start assist control
Active traction control system
Vehicle stability control system
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to
“ON”, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few
seconds. It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay
on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position.
If there is any abnormality in the system, the “VSC TRAC”
warning light will come on. When the “DAC” switch is
pushed, the downhill assist control system indicator light
also flash.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light.
It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip indicator light comes
on while driving, the system does not work. However, as
normal braking operates when being applied, it is no problem
to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
The warning light comes on while driving.
438
STARTING AND DRIVING
HILL–START ASSIST CONTROL
The hill–start assist control will operate for 5 seconds
maximally when all of the following conditions apply.
The hill–start assist control assists you in starting to move
up a steep or slippery hill. When you start to move up the
hill slope, the system helps to prevent the vehicle from
rolling backward in the interval while you move your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal.
When the transmission is in any of positions “D”, “4”,
“3”, “2” or “L”
CAUTION
When the brake pedal is not depressed
The system is designed to operate when the vehicle is starting
on an uphill slope; therefore, if the transmission is in “P” or “N”
it will not operate. It will not operate either if the vehicle starts
to move in reverse on a slope with the transmission in the “R”.
Do not rely excessively on the hill–start assist
control. The vehicle may not be able to start
smoothly on road surfaces or off–road surfaces such
as extremely steep slopes or icy roads, on which
sliding can occur very easily.
Do not use the hill–start assist control to stop the
vehicle. The hill–start assist control is not designed
as a function for stopping the vehicle on a uphill
slope.
Slip indicator light
When the hill–start assist control is operating, the slip indicator
light flashes and an alarm sounds intermittently. At the same
time, the stop lamps and high mounted stoplight are lit.
The slip indicator light comes on for a few seconds when the
ignition key is turned to “ON”. If the indicator light does not
come on when the ignition is turned on, contact your Lexus
dealer.
439
STARTING AND DRIVING
Keep in mind the following when driving.
The hill–start assist control operates for 5 seconds
maximally. If both the brake and accelerator pedals remain
undepressed for longer than 5 seconds, the buzzer will
sound at more frequent intervals and the system will
gradually stop operating.
The hill–start assist control is not designed as a function for
stopping the vehicle on a uphill slope. When stopping the
vehicle, be sure to depress the brake pedal.
The brake actuator temperature increases during continuous
operation of the following systems.
Active traction control system
Vehicle stability control system
Downhill assist control system
Hill–start assist control
If the brake actuator temperature becomes too high while any
of the systems is operating, a buzzer will start to sound
intermittently to indicate that the hill–start assist control can no
longer operate. In this case, stop your vehicle immediately at
a safe place.
440
If the system continues to operate, the buzzer sound changes
from intermittent to continuous. (The continuous buzzer
sounds for about 3 seconds.) At this time, the slip indicator light
will come on and the hill–start assist control stops operating
temporarily in order to protect the brake actuator. (Although
the hill–start assist control does not operate, it is no problem
to continue your driving.) The system will be automatically
restored after a short time and the slip indicator light goes out.
STARTING AND DRIVING
“VSC TRAC” warning light
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the light.
It is normal if it goes out after a few seconds.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light and slip indicator light comes
on while driving, the system does not work. However, as
normal braking operates when being applied, it is no problem
to continue your driving.
In the following cases, contact your Lexus dealer:
The warning light does not come on after the ignition key is
turned to “ON”.
The warning light remains on after the ignition key is turned
to “ON”.
If there is any abnormality in the system, the “VSC TRAC”
warning light will come on.
The warning light comes on while driving.
If the system malfunctions, the “VSC TRAC” warning light will
come on.
If the “VSC TRAC” warning light comes on, there may be an
abnormality in any of the following systems in addition to the
hill–start assist control.
Downhill assist control system
Active traction control system
Vehicle stability control system
When the system is normal and the ignition key is turned to
“ON”, the warning light will come on and will go off after a few
seconds. It is not a malfunction that the warning light may stay
on for 60 seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position.
441
STARTING AND DRIVING
BRAKE SYSTEM
This brake system has 2 independent hydraulic circuits. If
either circuit should fail, the other will still work. However, the
pedal will be harder to press, and your stopping distance will
increase. Also, the brake system warning light may come on.
CAUTION
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake
system. Have your brakes fixed immediately.
Brake booster
The brake booster uses brake fluid pressurized by the pump
to power–assist the brakes. If the brake booster fails during
driving, the brake system warning light comes on and buzzer
sounds continuously. In this case, the brakes may not work
properly. If they do not work well, depress the brake pedal
firmly. If the brake system warning light comes on, immediately
stop your vehicle and contact your Lexus dealer.
The brake system warning light may stay on for about 60
seconds after the ignition key is turned to the “ON” position. It
is normal if the light turns off after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the brake
system warning light and buzzer. It is normal if the light goes
out and the buzzer stops sounding after a few seconds.
442
You may hear a small sound in the engine compartment after
the engine is started or the brake pedal is depressed
repeatedly. This is a pump pulsating sound of the brake
system, and it is not a malfunction.
CAUTION
Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the pedal uses up your brake fluid
pressure reserve.
Even if the power assist is completely lost, the brakes
will still work. But you will have to push the pedal
hard, much harder than normal. And your braking
distance will increase.
Anti–lock brake system
The anti–lock brake system is designed to automatically
help prevent lock–up of the wheels during a sudden brake
or braking on slippery road surfaces. This assists in
providing directional stability and steering performance
of the vehicle under these circumstances.
Effective way to press the ABS brake pedal: When the
anti–lock brake system function is in action, you may feel the
brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise. In this situation, to
let the anti–lock brake system work for you, just hold the
brake pedal down more firmly. Do not pump the brake in a
panic stop. This will result in reduced braking performance.
STARTING AND DRIVING
The anti–lock brake system becomes operative after the
vehicle has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately
10 km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle
decelerates to a speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
Depressing the brake pedal on slippery road surfaces such as
on a manhole cover, a steel plate at a construction site, joints
in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day tends to activate the anti–lock
brake system.
You may hear a click or motor sound in the engine
compartment for a few seconds when the engine is started or
just after the vehicle begins to move. This means that the
anti–lock brake system is in the self–check mode, and does not
indicate a malfunction.
When the anti–lock brake system is activated, the
following conditions may occur. They do not indicate a
malfunction of the system:
You may hear the anti–lock brake system operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsating and the vibrations of the vehicle
body and steering wheel. You may also hear the motor
sound in the engine compartment even after the vehicle is
stopped.
At the end of the anti–lock brake system activation, the
brake pedal may move a little to the forward.
CAUTION
Do not overestimate the anti–lock brake system:
Although the anti–lock brake system assists in
providing vehicle control, it is still important to drive
with all due care and maintain a moderate speed and
safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, because
there are limits to the vehicle stability and effectiveness
of steering wheel operation even with the anti–lock
brake system on.
If tire grip performance exceeds its capability, or if
hydroplaning occurs during high speed driving in the
rain, the anti–lock brake system does not provide
vehicle control.
Anti–lock brake system is not designed to shorten the
stopping distance: Always drive at a moderate speed
and maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of
you. Compared with vehicles without an anti–lock
brake system, your vehicle may require a longer
stopping distance in the following cases:
Driving on rough, gravel or snow–covered roads.
Driving with tire chains installed.
443
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving over the steps such as the joints on the road.
“ABS” warning light
Driving on roads where the road surface is pitted or
has other differences in surface height.
Install all 4 tires of specified size at appropriate
pressure: The anti–lock brake system detects vehicle
speeds using the speed sensors for respective wheels’
turning speeds. The use of tires other than specified
may fail to detect the accurate turning speed resulting
in a longer stopping distance.
1 U.S.A.
2 Canada
The light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. If the anti–lock brake system and the brake assist
system work properly, the light turns off after a few seconds.
Thereafter, if either of the systems malfunctions, the light
comes on again.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system, the brake
assist system, the active traction control system and the
vehicle stability control system do/does not operate, but the
brake system still operates conventionally.
When the “ABS” warning light is on (and the brake system
warning light is off), the anti–lock brake system does not
operate so that the wheels could lock up during a sudden
braking or braking on slippery road surfaces.
444
STARTING AND DRIVING
If either of the following conditions occurs, this indicates
a malfunction somewhere in the components monitored
by the warning light system. Contact your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible to service the vehicle.
The light does not come on when the ignition key is turned
to the “ON” position, or remains on.
The light comes on while you are driving.
A warning light turning on briefly during operation does not
indicate a problem.
CAUTION
If the “ABS” warning light remains on together with the
brake system warning light, immediately stop your
vehicle at a safe place and contact your Lexus dealer.
In this case, not only the anti–lock brake system will fail
but also the vehicle will become extremely unstable
during braking.
Either of the following conditions may occur, but do not
indicate a malfunction:
The light may stay on for about 60 seconds after the ignition
key is turned to the “ON” position. It is normal if it turns off
after a while.
Depressing the brake pedal repeatedly may turn on the
light. It is normal if it turns off after a few seconds.
Brake assist system
When you slam the brakes on, the brake assist system
judges as an emergency stop and provides more powerful
braking for a driver who cannot hold down the brake pedal
firmly.
When you slam the brakes on, more powerful braking will be
applied. At this time, you may hear a sound in the engine
compartment and feel the vibrations of the brake pedal. This
does not indicate a malfunction.
The brake assist system becomes operative after the vehicle
has accelerated to a speed in excess of approximately 10 km/h
(6 mph). It stops operating when the vehicle decelerates to a
speed below approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).
The brake assist system may not work for about 60 seconds
after the engine is started.
For an explanation of this system’s warning light, see “ABS
warning light” on page 67.
Drum–in–disc type parking brake system
Your vehicle has a drum–in–disc type parking brake system.
This type of brake system needs bedding–down of the brake
shoes periodically or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drums are replaced.
Have your Lexus dealer perform the bedding–down.
445
STARTING AND DRIVING
TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
SYSTEM
The tire pressure warning system is designed to provide
warning when tire inflation pressure of one or more of
your tires (including the spare tire) is low. The low tire
pressure warning light comes on to inform you that low
tire inflation pressure may hamper driving.
If the low tire pressure warning light comes on or blinks,
do the following.
If the warning light comes on:
Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible and
check that the inflation pressure of all tires (including the
spare tire) is as specified on the tire and loading
information label. (See “Checking tire inflation pressure”
on page 574.) If the warning light comes on even after tire
inflation pressure adjustment, you may have a flat tire. If
you have a flat tire, replace it with the spare tire. For
details, see “If you have a flat tire” on page 497.
The warning light goes off a few minutes after air is put into the
deflated tire.
This warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as
natural air leaks or tire pressure changes caused by
temperature. In this case, adjusting the tire pressure will turn
off the warning light.
Low tire pressure warning light
This light comes on when the ignition key is turned to the “ON”
position. It goes off after a few seconds. This indicates that the
tire pressure warning system is functioning properly.
446
STARTING AND DRIVING
CAUTION
When the low tire pressure warning light comes on,
observe the following instructions:
Depending on the conditions, reduce
appropriate speed as soon as possible.
to
an
Adjust the tire pressure to the specified level as soon
as possible.
Avoid abrupt steering wheel maneuvering and
braking. Tire deterioration may reduce steering
wheel control and brake effectiveness. This may lead
to serious injury or death.
The tire pressure warning system may not activate
immediately if sudden bursts of air leakage occur.
447
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE
Do not use liquid sealants for a flat tire as air pressure
sensors will be damaged.
When the tires must be repaired or replaced, have
them repaired or replaced by the nearest Lexus
dealer or authorized tire dealer. The tire pressure
sensors will be affected by the installation or removal
of tires.
The tire pressure warning system is not to be used as
a substitute for regular inspections. Be sure to check
the air pressure in the tires on a regular basis.
When the tires must be replaced, replace the
grommets for air pressure sensors as well.
If the warning light blinks:
System malfunction
The tire pressure warning system may be malfunctioning.
Contact your Lexus dealer.
The tire pressure warning system does not function
properly under certain circumstances. In the following
cases, the low tire pressure warning light may not come
on even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or it may come
on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
Electric devices or facilities using similar radio wave
frequencies are nearby.
A radio set to similar frequencies is in use.
A lot of snow or ice covers the vehicle, in particular, around
the wheels or wheel housings.
The tires are not equipped with an air pressure sensor.
Tire chains are used.
448
STARTING AND DRIVING
Non–genuine Lexus wheels are used.
Although the tires are equipped with air pressure sensors,
the selector switch (see page 455.) is set to other tire setting.
CAUTION
The use of non–genuine wheels will cause the air
pressure sensors to transmit the electronic code in
different manner, resulting in the system failure.
The use of different type of tires with genuine wheels
may also cause the malfunction of the system.
449
STARTING AND DRIVING
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
CAUTION
When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light
is lit, one or more of your tires is significantly
under–inflated. You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehicle’s tire information
placard. Driving on a significantly under–inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under–inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should
be checked monthly when cold and set to the
recommended inflation pressure as specified in the
vehicle placard and owner’s manual.
450
STARTING AND DRIVING
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
451
STARTING AND DRIVING
NOTICE:
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different
from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician
for help.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
452
STARTING AND DRIVING
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference
that may cause undesired operation of the device.
453
STARTING AND DRIVING
Replacing tires and wheels
When replacing the wheels, be sure to install air pressure
sensors on the wheels.
There are 3 ways to set up the air pressure sensors:
(a) Remove the sensor from the old wheel and install it to the
new wheel.
(b) Keep the same wheel with air pressure sensor and replace
only the tire.
(c) Use a new wheel and sensor.
You have to register an ID code for a new sensor. Up to 2 sets
of codes can be registered. As one ID for the originally installed
sensor is registered at “MAIN” of the selector switch, use the
“2nd” position to register an ID for the new sensor.
You do not need to re–register the ID code for any other
replacements. For the use of the originally installed tires, put
the selector switch at “MAIN” and for the use of tires set
purchased later, put the switch at “2nd”. For the sensor
selector switch, see page 455.
454
CAUTION
Have the tires, wheels or sensors replaced and ID
codes registered by a Lexus dealer. If you need
sensors, purchase from a Lexus dealer.
The use of non–genuine wheels will cause the air
pressure sensors to transmit the electronic code in
different manner, resulting in the failure of the
system.
STARTING AND DRIVING
2 sets of ID codes can be registered. The code of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle is registered on the switch at
“MAIN”. Have a new tires set with new air pressure sensors
registered at “2nd” by Lexus dealer.
Selector switch
ID codes should be registered by Lexus dealer. Once
registered, change the setting position each time you purchase
tires and wheels. Re–registration is not required.
When purchasing new tires, consult your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
1 Main position
2 2nd position
The selector switch is located in the lower part of the
driver’s side instrument panel.
When the tires whose ID code is registered at “MAIN”
are used, the system does not work properly with the
selector switch set at “2nd”. If the tires whose ID code
is registered at “2nd” are stored nearby, the system will
detect their tire pressure (and vice versa).
The ID code is given in the sensor. To activate the air
pressure warning system, it is necessary to register the ID
code of the sensor on the selector switch in the vehicle.
455
STARTING AND DRIVING
BRAKE PAD WEAR LIMIT
INDICATORS
The brake pad wear limit indicators on your disc brakes
give a warning noise when the brake pads are worn to the
extent that replacement is required.
If you hear a squealing or scraping noise while driving, have the
brake pads checked and replaced by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible. Expensive rotor damage can result if the
pads are not replaced when needed.
456
STARTING AND DRIVING
LIMITED–SLIP DIFFERENTIAL
Your Lexus is equipped with a limited–slip center differential
(transfer).
If one wheel — either front or rear — begins to spin, the transfer
(limited–slip center differential) is designed to aid traction by
automatically transmitting driving force to the wheels on the
other drive axle. It transmits driving force to the front wheels
if a rear wheel spins, and to the rear wheels if a front wheel
spins.
CAUTION
Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is
supported by a jack. The vehicle could be driven off the
jack and could pose a danger or result in serious injury.
NOTICE
Use only a spare tire of the same size, construction and
load capacity as the original tires on your Lexus
because damage to the limited–slip differential could
possibly occur with another tire type.
457
SECTION
3–2
STARTING AND DRIVING
Driving tips
Off–road vehicle precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Break–in period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation in foreign countries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tips for driving in various conditionss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Off–road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Winter driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dinghy towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cargo and luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
458
459
460
461
461
464
467
469
470
482
483
485
DRIVING TIPS
OFF–ROAD VEHICLE
PRECAUTIONS
CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize
the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is
moving.
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all
possible. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly
may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover
causing death or serious injury.
This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has
higher ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to
the height of its center of gravity to make it capable of
performing in a wide variety of off–road applications.
Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of
gravity than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design
feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to
rollover. And, utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. An advantage
of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the road
allowing you to anticipate problems. It is not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as ordinary passenger cars
any more than low–slung sports cars designed to perform
satisfactorily under off–road conditions. Therefore, sharp
turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.
Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier will make
the center of the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high
speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns, sudden braking
or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss
of control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate
this vehicle correctly.
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of
its profile and higher center of gravity, your vehicle is
more sensitive to side winds than an ordinary
passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have
better control.
459
DRIVING TIPS
When driving off–road or in rugged terrain, do not
drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s
suspension and chassis.
Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes.
Driving straight up or straight down is preferred.
Your vehicle (or any similar off–road vehicle) can tip
over sideways much more easily than forward or
backward.
BREAK–IN PERIOD
Drive gently and avoid high speeds.
You need not follow a break–in schedule with your new Lexus.
But following a few simple tips for the first 1600 km (1000 miles)
can add to the future economy and long life of your vehicle:
Avoid full throttle acceleration when starting and driving.
Avoid racing the engine.
Try to avoid hard stops during the first 300 km (200 miles).
Do not drive for a long time at any single speed, either fast
or slow.
Do not tow a trailer during the first 800 km (500 miles).
460
DRIVING TIPS
OPERATION IN FOREIGN
COUNTRIES
If you plan to drive your Lexus in another country...
First, comply with the vehicle registration laws.
Second, confirm the availability of the correct fuel (unleaded
and minimum octane rating).
TIPS FOR DRIVING IN VARIOUS
CONDITIONS
Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. This will allow you
much better control.
Drive slowly onto curbs and, if possible, at a right angle.
Avoid driving onto high, sharp–edged objects and other
road hazards. Failure to do so can lead to severe tire
damage such as a tire burst.
Drive slowly when passing over bumps or travelling on a
bumpy road. Otherwise, the impact could cause severe
damage to the tires and/or wheels.
When parking on a hill, turn the front wheels until they touch
the curb so that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the parking
brake, and place the transmission in “P”. If necessary, block
the wheels.
Washing your vehicle or driving through deep water may get
the brakes wet. To see whether they are wet, check that
there is no traffic near you and then press the pedal lightly.
If you do not feel a normal braking force, the brakes are
probably wet. To dry them, drive the vehicle cautiously while
lightly pressing the brake pedal with the parking brake
applied. If they still do not work safely, pull to the side of the
road and call a Lexus dealer for assistance.
461
DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION
Before driving off, make sure the parking brake is
fully released and that the parking brake reminder
light is off.
Do not leave your vehicle unattended while the
engine is running.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving.
It can cause dangerous overheating, needless wear,
and poor fuel economy.
To drive down a long or steep hill, reduce your speed
and downshift. Remember, if you ride the brakes
excessively, they may overheat and not work
properly. See page 406.
Be
careful
when
accelerating,
upshifting,
downshifting or braking on a slippery surface. The
abrupt change in engine speed, such as sudden
acceleration or engine braking, could cause the
vehicle to skid or spin.
Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the
legal speed limit permits it, do not drive over 140 km/h
(85 mph) unless your vehicle has high–speed
capability tires. Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may
result in tire failure, loss of control and possible
injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine
whether the tires on your vehicle are high–speed
capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.
462
DRIVING TIPS
Do not continue normal driving when the brakes are
wet. If they are wet, your vehicle will require a longer
stopping distance, and it may pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Also, the parking brake will
not hold the vehicle securely.
If you drive through deep water over about 500 mm
(20 in.) in depth, put the vehicle height in the HI (High)
mode with the active height select switch and then
turn off the active height control suspension by
pushing the height control switch. Drive your vehicle
at 30 km/h (19 mph) or lower speed.
463
DRIVING TIPS
OFF–ROAD DRIVING
PRECAUTIONS
When driving your vehicle off–road, please observe the
following precautions to ensure your driving enjoyment and to
help prevent the closure of areas to off–road vehicles.
a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where off–road vehicles are
permitted to travel.
b. Respect private property. Get owner’s permission before
entering private property.
c. Do not enter areas that are closed. Honor gates, barriers
and signs that restrict travel.
d. Stay on established roads. When conditions are wet,
driving techniques should be changed or travel delayed to
prevent damage to roads.
For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and Puerto Rico:
To obtain additional information pertaining to driving your
vehicle off–road, consult the following organizations.
State and Local Parks and Recreation Departments
State Motor Vehicle Bureau
Recreational Vehicle Clubs
U.S. Forest Service and Bureau of Land Management
464
CAUTION
Always observe the following precautions to minimize
the risk of serious personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take
unnecessary risks by driving in dangerous places.
Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving
off–road. A bad bump could jerk the wheel and injure
your hands. Keep both hands and especially your
thumbs on the outside of the rim.
Always check your brakes for effectiveness
immediately after driving in sand, mud, water or
snow.
After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand,
rivers, etc., check that there is no grass, bush, paper,
rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped on the
underbody. Clear off any such matter from the
underbody. If the vehicle is used with these materials
trapped or adhering to the underbody, a breakdown
or fire could occur.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is
significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers
should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is
moving.
DRIVING TIPS
When driving off–road or in rugged terrain, do not
drive at excessive speeds, jump, make sharp turns,
strike objects, etc. This may cause loss of control or
vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You
are also risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s
suspension and chassis.
465
DRIVING TIPS
NOTICE
If driving through water, such as when crossing
shallow streams, first check the depth of the water
and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive
slowly and avoid deep water.
Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that
water damage to the engine or other components
does not occur.
Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe
engine damage.
Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings,
causing rusting and premature failure, and may also
enter the differentials, transmission and transfer
case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.
Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums
and around brake discs may affect braking efficiency
and may damage brake system components.
Always perform a maintenance inspection after each
day of off–road driving that has taken you through
rough terrain, sand, mud, or water. For scheduled
maintenance information, refer to the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.
466
DRIVING TIPS
WINTER DRIVING TIPS
Make sure your coolant is properly protected against
freezing.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine,
non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid
organic acid technology. (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
See “Checking the engine coolant level” on page 560 for
details of coolant type selection.
For the U.S.A. — “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture
of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant
provides protection down to about –35C (–31F).
For Canada — “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture
of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant
provides protection down to about –42C (–44F).
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
467
DRIVING TIPS
Check the condition of the battery and cables.
Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of any battery, so it
must be in top shape to provide enough power for winter
starting. Page 608 tells you how to visually inspect the battery.
Your Lexus dealer and most service stations will be pleased to
check the battery charge level.
Make sure the engine oil viscosity is suitable for the cold
weather.
See page 559 for recommended viscosity. Leaving a heavy
summer oil in your vehicle during winter months may cause
harder starting. If you are not sure about which oil to use, call
your Lexus dealer — they will be pleased to help.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
468
Check the electronic ignition
connections or obvious damage.
system
for
loose
Keep the door locks from freezing.
Squirt lock de–icer or glycerine into the locks to keep them from
freezing.
Use a washer fluid containing an antifreeze solution.
This product is available at your Lexus dealer and most auto
parts stores. Follow the manufacturer’s directions for how
much to mix with water.
DRIVING TIPS
Do not use your parking brake when there is a possibility
it could freeze.
DINGHY TOWING
When parking, put the transmission into “P” and block the front
wheels. Do not use the parking brake, or snow or water
accumulated in and around the parking brake mechanism may
freeze the parking brake, making it hard to release.
Keep ice and snow from accumulating under the fenders.
Ice and snow built up under your fenders can make steering
difficult. During bad winter driving, stop and check under the
fenders occasionally.
Depending on where you are driving, we recommend you
carry some emergency equipment.
Some of the things you might put in the vehicle are tire chains,
window scraper, bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,
jumper cables, etc.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with four
wheels on the ground) behind a motorhome.
NOTICE
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
This may cause serious damage to your vehicle.
469
DRIVING TIPS
TRAILER TOWING
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger–and–load
carrying vehicle. Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on
handling, performance, braking, durability and driving
economy (fuel consumption, etc.). Your safety and satisfaction
depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cautious
driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, you
must not overload your vehicle or trailer. Lexus warranties do
not apply to damage or malfunction caused by towing a trailer
for commercial purposes. Ask your local Lexus dealer for
further details before towing.
Weight limits
Before towing, make sure the total trailer weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and trailer tongue load
are all within the limits.
The total trailer weight and tongue load can be measured with
platform scales found at a highway weighing station, building
supply company, trucking company, junk yard, etc.
CAUTION
When disconnecting a trailer, put the vehicle height in
the “LO” (low) mode and push the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch to turn off the rear height control air
suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may be
changed in the automatic leveling function, resulting in
accident. For details see “Rear height control air
suspension” on page 422.
470
Certification label
DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION
The maximum gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus
cargo weight) must never exceed 2948 kg (6500 lb.)
for vehicle with equipped.
Weight distributing hitch receiver
If towing a trailer and cargo weighing over 907 kg
(2000 lb.), Lexus recommends to use a sway control
device with sufficient capacity. The combination of
the gross trailer weight added to the total weight of
the vehicle, occupants and vehicle cargo must never
exceed a total of 5443 kg (12000 lb.).
Exceeding the maximum weight of the trailer, the
vehicle, or the vehicle and trailer combination, can
cause an accident resulting in serious personal
injuries.
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight
capacities established by the hitch manufacturer.
Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of
towing a higher weight, the operator must determine
the maximum weight rating of the particular hitch
assembly and never exceed the maximum weight
rating specified for the trailer hitch. Exceeding the
maximum weight rating set by the trailer hitch
manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in
serious personal injuries.
471
DRIVING TIPS
The gross vehicle weight must not exceed the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) indicated on the
Certification Label. The gross vehicle weight is the
sum weight of the unloaded vehicle, driver,
passengers, luggage, hitch and trailer tongue load.
It also includes the weight of any special equipment
installed on your vehicle.
The load on either the front or rear axle resulting from
distribution of the gross vehicle weight on both axles
must not exceed the front and rear Gross Axle Weight
Ratings (GAWR) listed on the Certification Label.
Total trailer weight
Tongue load
The trailer cargo load should be distributed so that
the tongue load is 10% of the total trailer weight, not
exceeding the maximum of 294 kg (650 lb.).
Tongue load
Total trailer weight
Never load the trailer with more weight in the back
than in the front. About 60% of the trailer load should
be in the front half of the trailer and the remaining 40%
in the rear.
472
100 = 10%
DRIVING TIPS
Hitches
If you wish to install a trailer hitch, you should consult with
your Lexus dealer.
Use only a hitch recommended by the hitch manufacture
and the one which conforms to the total trailer weight
requirement.
If you wish to install an aftermarket hitch, the hitch must be
bolted securely to the vehicle frame and installed according
to the hitch manufactures’ instructions.
The hitch ball and king pin should have a light coat of grease.
Lexus recommends the ball mount assembly be removed
when not towing to prevent injury and to prevent damage in
the event of a rear end collision. After removing the ball
mount assembly, install the grommet to the hitch to prevent
entry of dirt and mud.
473
DRIVING TIPS
NOTICE
Do not use axle–mounted hitches as they can cause
damage to the axle housing, wheel bearings, wheels or
tires. Also, never install a hitch which may interfere with
the normal function of an Energy Absorbing Bumper.
Trailer ball
Follow these easy steps to properly determine the correct
trailer ball for your application:
1. Determine the correct trailer ball size for the trailer coupler.
Most couplers are stamped with the required trailer ball size.
The sizes you’ll most likely find stamped on the coupler are:
Trailer Class
Typical Trailer Ball Size
III
2
in.
2
in.
II
I
1 7/8 in.
2. Select the appropriate trailer ball to match or exceed the
gross trailer weight rating of the trailer. The trailer ball load
rating should be printed on the top of the ball.
474
1 Trailer ball load rating
2 Ball diameter
3 Shank length
4 Shank diameter
DRIVING TIPS
3. When mounted in the ball mount, the threaded ball shank
must protrude beyond the bottom of the lock washer and nut
at least 2 threads. The trailer ball shank must be matched to
the ball mount hole diameter size.
NOTICE
Only use a ball mount attachment specified for the
Lexus GX470.
475
DRIVING TIPS
Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler
height
No matter which class of tow hitch applies, for a safe trailer
hookup, the trailer ball setup on must be the proper height for
the coupler on the trailer.
32PY007
1 Coupler
476
2 Trailer ball
DRIVING TIPS
Brakes and safety chains
Service connector for towing brake controller
Lexus recommends trailers with brakes that conform to
any applicable federal and state/provincial regulations.
A safety chain must always be used between the towing
vehicle and the trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the
chain for turns. The chain should cross under the
trailer tongue to prevent the tongue from dropping to
the ground in case it becomes damaged or separated.
For correct safety chain procedures, consult your
Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
If the total trailer weight exceeds 453 kg (1000 lb.),
trailer brakes are required.
Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system as it
will lower its braking effectiveness.
Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain
securely attached to both the trailer and the vehicle.
If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch ball,
there is possible danger of the trailer wandering over
into another lane.
Your vehicle is equipped with a service connector for the
towing brake controller as shown. Link the connector to the
towing brake controller via the sub wire harness stored in the
glove box. The detailed explanation of the sub wire harness
circuit is packed together with the sub wire harness. Be sure
to position the towing brake controller where it does not prevent
the driver from operating the pedal. Lexus recommends that
the sub wire harness be stored in the glove box when it is not
in use.
477
DRIVING TIPS
Tires
Trailer lights
Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. Adjust
the tire inflation pressure to the recommended cold tire
inflation pressure indicated below.
Your vehicle is equipped with a wire harness stored in the rear
end underbody. Use either of them to connect and operate the
trailer lights. However, the trailer lights must comply with
federal, state/provincial and local regulations. See your local
recreational vehicle dealer or rental agency for the correct type
of wiring and relays for your trailer. Check for correct operation
of the turn signals and stop lights each time you hitch up. Direct
splicing may damage your vehicle’s electrical system and
cause a malfunction of your lights.
Tire inflation pressure: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
The trailer tires should be inflated to the pressure
recommended by the trailer manufacturer in respect to the
total trailer weight.
Break–in schedule
Lexus recommends that you do not tow a trailer with a new
vehicle or a vehicle with any new power train component
(engine, transmission, differential, wheel bearing, etc.) for the
first 800 km (500 miles) of driving.
Maintenance
If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent
maintenance due to the additional load.
For this
information, please refer to the scheduled maintenance
information in the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.
Retighten all fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after
approximately 1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.
478
DRIVING TIPS
Connecting a trailer
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:
1. Put the rear height control air suspension in the “LO” (low)
mode. Turn the ignition switch off or push the “HEIGHT
CONTROL OFF” switch to turn off the rear height control air
suspension.
2. Connect a trailer.
3. Turn the ignition switch on or push the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch to turn on the rear height control air suspension.
Select the “N” (normal) mode with the height select switch.
Disconnecting a trailer
Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:
1. Put the rear height control air suspension in the “LO” (low)
mode. (Make sure the vehicle height is in the “LO” (low) mode
by pushing the height select switch on the “” side.)
2. Turn the ignition switch off or push the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch to turn off the rear height control air suspension.
3. Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the
hitch by 100 mm (4 in.).
5. Wait for about 20 seconds until the rear vehicle height is
lowered by the automatic leveling function.
6. Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If not, raise the hitch
higher and repeat steps 2 through 5.
7. Move the vehicle forward in the “LO” (low) mode where the
hitch does not touch anything in the “N” (normal) mode.
8. Put the rear height control air suspension in the “N” (normal)
mode.
Pre–towing safety check
Check that your vehicle remains level when a loaded or
unloaded trailer is hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has an
abnormal nose–up or nose–down condition, and check for
improper tongue load, overload, worn suspension or other
possible causes.
Make sure the trailer cargo is securely loaded so that it
cannot shift.
Check that your rear view mirrors conform to any federal,
state/provincial or local regulations. If they do not, install
required rear view mirrors appropriate for towing purposes.
4. Turn the ignition switch on or push the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch to turn on the rear height control air suspension.
479
DRIVING TIPS
Trailer towing tips
Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
When towing a trailer, your vehicle will handle differently
than when not towing. The three main causes of
vehicle–trailer accidents are driver error, excessive speed
and improper trailer loading. Keep these in mind when
towing:
Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns. The trailer could hit
your vehicle in a tight turn. Slow down before making a turn
to avoid the need of sudden braking.
Before starting out, check the operation of the lights and all
vehicle–trailer connections. After driving a short distance,
stop and recheck the lights and connections. Practice
turning, stopping and backing with a trailer in an area away
from traffic until you learn the feel.
Backing with a trailer is difficult and requires practice. Grip
the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right
to move the trailer to the right. (This procedure is generally
opposite to that when backing without a trailer.) Also, just
turn the steering wheel a little at a time, avoiding sharp or
prolonged turning. Have someone guide you when backing
to reduce the risk of an accident.
Because stopping distance may be increased,
vehicle–to–vehicle distance should be increased when
towing a trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of speed, allow
at least one vehicle and trailer length between you and the
vehicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as you may skid,
resulting in jackknifing and loss of control. This is especially
true on wet or slippery surfaces.
480
Remember that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will
be closer than the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn.
Therefore, compensate for this by making a larger than
normal turning radius with your vehicle.
Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely affect handling
of your vehicle and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention to
the rear from time to time to prepare yourself for being
passed by large trucks or buses, which may cause your
vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying happens, firmly grip
the steering wheel and reduce speed immediately but
gradually. Never increase speed. If it is necessary to
reduce speed, brake slowly. Steer straight ahead. If you
make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes,
your vehicle and trailer will stabilize.
Be careful when passing other vehicles. Passing requires
considerable distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget
the length of your trailer and be sure you have plenty of room
before changing lanes.
In order to maintain efficient engine braking and electrical
charging performance, do not use overdrive. Transmission
must be “4” position.
DRIVING TIPS
Because of the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s
engine may overheat on hot days (at temperatures over
30C [85F]) when going up a long or steep grade with a
trailer. If the engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, immediately turn off the air conditioning (if in
use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
See “If your vehicle overheats” on page 496.
Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle and trailer
wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly. Put
the transmission in “P”. Avoid parking on a slope with a
trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only after performing
the following:
1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
2. Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle
and trailer wheels.
3. When the wheel blocks are in place, release your brakes
slowly until the blocks absorb the load.
4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.
When restarting out after parking on a slope:
1. With the transmission in “P” position, start the engine. Be
sure to keep the brake pedal depressed.
2. Shift into the “3”, “2”, “L” or “R” position.
3. Release the parking brake and brake pedal and slowly pull
or back away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your
brakes.
4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or the posted towing
speed limit, whichever is lower. Because instability
(swaying) of a towing vehicle–trailer combination
usually increases as the speed increases, exceeding
72 km/h (45 mph) may cause loss of control.
Slow down and downshift before descending steep
or long downhill grades. Do not make sudden
downshifts.
Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or too
frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat
and result in reduced braking efficiency.
481
DRIVING TIPS
HOW TO SAVE FUEL AND MAKE
YOUR VEHICLE LAST LONGER
Improving fuel economy is easy — just take it easy. It will help
make your vehicle last longer, too. Here are some specific tips
on how to save money on both fuel and repairs:
Keep your tires inflated at the correct pressure. Check
the pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month.
Underinflation causes tire wear and wastes fuel.
Do not carry unneeded weight in your vehicle. Excess
weight puts a heavier load on the engine, causing greater
fuel consumption.
Avoid lengthy warm–up idling. Once the engine is
running smoothly, begin driving — but gently. Remember,
however, that on cold winter days this may take a little
longer.
Always keep the automatic transmission selector lever
in the “D” position when engine braking is not required.
Driving with the overdrive off will reduce the fuel economy.
(For details, see “Automatic transmission” on page 403.)
Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Avoid jackrabbit starts.
Avoid long engine idling. If you have a long wait and you
are not in traffic, it is better to turn off the engine and start
again later.
482
Avoid engine over–revving. Use a gear position suitable
for the road on which you are traveling.
Avoid continuous speeding up and slowing down.
Stop–and–go driving wastes fuel.
Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking. Maintain a
steady pace. Try to time the traffic signals so you only need
to stop as little as possible or take advantage of through
streets to avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper distance from
other vehicles to avoid sudden braking. This will also
reduce wear on your brakes.
Avoid heavy traffic or traffic jams whenever possible.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal. This causes
premature wear, overheating and poor fuel economy.
Maintain a moderate speed on highways. The faster you
drive, the greater the fuel consumption. By reducing your
speed, you will cut down on fuel consumption.
Keep the front wheels in proper alignment. Avoid hitting
the curb and slow down on rough roads. Improper
alignment not only causes faster tire wear but also puts an
extra load on the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.
Keep the bottom of your vehicle free from mud, etc. This
not only lessens weight but also helps prevent corrosion.
DRIVING TIPS
Keep your vehicle tuned–up and in top shape. A dirty air
cleaner, improper valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil and
grease, brakes not adjusted, etc. all lower engine
performance and contribute to poor fuel economy. For
longer life of all parts and lower operating costs, keep all
maintenance work on schedule, and if you often drive under
severe conditions, see that your vehicle receives more
frequent maintenance.
(For scheduled maintenance
information, please refer to the “Owner’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.)
VEHICLE LOAD LIMITS
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating
capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity. Follow
the load limits shown below. Total load capacity and
seating capacity are also described on the tire and
loading information label. For location of the tire and
loading information label, see “Checking tire inflation
pressure” on page 574.
Total load capacity:
CAUTION
Never turn off the engine to coast down hills. Your
power steering and brake booster will not function
without the engine running. Also, the emission control
system operates properly only when the engine is
running.
With third seats
Without third seats
544 kg (1200 lb.)
454 kg (1000 lb.)
Total load capacity means combined weight of
occupants, cargo and luggage.
Tongue load is
included when trailer towing.
Seating capacity:
With third seats
Without third seats
Total 8 (Front 2, Rear 6)
Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)
483
DRIVING TIPS
Seating capacity means the maximum number of
occupants whose estimated weight is 68 kg (150 lb.)
per person. Depending on the weight of each person,
the seating capacity given may exceed the total load
capacity.
NOTICE
Even if the number of occupants are within the
seating capacity, do not exceed the total load
capacity.
Towing capacity:
2948 kg (6500 lb.)
Towing capacity means the maximum gross trailer
weight (trailer weight plus its cargo weight) that your
vehicle is able to tow.
Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending
on the size (weight) and the number of occupants.
For details, see “Capacity and distribution” that
follows.
CAUTION
Do not apply the load more than each load limit.
That may cause not only damage to the tires,
but also deterioration to the steering ability and
braking ability, which may cause an accident.
484
DRIVING TIPS
CARGO AND LUGGAGE
Stowage precautions
When stowing cargo and luggage in the vehicle,
observe the following:
Put cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment
when at all possible. Be sure all items are secured
in place.
Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the
weight as far forward as possible helps maintain
vehicle balance.
For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary
weight.
CAUTION
To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding
forward during braking, do not stack anything
in the luggage compartment higher than the
seatbacks. Keep cargo and luggage low, as
close to the floor as possible.
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
compartment.
It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats
with their seat belts properly fastened.
Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer
serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden
braking or a collision.
Do not place anything on the luggage cover
behind the rear seatback. Such items may
be thrown about and possibly injure people
in the vehicle during sudden braking or an
accident.
Do not drive with objects left on top of the
instrument panel. They may interfere with the
driver’s field of view. Or they may move
during sharp vehicle acceleration or turning,
and impair the driver’s control of the vehicle.
In an accident they may injure the vehicle
occupants.
485
DRIVING TIPS
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the
occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total weight
of occupants)
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the
“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 – 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
486
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
For details about trailer towing, see page 470.
DRIVING TIPS
Example on your vehicle
From this condition, if 3 more passengers with the
combined weight of 176 kg (388 lb.) get on, the
available cargo and luggage load will be reduced as
follows:
With third seats
378 kg – 176 kg = 202 kg.
(834 lb. – 388 lb. = 446 lb.)
Without third seats
288 kg – 176 kg = 112 kg.
(634 lb. – 388 lb. = 246 lb.)
1
2
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
In case that 2 people with the combined weight of
166 kg (366 lb.) are riding in your vehicle, the
available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity
will be as follows:
With third seats
Total load capacity: 544 kg (1200 lb.)
544 kg – 166 kg = 378 kg.
(1200 lb. – 366 lb. = 834 lb.)
As shown in the above example, if the number of
occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load
equaling the combined weight of occupants who got
on later must be reduced. In other words, if the
increase in the number of occupants causes the
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight
of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you have
to reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.
For details about total load capacity, see “Vehicle load
limits” on page 483.
Without third seats
Total load capacity: 454 kg (1000 lb.)
454 kg – 166 kg = 288 kg.
(1000 lb. – 366 lb. = 634 lb.)
487
DRIVING TIPS
CAUTION
Even if the total load of occupant’s weight and
the cargo load is less than the total load
capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. That
may cause not only damage to the tire but also
deterioration to the steering ability due to
unbalance of the vehicle, causing an accident.
1
2
Cargo capacity
Weight of removed third seats
Seating configuration variation
In case of removing the third seats, it is possible
to load as much cargo as the weight of the removed
seats.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) – (Total
weight of occupants) + (Weight of the removed third
seats)
Third seats weights:
Right side 13.7 kg (30.2 lb.)
Left side 14.7 kg (32.4 lb.)
488
DRIVING TIPS
489
SECTION
4
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
In case of an emergency
If your engine stalls while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle will not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot increase engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you have a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle becomes stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If your vehicle needs to be towed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If you lose your keys or lock yourself out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
490
491
491
496
496
497
515
517
524
525
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR ENGINE STALLS WHILE
DRIVING
If your engine stalls while driving...
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight line. Move
cautiously off the road to a safe place.
2. Turn on your emergency flashers.
3. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or “LOCK”, and try starting the
engine again.
If the engine will not start, see “If your vehicle will not start”.
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work, so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
IF YOUR VEHICLE WILL NOT
START
(a) Simple checks
Before making these checks, make sure you have followed the
correct starting procedure instructions in “How to start the
engine” on page 401 and that you have sufficient fuel. Since
your vehicle is equipped with the engine immobilizer system,
also check whether the other keys will start the engine. If they
work, your key may be broken. Have the key checked at your
Lexus dealer. If none of your keys work, there may be a
malfunction in the immobilizer system. Call your Lexus dealer.
See “Keys” on page 8.
If the engine is not turning over or is turning over too
slowly —
1. Check that the battery terminals are tight and clean.
2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch on the interior light.
3. If the light is out, dim or goes out when the starter is cranked,
the battery is discharged. You may try jump starting. See “(c)
Jump starting” for further instruction.
If the light is O.K., but the engine still will not start, it needs
adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside
Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See
“Foreword”.)
491
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Do not pull– or push–start the vehicle. It may damage
the vehicle or cause a collision when the engine starts.
Also the three–way catalytic converter may overheat
and become a fire hazard.
If the engine turns over at its normal speed but will not
start —
1. Turn the ignition key to “ACC” or “LOCK” and try starting the
engine again.
2. The engine may be flooded because of repeated cranking.
See “(b) Starting a flooded engine” for further instructions.
3. If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service
Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
(b) Starting a flooded engine
If the engine will not start, your engine may be flooded
because of repeated cranking.
If this happens, turn the ignition key to “START” with the
accelerator pedal fully depressed, and hold the key at this
position for about 30 seconds. Then the cranking hold function
stops cranking automatically, and you can try starting the
engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If the engine does not start, wait a few minutes and try again.
If the engine still will not start, it needs adjustment or repair.
Call a Lexus dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service
Assistance. (See “Foreword”.)
(c) Jump starting
To avoid serious personal injury and damage to your
vehicle which might result from battery explosion, acid
burns, electrical burns, or damaged electronic
components, these instructions must be followed
precisely.
492
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
If you are unsure about how to follow this procedure, we
strongly recommend that you seek help from your Lexus
dealer, Roadside Assistance or Customer Service Assistance.
(See “Foreword”.)
CAUTION
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which is poisonous
and corrosive. Wear protective safety glasses when
jump starting, and avoid spilling acid on your skin,
clothing, or vehicle.
If you should accidentally get acid on yourself or in
your eyes, remove any contaminated clothing and
flush the affected area with water immediately. Then
get immediate medical attention. If possible,
continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while
en route to the medical office.
The gas normally produced by a battery will explode
if a flame or spark is brought near. Use only
standardized jumper cables and do not smoke or
light a match while jump starting.
NOTICE
The battery used for boosting must be 12 V. Do not jump
start unless you are sure that the booster battery is
correct.
493
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
1. If the booster battery is installed in another vehicle, make
sure the vehicles are not touching. Turn off all unnecessary
lights and accessories.
When boosting, use the battery of matching or higher quality.
Any other battery may be difficult to jump start with.
If jump starting is difficult, charge the battery for several
minutes.
40PY054
2. If required, remove all the vent plugs from the booster
battery. Lay a cloth over the open vents on the booster battery.
(This helps reduce the explosion hazard, personal injuries and
burns.)
If the booster battery is an extended maintenance interval
battery, it is not necessary to remove the vent plugs.
3. If the engine in the vehicle with the booster battery is not
running, start it and let it run for about 5 minutes. During jump
starting, run the engine at about 2000 rpm with the accelerator
pedal lightly depressed.
4. Locate positive (+) and negative (–) terminals of each
battery. Connect the jumper cables in the exact order ( 1 2
3 4 ) shown in the illustration.
5 Discharged battery
6 Booster battery
494
1
Connect a positive (red) jumper cable clamp to the
positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
2
Connect the clamp at the other end of the positive (red)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the booster battery.
3
Connect a negative (black) cable clamp to the negative
(–) terminal of the booster battery.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
4
Connect the clamp at the other end of the negative (black)
cable to a solid, stationary, unpainted metallic point (e.g.
engine hanger) away from the battery. Do not connect it
to or near any part that moves when the engine is
cranked.
CAUTION
If the first start attempt is not successful...
Check that the clamp on the jumper cables are tight. Recharge
the discharged battery with the jumper cables connected for
several minutes and restart your engine in the normal way.
If the another attempt is not successful, the battery may be
depleted. Have it checked at your Lexus dealer.
When making the connections, to avoid serious injury,
do not lean over the battery or accidentally let the
jumper cables or clamps touch anything except the
correct battery terminals or the ground.
5. Charge the discharged battery with the jumper cables
connected for approximately 5 minutes. At this time, run the
engine in the vehicle with the booster battery at about 2000 rpm
with the accelerator pedal lightly depressed.
6. Start your engine in the normal way. After starting, run it at
about 2000 rpm for several minutes with the accelerator pedal
lightly depressed.
7. Carefully disconnect the cables in the exact reverse order:
the negative cable and then the positive cable.
8. Carefully dispose of the battery cover cloths which may now
contain sulfuric acid.
9. If removed, replace all the battery vent plugs.
If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent (for
example, lights left on), you should have it checked at your
Lexus dealer.
495
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU CANNOT INCREASE
ENGINE SPEED
If engine speed does not increase when the accelerator pedal
is depressed, there may be a problem somewhere in the
electronic throttle control system.
At this time, vibration may occur. However, if you depress the
accelerator pedal more firmly and slowly, you can drive your
vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle checked by your
Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Even if the abnormality of the electronic throttle control system
is corrected during low speed driving, the system may not be
recovered until the engine is stopped and the ignition key is
turned to “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
If your engine coolant temperature gauge indicates
overheating, if you experience a loss of power, or if you
hear a loud knocking or pinging noise, the engine has
probably overheated.
When the engine overheats
Pull safely off the road, stop the vehicle and turn on your
emergency flashers. Put the transmission in “P” and apply the
parking brake.
A: If steam is coming from your engine:
Turn off the engine. Leave the hood closed until there is no sign
of steam or coolant. Your engine could have been seriously
damaged already. Call your Lexus dealer for assistance.
CAUTION
Be especially careful to prevent erroneous pedal
operation.
496
CAUTION
To help avoid personal injury, keep the hood closed until
there is no steam. Escaping steam or coolant is sign of
very high pressure.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
B: If no steam is coming from your engine:
Leave the engine running and turn off the air conditioning.
Check the following.
Is the cooling fan operating?
Is the coolant in the acceptable range?
Is the engine drive belt O.K.?
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep hands and clothing
away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping a straight
line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place
— well away from the traffic. Avoid stopping on the
center divider of a highway. Park on a level spot with
firm ground.
2. Stop the engine and turn on your emergency
flashers.
3. F i r m l y s e t t h e p a r k i n g b r a k e a n d p u t t h e
transmission in “P”.
Do not attempt to remove the radiator cap when the
engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury could
result from scalding hot fluid and steam blown out
under pressure.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle on the side
away from traffic.
If the cooling fan is not operating or the coolant is not in the
acceptable range, turn off the engine and call your Lexus
dealer.
CAUTION
If both conditions are O.K., after the engine coolant
temperature has cooled to normal, continue driving your
vehicle.
If the engine coolant temperature does not cool down, or your
vehicle overheats again, have it checked as soon as possible
by your Lexus dealer.
5. Read the following instructions thoroughly.
When jacking, be sure to observe the following
to reduce the possibility of personal injury:
Turn off the active height control suspension
by pushing the active height control switch.
Follow jacking instructions.
497
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Do not put any part of your body under a
vehicle supported by a jack. Personal injury
may occur.
Do not start or run the engine while your
vehicle is supported by the jack.
Stop the vehicle on a level firm ground, firmly
set the parking brake and put the
transmission in “P”.
Block the wheel
diagonally opposite to the one being changed
if necessary.
Make sure to set the jack properly in the jack
point.
Raising the vehicle with jack
improperly positioned will damage the vehicle
or may allow the vehicle to fall off the jack
and cause personal injury.
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle
is supported by the jack alone.
Use the jack only for lifting your vehicle
during wheel changing.
Do not raise the vehicle with someone in the
vehicle.
When raising the vehicle, do not place any
objects on top of or underneath the jack.
Raise the vehicle only high enough to remove
and change the tire.
498
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Do not continue driving with a deflated tire.
Driving even a short distance can damage a
tire and wheel beyond repair.
When jacking up or installing tire chains, be
sure to turn off the rear height control air
suspension with the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch and stop the engine. Otherwise,
the vehicle height may change because of the
automatic leveling function resulting in
accident.
499
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
To remove the tool tray, turn the knob
counterclockwise and open the cover, then pull the
tray out.
To prepare yourself for an emergency, you should
familiarize yourself with the use of the jack and each
tool, and their storage locations.
When storing the jack, put it into place and secure
to prevent it from flying forward during a collision or
sudden braking.
40PY040
1
2
3
Jack
Spare tire
Tool tray
1. Get the tool, jack and spare tire.
500
1
2
3
Jack handle extension with bolt
Jack handle extension without bolt
Jack handle
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
To remove the
compartment:
spare
tire
under
the
luggage
Put a jack handle and jack handle extensions together
as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
Make sure they are securely fixed with the
screws.
When connecting the jack handle extensions, use a
Phillips–head screwdriver or jack handle to tighten the
bolts on the joints as shown in the illustration. When
connecting the jack handle with extension, tighten the
bolt on the joint securely. Make sure the hollow meets
the bolt on every joint when you tighten the bolts.
NOTICE
Tighten all the joints securely. Otherwise, the
extension may come off and it may damage the
paint or vehicle body.
501
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
To remove the spare tire:
1. Open the back door and remove the spare tire
carrier lid using a flat–bladed screwdriver.
2. Insert the end of the jack handle extension into the
lowering screw and put a cloth between the jack
handle extension and rear bumper to protect the
bumper surface.
40PY053
502
1
Lower
2
Raise
3
Cloth
3. Turn the jack handle counterclockwise until the
spare tire completely lowered to the ground. Make
sure the handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack
handle extension.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Vehicles with kinetic dynamic suspension system —
When lowering the spare tire, make sure the spare
tire does not to interfere with the suspension
components. If interference occurs, raise the spare
tire, and pull it toward the rear of the vehicle, and
start again.
4. After the tire is lowered completely to the ground,
remove the holding bracket.
CAUTION
Do not take out the spare tire from under the
vehicle until it is lowered completely to the
ground. When removing the spare tire, take care
that fingers are not pinched between the wheel
and holding bracket.
When storing the spare tire, place it with the outer
side of the wheel facing up. Then secure the tire,
taking care that the tire goes straight up without
catching on any other part, to prevent it from flying
forward during a collision or sudden braking.
503
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Vehicles with kinetic dynamic suspension system —
When raising the spare tire, pull the tire toward the
rear of the vehicle. After raising the tire, visually check
that the tire does not interfere with the suspension
components. If interference occurs, lower the spare
tire and start again.
504
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Tighten the spare tire clamp bolt to hold the
spare wheel carrier by the hook securely.
Vehicles with kinetic dynamic suspension
system — Make sure that the spare tire does
not interfere with the suspension components
when the spare tire is stowed. If interference
occurs, the suspension system will be
damaged.
505
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
2. Block the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
to keep the vehicle from rolling when it is jacked
up.
When blocking the wheel, place a wheel block in front
of one of the front wheels or behind one of the rear
wheels.
3. Remove the wheel ornament.
Pry off the wheel ornament, using the beveled end
of the wheel ornament remover as shown.
CAUTION
Do not try to pull off the ornament by hand.
Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid
unexpected personal injury.
506
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts.
The nuts may loose and the wheels may fall off,
which could cause a serious accident.
4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.
Always loosen the wheel nuts before raising the
vehicle.
Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise to loosen them.
To get maximum leverage, fit the wrench to the nut
so that the handle is on the right side, as shown
above. Grab the wrench near the end of the handle
and pull up on the handle. Be careful that the wrench
does not slip off the nut.
Do not remove the nuts yet — just unscrew them
about one–half turn.
507
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Front
(vehicles
suspension system)
Front (vehicles without
suspension system)
kinetic
with
kinetic
dynamic
dynamic
Rear
5. Position the jack at the jack points as shown.
Front — Under the frame side rail
Rear — Under the rear axle housing
508
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Make sure to place the jack as shown in
illustrations. Otherwise, your vehicle may be
damaged.
Make sure the jack is positioned on a level and solid
surface.
1
2
3
4
Jack
Jack
Jack
Jack
handle end
handle extension with bolt
handle extension without bolt
handle
Put a jack handle, jack handle extensions and jack
handle end together as shown in the illustration.
CAUTION
Make sure they are securely fixed with the
screws.
509
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
When connecting a jack handle extension with a jack
handle end, use a Phillips–head screwdriver or jack
handle to tighten the bolts on the joints as shown in
the illustration. When connecting the jack handle with
extension, tighten the bolt on the jack handle securely.
Make sure the hollow meets the bolt on any joint when
you tighten the bolts.
NOTICE
Tighten all the joints securely. Otherwise, the
extension may come off and it may damage the
paint or vehicle body.
510
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
Never get under the vehicle when the vehicle
is supported by the jack alone.
6. After making sure no one is in the vehicle, raise
it high enough so that the spare tire can be
installed.
Allow for the fact that you need more ground
clearance when putting on the spare tire than when
removing the flat tire.
To raise the vehicle, insert the jack handle extension
into the jack (it is a loose fit) and turn it clockwise
with the handle, making sure the handle remains firmly
fitted onto the jack handle extension. As the jack
touches the vehicle and begins to lift, double–check
that it is properly positioned.
7. Remove the wheel nuts and remove the flat tire.
Lift the flat tire straight off and put it aside.
Roll the spare wheel into position and align the holes
in the wheel with the bolts. Then lift up the wheel
and get at least the top bolt started through its hole.
Wiggle the tire and press it back over the other bolts.
511
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Before putting on the wheel, remove any corrosion
on the mounting surfaces with a wire brush or such.
Installation of wheels without good metal–to–metal
contact at the mounting surface can cause wheel nuts
to loosen and eventually cause a wheel to come off
while driving.
8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts finger tight.
Reinstall the wheel nuts and tighten them as much
as you can by hand. Press the tire back and see
if you can tighten them more.
CAUTION
Never use oil or grease on the bolts or nuts.
Doing so may lead to overtightening the nuts
and damaging the bolts. The nuts may loose and
the wheels may fall off, which could cause a
serious accident. If there is oil or grease on any
bolt or nut, clean it.
512
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
9. Lower the vehicle completely and tighten the
wheel nuts.
When lowering the vehicle, make sure all
portions of your body and all other persons
around will not be injured as the vehicle is
lowered to the ground.
Have the wheel nuts tightened with torque
wrench to 112 N·m (11.5 kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf), as
soon as possible after changing wheels.
Otherwise, the nuts may loosen and the
wheels may fall off, which could cause a
serious accident.
To lower the vehicle, turn the jack handle extension
counterclockwise with the handle, making sure the
handle remains firmly fitted onto the jack handle
extension.
Use only the wheel nut wrench to tighten the nuts.
Do not use other tools or any additional leverage other
than your hands, such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.
Make sure the wrench is securely engaged over the
nut.
Tighten each nut a little at a time in the order shown.
Repeat the process until all the nuts are tight.
513
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
Do not forget to reinstall the tire valve cap as dirt and
moisture could get into the valve core and possible
cause air leakage. If the cap is missing, put a new
one on as soon as possible.
This is the same procedure for changing or rotating
your tires.
CAUTION
10.Reinstall the wheel ornament.
Put the wheel ornament into position and then tap it
firmly with the side or heel of your hand to snap it
into place.
CAUTION
Take due care in handling the ornament to avoid
unexpected personal injury.
11. After changing the wheel, check the air
pressure of the replaced tire. Stow all the tools,
jack and flat tire securely.
If the pressure of the replaced tire is low, drive slowly
to the nearest service station and fill to the correct
pressure.
514
Before driving, make sure all the tools, jack and
flat tire are securely in place in their storage
location to reduce the possibility of personal
injury during a collision or sudden braking.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR VEHICLE BECOMES
STUCK
If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc.,
then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving
it forward and backward.
In this situation, lock the center differential and turn off the
vehicle stability control system.
(For details, see
“Four–wheel drive system” on page 411.)
CAUTION
Do not attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it
forward and backward if people or objects are anywhere
near the vehicle. During the rocking operation the
vehicle may suddenly move forward or backward as it
becomes unstuck, causing injury or damage to nearby
people or objects.
515
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
If you rock your vehicle, observe the following
precautions to prevent damage to the transmission and
other parts.
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting
the selector lever or before the transmission is
completely shifted to forward or reverse gear.
Do not race the engine and avoid spinning the
wheels.
If your vehicle remains stuck after rocking the vehicle
several times, consider other ways such as towing.
516
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOUR VEHICLE NEEDS TO BE
TOWED
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
In consultation with them, have your vehicle towed using
either (a) or (b).
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
(b) Using a flat bed truck
(c) Never tow with a sling type truck
Only when you cannot receive a towing service from a
Lexus dealer or commercial tow truck service, tow your
vehicle carefully in accordance with the instructions
given in “(d) Emergency towing” on page 522.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS:
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by the
state/provincial and local laws. The wheels and axle on the
ground must be in good condition. If they are damaged, use
a towing dolly.
CAUTION
When your vehicle is towed, put the vehicle height in the
“N” (normal) mode and push the “HEIGHT CONTROL
OFF” switch to turn off the rear height control air
suspension. Otherwise, the vehicle height may be
changed in the automatic leveling function, resulting in
accident. For details, see “Rear height control air
suspension” on page 422.
Proper equipment will help ensure that your vehicle is not
damaged while being towed. Commercial operators are
generally aware of the state/provincial and local laws
pertaining to towing.
Your vehicle can be damaged if it is towed incorrectly. Although
most operators know the correct procedure, it is possible to
make a mistake. To avoid damage to your vehicle, make sure
the following precautions are observed. If necessary, show
this page to the tow truck driver.
517
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(a) Towing with a wheel lift type truck
From front
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission
from the front with rear wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the transmission.
518
Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
From rear
Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.
NOTICE
Never tow a vehicle with an automatic transmission
from the rear with front wheels on the ground, as this
may cause serious damage to the transmission.
519
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(b) Using a flat bed truck
Tie down points
If your Lexus is transported by a flat bed, it should be tied
down at locations A and B as shown above.
Rear emergency towing eyelet
520
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
NOTICE
Do not use the rear emergency towing eyelet.
Tie down angle
(c) Towing with a sling type truck
If you use chains or wires to tie down your vehicle, the
angles shaded black must be at 45.
NOTICE
Do not tow with a sling type truck, either from the front
or rear. This may cause body damage.
521
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
(d) Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done
by your Lexus dealer or a commercial tow truck service.
If towing service is not available in an emergency, your
vehicle may be temporarily towed by a cable or chain
secured to the emergency towing eyelet. Use extreme
caution when towing the vehicle.
NOTICE
Only use specified towing eyelet; otherwise your
vehicle may be damaged.
Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on
the ground. This may cause serious damage to the
transmission.
522
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the
brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done only on hard–surfaced
roads for a short distance and at low speeds. Also, the wheels,
axles, drive train, steering and brakes must all be in good
condition.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. Avoid
sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which would
place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelet
and towing cable or chain. The eyelet and towing cable
or chain may break and cause serious injury or damage.
NOTICE
Use only a cable or chain specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain
to the towing eyelet provided.
Before towing, check that the center differential is unlocked.
(The indicator light must be off with the ignition on.) Release
the parking brake and put the transmission in “N”. The ignition
key must be in “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine running).
CAUTION
If the engine is not running, the power assist for the
brakes and steering will not work so steering and
braking will be much harder than usual.
Emergency towing hook precautions:
Before emergency towing, check that the eyelet is not
broken or damaged and that the installation bolts are not
loose.
Fasten the towing cable or chain securely to the hook.
Do not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady and even force.
To avoid damaging the eyelet, do not pull from the side or at
a vertical angle. Always pull straight ahead.
523
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
CAUTION
If the emergency towing eyelet is used to get out when
your vehicle becomes stuck in the mud, sand or other
condition from which the vehicle cannot be driven out
under its own power, make sure to observe the
precautions mentioned below. Otherwise, excessive
stress will be put on the eyelet and the towing cable or
chain may break, causing serious injury or damage.
IF YOU CANNOT SHIFT AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION SELECTOR LEVER
If the towing vehicle can hardly move, do not forcibly
continue the towing. Contact your Lexus dealer or a
commercial tow truck service for assistance.
Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible.
Keep away from the vehicle during towing.
Tips for towing a stuck vehicle:
The following methods are effective to use when your
vehicle is stuck in the mud, sand or other condition from
which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own
power. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. In
addition, keep away from the vehicles and towing cable or
chain when towing.
Remove the sand and soil in the front and the back of the
tires.
Place stones or wood under the tires.
524
If you cannot shift the selector lever out of “P” position to
other positions even though the brake pedal is depressed,
use the shift lock override button as follows:
1
Turn the ignition key to “LOCK”. Make sure the parking
brake is applied.
2
Pry up the cover with a flat–bladed screwdriver or
equivalent.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY
IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS OR
LOCK YOURSELF OUT
You can purchase a new key at your Lexus dealer if you
can give them the key number and master key.
Even if you lose only one key, contact your Lexus dealer to
make a new key. If you lose all your master keys, you cannot
make new keys; the whole engine immobilizer system must be
replaced.
See the suggestion given in “Keys” on page 8.
3
Push down the shift lock override button. You can shift out
of “P” position only while pushing the button.
You can use the wireless remote control system with the new
key. Contact your Lexus dealer for detailed information.
4
Shift into “N” position.
If your keys are locked in the vehicle and you cannot get a
duplicate, many Lexus dealers can still open the door for you
using special tools. If you must break a window to get in, we
suggest breaking the smallest side window because it is the
least expensive to replace. Be extremely cautious to avoid
glass cuts.
Insert the cover. Start the engine. For your safety, keep
the brake pedal depressed.
Be sure to have the system checked by your Lexus dealer as
soon as possible.
525
SECTION
5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance
Maintenance requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Does your vehicle need repairing? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emissions inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
For scheduled maintenance information, please
refer to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/
Scheduled Maintenance”.
526
527
528
531
532
MAINTENANCE
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
Your Lexus vehicle has been designed to have fewer
maintenance requirements with longer service intervals to
save both your time and money. However, each regular
maintenance as well as day–to–day care is more important
than ever before to ensure smooth, trouble–free, safe, and
economical driving.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure the specified
maintenance, including general maintenance services, is
performed. Note that both the new vehicle and emission
control system warranties specify that proper maintenance
and care must be performed. See the “Owner’s Guide”,
“Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for
complete warranty information.
General maintenance
General maintenance items are those day–to–day care
practices that are important to your vehicle for proper
operation. It is the owner’s responsibility to ensure that the
general maintenance items are performed regularly.
These checks or inspections can be done either by yourself or
your Lexus dealer.
Scheduled maintenance
The scheduled maintenance items listed in the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance” are those
required to be serviced at regular intervals.
For details of your maintenance schedule, read the “Owner’s
Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.
It is recommended that only genuine Lexus parts be used
for maintenance or for the repair of the emission control
system.
The owner may elect to use non–Lexus supplied parts for
replacement purposes without invalidating the emission
control system warranty. However, use of replacement
parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the
effectiveness of the emission control systems.
You may also elect to have maintenance, replacement, or
repair of the emission control devices and system
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual without invalidating this warranty.
See
“Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or
“Warranty Booklet” for complete warranty information.
Where to go for service?
Lexus technicians are well–trained specialists and are kept up
to date with the latest service information through technical
bulletins, service tips, and in–dealership training programs.
They are well informed about the operation of all the systems
on your vehicle.
You can be confident that your Lexus dealer’s service
department performs the best job to meet the maintenance
requirements of your vehicle — reliably and economically.
527
MAINTENANCE
Your copy of the repair order is proof that all required
maintenance has been performed for warranty coverage. If
any problems should arise with your vehicle while under
warranty, your Lexus dealer will promptly take care of it. Again,
be sure to keep a copy of the repair order for any service
performed on your Lexus.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be
performed at the intervals specified. It is recommended that
any problem you notice be brought to the attention of your
Lexus dealer or qualified service shop for their advice.
What about do–it–yourself maintenance?
Many of the maintenance items are easy to do yourself, if you
have a little mechanical ability and a few basic automotive
tools. Simple instructions for how to perform them are
presented in Section 6.
If you are a skilled do–it–yourself mechanic, the Lexus service
manuals are recommended.
Please be aware that
do–it–yourself maintenance can affect your warranty
coverage. See your “Owner’s Guide”, “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” or “Warranty Booklet” for the details.
CAUTION
Make these checks only with adequate ventilation if you
run the engine.
Engine compartment
Items listed below should be checked from time to time,
e.g. each time when refueling.
Washer fluid
Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the tank. See page 618 for
additional information.
Engine coolant level
Make sure the coolant level is between the “F” and “L” lines on
the see–through reservoir when the engine is cold. See page
560 for additional information.
Radiator, condenser and hoses
Check that the front of the radiator and condenser are clean
and not blocked with leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 563 for
additional information.
528
MAINTENANCE
Battery
Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
Check the battery condition by the indicator color. See page
608 for additional information.
Check that all service reminder indicators and warning buzzers
function properly.
Brake fluid level
Steering wheel
Make sure the brake fluid level is correct. See page 571 for
additional information.
Check that it has the specified free play. Be alert for changes
in steering condition, such as hard steering, excessive free
play or strange noise.
Engine oil level
Check the level on the dipstick with the engine turned off and
the vehicle parked on a level spot. See page 555 for additional
information.
Power steering fluid level
Check the level through the reservoir. The level should be in
the “HOT” or “COLD” range depending on the fluid
temperature. See page 572 for additional information.
Exhaust system
If you notice any change in the sound of the exhaust or smell
exhaust fumes, have the cause located and corrected
immediately. (See “Engine exhaust caution” on page 396.)
Vehicle interior
Items listed below should be checked regularly, e.g. while
performing periodic services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Lights
Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal
lights, and other lights are working. Check headlight aim.
Seats
Check that all front seat controls such as seat adjusters,
seatback recliner, etc. operate smoothly. Check that the head
restraints move up and down smoothly and that the locks hold
securely in any latched position. For folding–up second and
third seats, and detachable third seat, check that the latches
lock securely.
Seat belts
Check that the seat belt system such as buckles, retractors
and anchors operate properly and smoothly. Make sure the
belt webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or damaged.
Accelerator pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and uneven pedal effort
or catching.
Brake pedal
Check the pedal for smooth operation and the proper
clearance and free play. Check the brake booster function.
529
MAINTENANCE
Brakes
Tire inflation pressure
In a safe place, check that the brakes do not pull to one side
when applied.
Check the pressure with a gauge every two weeks,
or at least once a month and adjust as shown on the
tire pressure label. See page 574 for additional
information.
Parking brake
Check that the lever has the proper travel and that, on a safe
incline, your vehicle is held securely with only the parking brake
applied.
Automatic transmission “Park” mechanism
Check the lock release button of the selector lever for proper
and smooth operation. On a safe incline, check that your
vehicle is held securely with the selector lever in “P” position
and all brakes released.
Vehicle exterior
Items listed below should be performed from time to time,
unless otherwise specified.
Fluid leaks
Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, water or other fluid after
the vehicle has been parked for a while. If you smell fuel fumes
or notice any leak, have the cause found and corrected
immediately.
Doors and engine hood
Check that all side doors and back door, operate smoothly and
all latches lock securely. Make sure the engine hood
secondary latch secures the hood when the primary latch is
released.
530
Tire surface
Check the tires carefully for cuts, damage or
excessive wear.
See page 589 for additional
information.
Wheel nuts
When checking the tires, make sure to check the nuts
for looseness. Tighten them if necessary.
Tire rotation
Rotate the tires according to the maintenance
schedule. (For scheduled maintenance information,
please
refer
to
the
“Owner’s
Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”.) See page 588
for additional information.
MAINTENANCE
DOES YOUR VEHICLE NEED
REPAIRING?
If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to your Lexus
dealer as soon as possible. It probably needs adjustment or
repair.
Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and
visual tip–offs that indicate service is needed. Some important
clues are:
CAUTION
Engine missing, stumbling, or pinging
Appreciable loss of power
Do not continue driving with the vehicle unchecked. It
could result in serious vehicle damage and possibly
personal injury.
Strange engine noises
A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from
the air conditioning after use is normal.)
Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous
carbon monoxide leak. Drive with the windows open and
have the exhaust system checked immediately.)
Flat–looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering,
uneven tire wear
Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level
road
Strange noises related to suspension movement
Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal,
pedal almost touches floors, vehicle pulls to one side when
braking
Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal
531
MAINTENANCE
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE (I/M) PROGRAMS
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs
which include OBD (On–Board Diagnostics) checks.
The OBD system monitors the operation of the emission
control system. When the OBD system determines that a
problem exists somewhere in the emission control system, the
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. In this case, your vehicle
may not pass the I/M test and need to be repaired. Contact
your Lexus dealer to service the vehicle.
Even if the malfunction indicator lamp does not come on, your
vehicle may not pass the I/M test as readiness codes have not
been set in the OBD system.
Readiness codes are automatically set during ordinary driving.
However, when the battery is disconnected or run down, the
codes are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the
codes may not be completely set.
Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had come on recently
due to temporary malfunction such as a loose fuel tank cap,
your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several
driving trips, but the error code in the OBD system will not be
cleared unless about 40 trips or more are taken.
532
If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test and the malfunction
indicator lamp does not come on, contact your Lexus dealer to
prepare the vehicle for re–testing.
MAINTENANCE
533
SECTION
6–1
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Introduction
Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft prevention labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine compartment overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Do–it–yourself service precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parts and tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
534
535
536
537
540
542
INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also on the
Certification Label.
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal
identifier for your vehicle. This number is on the left top
of the instrument panel and can be seen through the
windshield from outside.
This is the primary identification number for your Lexus. It is
used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as
shown.
535
INTRODUCTION
THEFT PREVENTION LABELS
(U.S.A. ONLY)
536
Your new vehicle carries theft prevention labels which are
approximately 56 mm (2.20 in.) by 16 mm (0.63 in.).
The purpose of these labels is to reduce the incidence of
vehicle thefts by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts
from stolen vehicles. The label is designed so that once it is
applied to a surface, any attempt to remove it will result in
destroying the integrity of the label. Transferring these labels
intact from one part to another will be impossible.
INTRODUCTION
NOTICE
You should not attempt to remove the theft prevention
labels as it may violate certain state or federal laws.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT OVERVIEW
61PY009
1
Engine oil level
dipstick
2
Engine oil filler cap
3
Brake fluid reservoir
4
Fuse box
5
Battery
6
Condenser
7
Electric cooling fan
8
Radiator
9
Engine coolant
reservoir
10
Washer fluid tank
11
Power steering fluid
reservoir
537
INTRODUCTION
Removing the engine compartment covers
1
Turn the plastic nuts counterclockwise and remove them.
Before checking the power steering fluid or fuses in the
engine compartment, remove the engine compartment
covers as follows:
2
Push the core of the clips using a Phillips–head
screwdriver and remove the clips.
61PY010
538
INTRODUCTION
3
Remove the covers.
Be careful not to lose the removed plastic nuts and clips.
After checking the items, install the engine compartment
covers and insert the plastic nuts and clips in their original
positions.
When inserting the clips, do as shown above.
NOTICE
After installing the engine compartment covers, make
sure the covers are securely in their original positions.
539
INTRODUCTION
DO–IT–YOURSELF SERVICE
PRECAUTIONS
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the
correct procedure given in this Section.
You should be aware that improper or incomplete servicing
may result in operating problems.
Performing do–it–yourself maintenance during the warranty
period may affect your warranty coverage. Read the separate
Lexus Warranty statement for details and suggestions.
This Section gives instructions only for those items that are
relatively easy for an owner to perform. As explained in
Section 5, there are still a number of items that must be
performed by a qualified technician with special tools.
For information on tools and parts for do–it–yourself
maintenance, see “Parts and tools” on page 542.
Utmost care should be taken when working on your vehicle to
prevent accidental injury. Here are a few precautions that you
should be especially careful to observe:
CAUTION
When the engine is running, keep hands, clothing,
and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive
belt.
(Removing rings, watches, and ties is
advisable.)
Right after driving, the engine compartment — the
engine, radiator, exhaust manifold and power
steering fluid reservoir, etc. — will be hot. So be
careful not to touch them. Oil, other fluids and spark
plugs may also be hot.
If the engine is hot, do not remove the radiator cap or
loosen the drain plugs to prevent burning yourself.
Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as
paper or rags, in the engine compartment.
Do not smoke, cause sparks or allow open flames
around fuel or the battery.
Their fumes are
flammable.
Do not get under your vehicle with just the body jack
supporting it. Always use automotive jack stands or
other solid supports.
Use eye protection whenever you work on or under
your vehicle where you may be exposed to flying or
falling material, fluid spray, etc.
Be extremely cautious when working on the battery.
It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.
540
INTRODUCTION
NOTICE
Remember that battery and ignition cables carry high
currents or voltages. Be careful of accidentally
causing a short circuit.
Before closing the engine hood, check to see that you
have not forgotten any tools, rags, etc.
Do not drive with the air cleaner removed, or
excessive engine wear could result. Also backfiring
could cause a fire in the engine compartment.
Do not overfill automatic transmission fluid and
power steering fluid, or the transmission and power
steering could be damaged.
Be careful not to scratch the glass surface with the
wiper frame.
541
INTRODUCTION
PARTS AND TOOLS
Here is a list of parts and tools you will need to perform
do–it–yourself maintenance. Remember all Lexus parts are
designed in metric sizes, so your tools must be metric.
Checking the engine oil level
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
See page 559 for details about engine oil selection.
Tools:
Rag or paper towel
Funnel (only for adding oil)
542
Checking the engine coolant level
Parts (if level is low):
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite,
and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid
technology (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid
technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic
acids.)
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water (for Canada). This coolant
provides protection down to about –35C (–31F).
Tools:
Funnel (only for adding coolant)
INTRODUCTION
Checking brake fluid
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses
Parts (if level is low):
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Fuse with same amperage rating as original
Tools:
Checking the cartridge type fuses
Rag or paper towel
Parts (if replacement is necessary):
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent with same amperage
rating as original
Checking power steering fluid
Adding washer fluid
Parts (if level is low):
Automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONII
or III
Parts:
Tools:
Water
Rag or paper towel
Washer fluid containing antifreeze (for winter use)
Funnel (only for adding fluid)
Tools:
Checking battery condition
Funnel
Tools:
Warm water
Baking soda
Grease
Conventional wrench (for terminal clamp bolts)
543
INTRODUCTION
544
SECTION
6–2
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Engine
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel pump shut off system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Facts about engine oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Used engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the radiator and condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
546
550
553
553
554
555
560
563
564
545
ENGINE
SPECIFICATIONS
— GENERAL
546
Model
2UZ–FE
Type
8 cylinder V Type, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke
94.0 84.0 mm (3.70 3.31 in.)
Displacement
4664 cm3 (284.5 cu. in.)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.15 — 0.25 mm (0.006 — 0.010 in.)
0.25 — 0.35 mm (0.010 — 0.014 in.)
Drive belt tension
Automatic adjustment
ENGINE
— LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Oil capacity
Drain and refill
with filter
without filter
6.2 L (6.5 qt., 5.5 Imp. qt.)
5.7 L (6.0 qt., 5.0 Imp. qt.)
Oil grade
API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended oil viscosity (SAE):
62Z002
Outside temperature
NOTE:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the above grade and viscosity. Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
547
ENGINE
— COOLING SYSTEM
Capacity
12.9 L (13.6 qt., 11.4 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality
ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite,
and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid
technology (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid
technology is a combination of low phosphates and organic
acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
NOTE:
“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is used in your Lexus vehicle at factory fill. In order to avoid technical problems, only use “Toyota
Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine, non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant
with long–life hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic acid technology is a combination of low
phosphates and organic acids.) Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
— FUEL
548
Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating
87 (Research octane number 91) or higher
ENGINE
— IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plug
— Make
DENSO
NGK
— Gap
SK20R11
IFR6A11
1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
— ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery
Open voltage at 20C (68F):
Charging rates
12.6 — 12.8 V
Fully charged
12.2 — 12.4 V
Half charged
11.8 — 12.0 V
Discharged
[Voltage that is checked 20 minutes after the key is removed
with all the lights turned off]
5 A max.
549
ENGINE
FUEL
Fuel type
Your vehicle must use only unleaded gasoline.
To help prevent gas station mixups, your Lexus has a smaller
fuel tank opening. The special nozzle on pumps with unleaded
fuel will fit it, but the larger standard nozzle on pumps with
leaded gas will not.
NOTICE
Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of leaded gasoline will
cause the three–way catalytic converter to lose its
effectiveness and the emission control system to
function improperly.
Also, this can increase
maintenance costs.
550
At a minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the
specifications of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB
3.5–M93 in Canada.
ENGINE
Octane rating
Quality gasoline
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of
premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.
Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., Europe and Japan
have developed a specification for quality fuel named
World–Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that is expected to be
applied world wide.
The WWFC consists of four
categories that depend on required emission levels. In the
U.S., category 3 has been adopted. The WWFC improves
air quality by providing for better emissions in vehicle
fleets, and customer satisfaction through better vehicle
performance.
Use of unleaded fuel with an octane number or rating lower
than stated above will cause persistent heavy knocking. If
severe, this will lead to engine damage.
If your engine knocks...
If you detect heavy knocking even when using the
recommended fuel, or if you hear steady knocking while
holding a steady speed on level roads, consult your Lexus
dealer.
However, occasionally, you may notice light knocking for a
short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is normal
and there is no need for concern.
Gasoline containing detergent additives
Cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated
gasoline that contains oxygenates such as ethanol or
MTBE is available in many areas.
Lexus recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and
appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of
gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce
vehicle emissions, and improve air quality.
Lexus recommends the use of gasoline that contains
detergent additives to avoid build–up of engine deposits.
However, all gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent
additives to keep clean and/or clean intake systems.
551
ENGINE
Oxygenates in gasoline
Gasoline quality
Lexus allows the use of oxygenate blended gasoline
where the oxygenate content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%
MTBE. If you use gasohol in your Lexus, be sure that it has
an octane rating no lower than 87.
In a very few cases, you may experience driveability problems
caused by the particular gasoline that you are using. If you
continue to have unacceptable driveability, try changing
gasoline brands. If this does not rectify your problem, then
consult your Lexus dealer.
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline containing
methanol.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contain an octane enhancing additive
called
MMT
(Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese
Tricarbonyl).
Lexus does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains
MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control
system may be adversely affected. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens,
contact your Lexus dealer for service.
NOTICE
Do not use gasohol other than stated above. It will
cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
If drivability problems are encountered (poor hot
starting, vaporizing, engine knock, etc.), discontinue
its use.
Take care not to spill gasohol during refueling.
Gasohol may cause paint damage.
Fuel tank capacity
552
87 L (23 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)
ENGINE
FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF SYSTEM
The fuel pump shut off system stops supplying fuel to the
engine to minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine
stalls or an airbag inflates upon collision. To restart the engine
after the fuel pump shut off system activates, turn the ignition
switch to “ACC” or “LOCK” once and start it.
CAUTION
Inspect the ground under the vehicle before restarting
the engine. If you find that liquid has leaked onto the
ground, it is the fuel system that has been damaged and
it is in need of repair. In this case, do not restart the
engine.
FACTS ABOUT ENGINE OIL
CONSUMPTION
Functions of engine oil
Engine oil has the primary function of lubricating and cooling
the inside of the engine, and plays a major role in maintaining
the engine in proper working order.
Engine oil consumption
It is normal that an engine should consume some engine
oil during normal engine operation. The causes of oil
consumption in a normal engine are as follows.
Oil is used to lubricate pistons, piston rings and cylinders.
A thin film of oil is left on the cylinder wall when a piston
moves downwards in the cylinder. High negative pressure
generated when the vehicle is decelerating sucks some of
this oil into the combustion chamber. This oil as well as
some part of the oil film left on the cylinder wall is burned by
the high temperature combustion gases during the
combustion process.
Oil is also used to lubricate the stems of the intake valves.
Some of this oil is sucked into the combustion chamber
together with the intake air and is burned along with the fuel.
High temperature exhaust gases also burn the oil used to
lubricate the exhaust valve stems.
553
ENGINE
The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the
viscosity of the oil, the quality of the oil and the way the
vehicle is driven.
More oil is consumed by high–speed driving and frequent
acceleration and deceleration.
A new engine consumes more oil, since its pistons, piston rings
and cylinder walls have not become conditioned.
Importance of engine oil level check
One of the most important points in proper vehicle
maintenance is to keep the engine oil at the optimum level so
that oil function will not be impaired. Therefore, it is essential
that the oil level be checked regularly. Lexus recommends that
the oil level be checked every time you refuel the vehicle.
Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000 km (1.1 qt./600 miles,
0.9 Imp. qt./600 miles)
When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in
mind that the oil may have become diluted, making it
difficult to judge the true level accurately.
For example, if a vehicle is used for repeated short trips and
consumes a normal amount of oil, the dipstick may not show
any drop in the oil level at all, even after 1000 km (600 miles)
or more. This is because the oil is gradually becoming diluted
with fuel or moisture, making it appear that the oil level has not
changed.
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the vehicle is then
driven at high speeds, as on an expressway, making it appear
that oil is excessively consumed after driving at high speeds.
NOTICE
Failure to check the oil level regularly could lead to
serious engine trouble due to insufficient oil.
For detailed information on oil level check, see “Checking the
engine oil level” described below.
554
USED ENGINE OIL
ENGINE
CAUTION
CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Used engine oil contains potentially harmful
contaminants which may cause skin disorders such
as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be
taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact with
it. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash
thoroughly with soap and water.
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters only in a safe
and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil
and used oil filters in household trash, in sewers or
onto the ground. Call your Lexus dealer or a service
station for information concerning recycling or
disposal.
Do not leave used oil within the reach of children.
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off,
check the oil level on the dipstick.
1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle should be on level
ground. After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes for the
oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.
2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under the end and wipe it
clean.
3. Reinsert the dipstick and push it in as far as it will go, or the
reading will not be correct.
555
ENGINE
1 Add oil
2 O.K.
3 Too full
4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil level while holding a
rag under the end. If it is between the low level mark ( 4 ) and
the full level mark ( 5 ), it is O.K.
NOTICE
Be careful not to drop engine oil on the vehicle
components.
556
ENGINE
If the oil level is below or only slightly above the low line,
add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.
Remove the oil filler cap and add engine oil a little at a time,
checking the dipstick. We recommend that you use a funnel
when adding oil. The approximate quantity of oil needed to
raise the level between low line and full line on the dipstick is
indicated below for reference.
When the level reaches within the correct range, return the filler
cap and turn the cap clockwise until you hear a click.
Oil quantity. L (qt., Imp. qt.)
1.5 (1.6, 1.3)
557
ENGINE
NOTICE
Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle
components.
Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged.
Check the oil level on the dipstick once again after
adding the oil.
558
ENGINE
Engine oil selection
Oil identification marks
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Lexus vehicle. Use
Lexus approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to
satisfy the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil.
Recommended viscosity: SAE 5W–30
62Z002
API Service Symbol
ILSAC Certification Mark
Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil
containers to help you select the oil you should use.
Outside temperature
SAE 5W–30 is the best choice, for good fuel economy and
good starting in cold weather.
If SAE 5W–30 oil is not available, SAE 10W–30 may be
used. However, it should be replaced with SAE 5W–30 at
the next oil change.
The API Service Symbol is located anywhere on the outside
of the container.
The top portion of the label shows the oil quality by API
(American Petroleum Institute) designation such as SL.
The center portion of the label shows the SAE viscosity
grade such as SAE 5W–30. “Energy–Conserving”, shown
in the lower portion, indicates that the oil has fuel–saving
capabilities.
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and
Approval Committee) Certification Mark is displayed on the
front of the container.
559
ENGINE
To ensure excellent lubrication performance for your engine,
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is available, which has been
specifically tested and approved for all Lexus engines.
CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details about
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”.
1 Reservoir cap
3 “L” (lower) line
2 “F” (upper) line
Look at the see–through coolant reservoir when the
engine is cold. The coolant level is satisfactory if it is
between the “F” and “L” lines on the reservoir. If the level
is low, add the coolant. (For the coolant type, see “Coolant
type selection” described below.)
The coolant level in the reservoir will vary with engine
temperature. However, if the level is on or below the “L” line,
add coolant. Bring the level up to the “F” line.
560
ENGINE
If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing,
there may be a leak in the system. Visually check the radiator,
hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap and drain cock
and water pump.
If you can find no leak, have your Lexus dealer test the radiator
cap pressure and check for leaks in the cooling system.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not remove the radiator
cap when the engine is hot.
561
ENGINE
Coolant type selection
Use of improper coolants may damage your engine cooling
system.
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high
quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine,
non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid
organic acid technology. (Coolant with long–life hybrid organic
acid technology is a combination of low phosphates and
organic acids.)
For the U.S.A. — “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture
of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. This coolant
provides protection down to about –35C (–31F).
For Canada — “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture
of 55% coolant and 45% deionized water. This coolant
provides protection down to about –42C (–44F).
NOTICE
Do not use plain water alone.
562
ENGINE
Lexus recommends “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”, which
has been tested to ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor
result in malfunction of your engine coolant system with proper
usage. “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated with
long–life hybrid organic acid technology and has been
specifically designed to avoid engine cooling system
malfunction on Lexus vehicles.
CHECKING THE RADIATOR AND
CONDENSER
If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not
sure of their condition, take your vehicle to a Lexus dealer.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, be careful not to touch the
radiator or condenser when the engine is hot.
NOTICE
To prevent damage to the radiator and condenser, do
not perform the work by yourself.
563
ENGINE
SPARK PLUGS
NOTICE
Use only iridium–tipped spark plugs and do not adjust
gaps for your engine performance and smooth
drivability.
564
Your engine is fitted with iridium–tipped spark plugs.
ENGINE
565
SECTION
6–3
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking power steering fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking tire inflation pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotating tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing snow tires and chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aluminum wheel precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Suspension and chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
566
567
571
572
574
578
587
588
589
591
596
597
597
CHASSIS
SPECIFICATIONS
— DIFFERENTIAL
Oil capacity
Front
Rear
1.4 L (1.5 qt., 1.2 Imp. qt.)
3.1 L (3.3 qt., 2.7 Imp. qt.)
Oil type
Hypoid gear oil API GL–5
Oil viscosity
Above –18C (0F): SAE 90 or SAE 85W–90
Below –18C (0F): SAE 80W or SAE 80W–90
— TRANSFER
Oil capacity
1.4 L (1.5 qt., 1.2 Imp. qt.)
Oil type
Hypoid gear oil API GL–5
Recommended oil viscosity
SAE 75W–90
567
CHASSIS
— AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Fluid capacity
Drain and refill
Up to 3.0 L (3.2 qt., 2.6 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type
Toyota Genuine ATF WS*
*: Change automatic transmission fluid only as necessary.
Generally, it is necessary to change automatic transmission
fluid only if your vehicle is driven under one of the Special
Operating Conditions listed in your “Owner’s Manual
Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance”. When changing the
automatic transmission fluid, use only “Toyota Genuine ATF
WS” (ATF JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring optimum
transmission performance.
568
CHASSIS
NOTICE
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota
Genuine ATF WS” may cause deterioration in shift
quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied
by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic
transmission of your vehicle.
Please contact your Lexus dealer for further details.
— BRAKES
Pedal clearance
52 mm (2.0 in.) Min. *1
Pedal free play
1 — 6 mm (0.04 — 0.24 in.)
Brake pad wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake lining wear limit
1.0 mm (0.04 in.)
Parking brake adjustment
5 — 7 clicks *2
Fluid type
SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3
*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with the force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf) with the engine running
*2: Parking brake adjustment when pulled with the force of 196 N (20 kgf, 44 lbf)
569
CHASSIS
— CHASSIS LUBRICATION
Propeller shafts
Spiders
Slide yoke
Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
Molybdenum–disulfide lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2 or
lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2
— STEERING
Free play
Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)
Power steering fluid
Automatic transmission fluid DEXRONII or III
— TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire size
P265/65R17 110S
Tire inflation pressure
Recommended cold tire inflation
pressure
220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
Wheel size
17 7 1/2 JJ
Wheel nut torque
112 N·m (11.5 kgf·m, 83 ft·lbf)
NOTE:
For complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pressure”
through “Aluminum wheel precautions” on pages 574 through 597.
570
CHASSIS
CHECKING BRAKE FLUID
Refilling brake fluid:
1. Turn the ignition switch off.
2. Depress the brake pedal more than 20 times (until the brake
pedal resistance decreases and pedal travel increases).
3. Remove the reservoir cap by hand. Add brake fluid up to the
“MAX” line.
If you do not follow the procedure above, the reservoir may
overflow.
Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once opened, brake fluid
absorbs moisture from the air, and excess moisture can cause
a dangerous loss of braking efficiency.
To check the fluid level, simply look at the see–through
reservoir. The level should be between the “MAX” and
“MIN” lines on the tank.
CAUTION
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the
brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is
high.
Take care when filling the reservoir because brake fluid
can harm your hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your hands
or in your eyes, flush the affected area with clean water
immediately. If you still feel uncomfortable with your
hands or eyes, go to the doctor.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious
mechanical problem.
If the level is low, add FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703
brake fluid to the brake reservoir.
NOTICE
If you spill some of the fluid, be sure to wipe it off to
prevent it from damaging the parts or paintwork.
571
CHASSIS
CHECKING POWER STEERING
FLUID
The power steering fluid reservoir is located under the
right side engine compartment cover. Before checking
the power steering fluid, remove the cover. (For details,
see “Removing the engine compart covers” on page 538.)
1 If cold O.K.
4 If hot add
Check the fluid level, simply look at the see–through
reservoir. If necessary, add automatic transmission fluid
DEXRONII or III.
If the vehicle has been driven around 80 km/h (50 mph) for 20
minutes (a little more in frigid temperatures), the fluid is hot
(60C – 80C or 140F – 175F). You may also check the level
when the fluid is cold (about room temperature, 10C – 30C
or 50F – 85F) if the engine has not been run for about five
hours.
572
2 If cold add
3 If hot O.K.
Clean all dirt off the reservoir and look at the fluid level. If the
fluid is cold, the level should be in the “COLD” range. Similarly,
if it is hot, the fluid level should be in the “HOT” range. If the
level is at the low side of the appropriate range, add automatic
transmission fluid DEXRONII or III to bring the level within
the range.
To remove the reservoir cap, turn it counterclockwise and lift
up. To reinstall it, turn it clockwise. After replacing the reservoir
cap, visually check the steering box case, vane pump and hose
connections for leaks or damage.
CHASSIS
CAUTION
The reservoir may be hot so be careful not to burn
yourself.
NOTICE
Avoid overfilling, or the power steering could be
damaged.
When adding the power steering fluid, avoid spilling
it. The generator under the power steering reservoir
could be damaged if fluid is spilled on it.
573
CHASSIS
CHECKING TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE
The recommended cold tire inflation pressures,
tire sizes and the combined weight of occupants
and cargo (vehicle capacity weight) are described
on page 570 and 627. They are also described
on the tire and loading information label as
shown.
You should check the tire inflation pressure every two
weeks, or at least once a month. And do not forget
the spare!
The following instructions for checking
inflation pressure should be observed:
63PY020
tire
The pressure should be checked only when the
tires are cold. If your vehicle has been parked
for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for
more than 1.5 km or 1 mile since, you will get an
accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.
If you cannot adjust the tire pressure when the
tires are cold, add 20 kPa (0.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 2.9
psi) to 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2 or bar, 4.3 psi) more
to the front tires and rear tires than the cold tire
pressure, but never exceed the maximum cold tire
pressure molded on the tire sidewall.
574
CHASSIS
Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The
appearance of a tire can be misleading. Besides,
tire inflation pressures that are even just a few
pounds off can degrade handling and ride.
Inspection and adjustment procedure
Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure
after driving. It is normal for the tire inflation
pressure to be higher after driving.
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be located
so that the vehicle is balanced.
1
2
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
1. Remove the tire valve cap.
2. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge to the tire
valve.
3. Read the pressure using the graduations of the
gauge.
4. In case the tire inflation pressure is not within the
prescribed range, insert the compressed air from the
valve. In case of applying too much air, press the
center of the valve and release the air to adjust.
575
CHASSIS
5. After completing the tire inflation pressure
measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to
the valve and check for leakage.
6. Install the tire valve cap.
If a gauge and air pump are not available, have your
vehicle checked by your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. Without
the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into
the valve core and cause air leakage. If the caps
have been lost, have new ones put on as soon
as possible.
NOTICE
Use only the original valve cap. If any other
valve cap is used, it may corrode or melt and
become difficult or impossible to remove.
576
CHASSIS
Incorrect tire inflation pressure may waste fuel, reduce
the comfort of driving, reduce tire life and make your
vehicle less safe to drive.
If a tire frequently needs refilling, have it checked by
your Lexus dealer.
CAUTION
High tire pressure (overinflation) —
Poor handling
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the
following conditions may occur and cause an
accident resulting in death or serious injuries.
Low tire pressure (underinflation) —
Excessive wear
Uneven wear
Poor handling
Possibility of blowouts from an overheated
tire
Poor sealing of the tire bead
Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
A greater possibility of tire damage from road
hazards
577
CHASSIS
TIRE INFORMATION
Tire symbols
63PY018
The illustration indicates typical tire symbols.
578
CHASSIS
1
Tire size: For details, see “Tire size” on page
580.
2
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN): For
details, see “DOT and Tire Identification Number
(TIN)” on page 580.
3
Location of the tread wear indicators: For
details, see “Checking and replacing tires” on
page 589.
4
Tire ply composition and materials: Plies mean
a layer of rubber–coated parallel cords. Cords
mean the strands forming the plies in the tire.
5
Radial tires or bias–ply tires: A radial tire has
“RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked with
“RADIAL” is a bias–ply tire.
6
“TUBELESS” or “TUBE TYPE”: A tubeless tire
does not have a tube inside the tire. A tube type
tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube
maintains the air pressure.
7
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation
pressure: For details, see “Checking and
replacing tires” on page 589.
8
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure: This
means the pressure to which a tire may be
inflated. For details about recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, see “Specifications” on page
567.
9
Uniform tire quality grading: For details, see
“Uniform tire quality grading” that follows.
10
Summer tire or all season tire: An all season
tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. The tire not
marked with “M+S” is a summer tire. For details,
see “Types of tires” on page 587.
579
CHASSIS
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Tire size
The illustration indicates typical DOT and Tire
Identification Number (TIN).
1 “DOT” symbol
2 Tire Identification Number (TIN)
3 Tire manufacturer’s identification mark
4 Tire size code
5 Manufacturer’s optional tire type code
6 Manufacturing week
7 Manufacturing year
The illustration indicates typical tire size.
1 Tire use (P=Passenger car, T=Temporary
use)
2 Section width (in millimeters)
3 Aspect ratio (tire height to section width)
4 Tire construction code
(R=Radial, D=Diagonal)
5 Wheel diameter (in inches)
6 Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)
7 Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)
The “DOT” symbol certifies that the tire conforms to
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
580
CHASSIS
Name of each section of tire
1
2
3
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
1 Bead
2 Sidewall
3 Shoulder
4 Tread
5 Belt
6 Inner liner
7 Reinforcing
8 Carcass
9 Rim lines
10 Bead wires
11 Chafer
rubber
581
CHASSIS
Uniform tire quality grading
This information has been prepared in accordance
with regulations issued by the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S.
Department of Transportation. It provides the
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of
Lexus vehicles with information on uniform tire
quality grading.
Your Lexus dealer will help answer any questions
you may have as you read this information.
DOT quality grades — All passenger car tires must
conform to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
582
Treadwear — The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and a half (1 — 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C — The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they
represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement
as measured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and
does not include cornering (turning) traction.
CHASSIS
Temperature A, B, C — The temperature grades are
A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s
resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the tire
to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance which
all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B
and A represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by
law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
583
CHASSIS
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term
584
Meaning
Accessory weight
the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be replaced)
of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power
seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items are available as
factory–installed equipment (whether installed or not)
Cold tire inflation
pressure
tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours or
more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile under that condition
Curb weight
the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the maximum
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air conditioning and
additional weight optional engine
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper
than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side
that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle
Maximum inflation
pressure
the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it is
shown on the sidewall of the tire
Maximum loaded
vehicle weight
the
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
Normal occupant
weight
68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of
Table 1 that follows
sum of —
curb weight;
accessory weight;
vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight
CHASSIS
Tire related term
Meaning
Occupant distribution
distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table 1
that follows
Production options
weight
the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing over
2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim
Recommended
inflation pressure
cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer
Rim
a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads
are seated
Rim diameter (Wheel
diameter)
nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation
rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code
Rim width
nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight
(Total load capacity)
the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s
designated seating capacity
Vehicle maximum
load on the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two
585
CHASSIS
Tire related term
Meaning
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its
share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight
(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two
Weather side
the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire
Table 1 — Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating
capacities
586
Designated seating capacity,
number of occupants
Vehicle normal load, number of
occupants
Occupant distribution in a
normally loaded vehicle
2 through 4
2
2 in front
5 through 10
3
2 in front, 1 in second seat
CHASSIS
TYPES OF TIRES
Determine what kind of tires your vehicle is originally
equipped with.
1. Summer tires
Summer tires are high–speed capability tires best
suited to highway driving under dry conditions.
Since summer tires do not have the same traction
performance as snow tires, summer tires are
inadequate for driving on snow–covered or icy roads.
For driving on snow–covered or icy roads, we
recommend using snow tires. If installing snow tires,
be sure to replace all four tires.
2. All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction
in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter
conditions, as well as for use all year round.
All season tires, however, do not have adequate
traction performance compared with snow tires in
heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short
in acceleration and handling performance compared
with summer tires in highway driving.
The details about how to distinguish summer tires
from all season tires are described on page 578.
CAUTION
Do not mix summer and all season tires on
your vehicle as this can cause dangerous
handling characteristics, resulting in loss of
control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
designated tires, and never mix tires or
wheels of the sizes different from the
originals.
587
CHASSIS
ROTATING TIRES
When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and
damage.
Abnormal wear is usually caused by
incorrect tire pressure, improper wheel alignment,
out–of–balance wheels, or severe braking.
Before storing radial, snow or studded tires, mark the
direction of rotation and be sure to install them in the
same direction when using them again. Tires should
be stored in a cool dry place.
To equalize tire wear and help extend tire life,
Lexus recommends that you rotate your tires
according to the maintenance schedule. (For
scheduled maintenance information, please refer
to the “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance”.) However, the most appropriate
timing for tire rotation may vary according to your
driving habits and road surface conditions.
The wheel assemblies must be rotated as illustrated
above.
588
CHASSIS
CHECKING AND REPLACING TIRES
When to replace your tires
The tires on your Lexus have built–in tread wear
indicators to help you know when the tires need
replacement. When the tread depth wears to 1.6 mm
(0.06 in.) or less, the indicators will appear. If you
can see the indicators in two or more adjacent
grooves, the tire should be replaced.
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost if the tread
wears down below 4 mm (0.16 in.).
If you have tire damage such as cuts, splits,
cracks deep enough to expose the fabric, or
bulges indicating internal damage, the tire should
be replaced.
1
3
New tread
Worn tread
2
Tread wear indicator
Replace the tires when the tread wear indicators
show. The location of the tread wear indicators
is shown by the marks such as “TWI” or “∆”
marks, etc., molded on the sidewall of each tire.
If a tire often goes flat or cannot be properly repaired
due to the size or location of a cut or other damage,
it should be replaced. If you are not sure, consult
with your Lexus dealer.
If air loss occurs while driving, do not continue driving.
Driving even a short distance can damage a tire
beyond repair.
Any tires which are over 6 years old must be
checked by a qualified technician even if damage
is not obvious.
Tires deteriorate with age even if they have never or
seldom been used.
589
CHASSIS
This applies also to the spare tire and tires stored
for future use.
Tire selection
When replacing a tire, use a tire of the same size
and construction, and the same or greater load
capacity as the originally installed tires. Also, all
the tires must be the same brand and have the
same tread patterns.
Using any other size or type of tire may seriously
affect
handling,
ride,
speedometer/odometer
calibration, ground clearance, and clearance between
the body and tires or snow chains.
Check that the maximum load of the replaced tire is
greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings
(GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle,
whichever is greater. As for the maximum load of
the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire
inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire,
and as for the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR),
see the Certification Label.
For details about
Certification Label and sidewall of the tire, see pages
535 and 578.
590
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise,
an accident may occur resulting in death or
serious injuries.
Do not mix radial, bias belted, or bias–ply tires
on your vehicle, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of
control.
Do not use tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause
dangerous handling characteristics resulting
in loss of control.
Do not use tires of different brands, sizes,
construction or tread patterns, as this may
cause dangerous handling characteristics
resulting in loss of control.
CHASSIS
INSTALLING SNOW TIRES AND
CHAINS
When to use snow tires or chains
Snow tires or chains are recommended when driving on
snow or ice.
On wet or dry roads, conventional or radial tires provide better
traction than snow or studded tires.
Snow tire selection
If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size,
construction and load capacity as the originally installed
tires. Also, all the tires must be the same brand and have
the same tread patterns.
Do not use tires other than stated above. Since your vehicle
has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires
without first checking local regulations for possible restrictions.
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use snow tires other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use snow tires of different brands, sizes,
construction or tread patterns, as this may cause
dangerous handling characteristics resulting in loss
of control.
Snow tire installation
Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.
Installing snow tires on the rear wheels only can lead to an
excessive difference in road grip capability between the front
and rear tires which could cause loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION
Do not drive with the snow tires incorrectly inflated.
Never drive over 105 km/h (65 mph) with any type of
snow tires.
591
CHASSIS
Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary
according to location or type of road. Always check local
regulations before installing chains.
Tire chain selection
1
Side chain
2
Cross chain
Use the tire chains of correct size.
For P265/65R17 tires, use the following type chains.
mm
A: Diameter of side chain
(0.20)
B: Width of side chain
18.0
(0.71)
C: Length of side chain
46.0
(1.81)
D: Width of cross chain
22.6
(0.89)
E: Length of cross chain
38.1
(1.5)
6.3
(0.25)
F: Diameter of cross chain
592
5.0
(in.)
CHASSIS
NOTICE
If the wrong combination of tire and chain is used, the
chains could damage the vehicle body.
593
CHASSIS
Chain installation
Install the chains on the rear tires as tightly as possible.
Do not use tire chains on the front tires. Retighten chains
after driving 0.5 — 1.0 km (1/4 — 1/2 mile).
When installing chains on your tires, carefully follow the
instructions of the chain manufacturer.
CAUTION
Do not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or the chain
manufacturer’s
recommended
speed
limit,
whichever is lower.
Drive carefully avoiding bumps, holes, and sharp
turns, which may cause the vehicle to bounce.
Avoid sharp turns or locked–wheel braking, as use of
chains may adversely affect vehicle handling.
When driving with chains installed, be sure to drive
carefully. Slow down before entering curves to avoid
losing control of the vehicle. Otherwise an accident
may occur.
594
CHASSIS
NOTICE
When jacking up or installing tire chains, be sure to turn
off the rear height control air suspension with the
“HEIGHT CONTROL OFF” switch and stop the engine.
Otherwise, the vehicle height may change because of
the automatic leveling function resulting in accident.
595
CHASSIS
REPLACING WHEELS
When to replace your wheels
If you have wheel damage such as bending, cracks or
heavy corrosion, the wheel should be replaced.
If you fail to replace a damaged wheel, the tire may slip off the
wheel or cause loss of handling control.
Replacement with used wheels is not recommended as they
may have been subjected to rough treatment or high mileage
and could fail without warning. Also, bent wheels which have
been straightened may have hidden structural damage and
therefore should not be used. Never use an inner tube in a
leaking wheel which is designed for a tubeless tire.
Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure
that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity,
diameter, rim width, and offset.
Correct replacement wheels are available at your Lexus
dealer.
A wheel of a different size or type may adversely affect
handling, wheel and bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer/odometer calibration, stopping ability, headlight
aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clearance, and tire or snow
chain clearance to the body and chassis.
596
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions. Otherwise, an
accident may occur resulting in death or serious
injuries.
Do not use wheels other than the manufacturer’s
recommended size, as this may cause dangerous
handling characteristics resulting in loss of control.
Do not use wheels of different brands, sizes and
types, as this may cause dangerous handling
characteristics resulting in loss of control.
CHASSIS
ALUMINUM WHEEL PRECAUTIONS
SUSPENSION AND CHASSIS
When installing aluminum wheels, check that the wheel nuts
are tight after driving your vehicle the first 1600 km (1000
miles).
CAUTION
If you have rotated, repaired, or changed your tires, check
that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000
miles).
Do not modify the suspension/chassis with lift kits,
spacers, springs, etc. It can cause dangerous handling
characteristics, resulting in loss of control.
When using tire chains, be careful not to damage the
aluminum wheels.
Use only Lexus wheel nuts and wrench designed for your
aluminum wheels.
When balancing your wheels, use only Lexus balance
weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer.
As with any wheel, periodically check your aluminum
wheels for damage. If damaged, replace immediately.
597
SECTION
6–4
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Electrical components
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking battery condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Battery recharging precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking and replacing the blade type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking the cartridge type fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
598
599
608
613
614
616
618
619
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
SPECIFICATIONS
— FUSE LOCATIONS
64PY003
1 Engine compartment
2 Driver’s side instrument panel
— FUSES
64PY020
Engine compartment
599
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Driver’s side instrument panel
600
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
1
SPARE
10
Spare fuse
ALT
140
Charging system and all
components in “AM1”,
“HEATER”, “CDS FAN”, “FR
FOG”, “DEFOG”, “AIR SUS”,
“AC INV”, “SEAT HEATER”,
“OBD”, “STOP”, “J/B”, “RR AC”,
“MIR HEATER”, “BATT CHG”,
“TOWING BRK” and “TOWING”
fuses
3
SPARE
15
Spare fuse
4
HEATER
50
Air conditioning system
5
AIR
SUS
50
Rear height control air
suspension
2
CIRCUIT
6
AM1
50
All components in “ACC”, “CIG”,
“IG1”, “FR WIP–WSH”, “RR
WIP”, “RR WSH”, “DIFF”,
“ECU–IG”, “TEMS” and “STA”
fuses
7
TOWING
BRK
30
Trailer brake controller
8
J/B
50
All components in “P FR P/W”,
“P RR P/W”, “D RR P/W”, “D
P/SEAT”, “P P/SEAT”, “TAIL”,
“PANEL” and “POWER OR
TI&TE” fuses
9
BATT
CHG
30
Trailer sub battery
10
TOWING
40
Trailer lights
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
601
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
602
11
CDS FAN
20
Electric cooling fan
12
RR A/C
30
Rear air conditioning system
13
MIR
HEATER
10
Outside rear view mirror
defogger
14
STOP
10
Stop lights, high mounted
stoplight, shift lock control
system, vehicle stability control
system, electronic modulated
suspension, rear height control
air suspension, multiport fuel
injection system/sequential
multiport fuel injection system
15
AC INV
15
Power outlet (115 VAC)
16
FR FOG
15
Front fog lights
17
OBD
7.5
On–board diagnosis system
18
HEAD
(LO RH)
10
Right–hand headlight (low beam)
19
HEAD
(LO LH)
10
Left–hand headlight (low beam)
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
20
HEAD
(HI RH)
10
Right–hand headlight (high
beam)
21
HEAD
(HI LH)
10
Left–hand headlight (high beam)
22
EFI NO.2
10
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
23
HEATER
NO.2
7.5
Air conditioning system
CIRCUIT
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
24
DEFOG
30
Rear window defogger
25
AIRSUS
NO.2
10
Rear height control air
suspension
26
SEAT
HEATER
20
Seat heaters
27
DOME
10
Ignition switch light, interior
lights, personal lights, foot
lights, running board lights,
door courtesy lights, inside
door handle lights,
multi–information display
28
RADIO
NO.1
20
Audio system, navigation
system
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
29
ECU–B
10
Multiplex communication
system, vehicle stability control
system, wireless remote
control system, inside rear
view mirror, air conditioning
system, electronic modulated
suspension, driving position
memory system, power
windows, moon roof, rear view
monitor system
30
ECU–B
NO.2
10
Theft deterrent system
31
ABS
MTR
40
Anti–lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system,
active traction control system,
brake assist system
32
AM2
30
Starting system, all components
in “IGN”, “SRS”, “GAUGE” and
“ST2” fuses
603
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
604
Anti–lock brake system,
vehicle stability control system,
active traction control system,
brake assist system
ABS
SOL
30
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
34
ALT–S
7.5
Charging system
35
MAYDAY
7.5
No circuit
36
HORN
10
Horns
37
A/F
HEATER
15
A/F sensor
38
TRN–HAZ
15
Turn signal lights
39
ETCS
10
Electronic throttle control system
40
EFI
20
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
41
D FR P/W
20
Power window
42
DR/LCK
25
Power door lock
43
TOWING
30
Towing converter
44
RADIO
NO.2
30
Audio system, navigation
system
45
A/PUMP
50
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
46
IGN
10
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, vehicle
stability control system
33
CIRCUIT
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
47
SRS
10
SRS airbag system, front
passenger occupant
classification system
Gauges and meters
48
GAUGE
7.5
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
49
ST2
7.5
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
50
FR
WIP–WSH
30
Windshield wipers, windshield
washer
51
TEMS
20
Electronic
suspension
52
DIFF
20
Four–wheel drive system
53
RR WIP
15
Rear window wiper
54
D P/SEAT
30
Driver’s power seat
55
P P/SEAT
30
Front passenger’s power seat
56
PWR
OUTLET
15
Power outlet (12 VDC)
57
IG1 NO.2
10
Rear air conditioning system,
inside rear view mirror, kinetic
dynamic suspension system
58
RR WSH
15
Rear window washer
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
CIRCUIT
modulated
CIRCUIT
605
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
606
59
ECU–IG
10
Shift lock control system, power
windows, outside rear view
mirror defogger, anti–lock brake
system, active traction control
system, vehicle stability control
system, air conditioning system,
navigation system, power
windows, moon roof, tilt and
telescopic steering,
multi–information display,
driving position memory
system, rear view monitor
system, tire pressure warning
system
60
IG1
10
Air conditioning system, back–up
lights, rear window defogger,
seat heaters, vehicle stability
control system
61
STA
7.5
Multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system
62
P FR P/W
20
Front passenger’s power window
63
P RR P/W
20
Rear right side power window
No.
FUSE
AMPERE
64
D RR P/W
20
Rear left side power window
65
PANEL
10
Instrument panel lights
66
TAIL
10
Parking lights, tail lights, license
plate lights, front fog lights
CIRCUIT
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
ACC
7.5
Shift lock control system, power
outlets, outside rear view
mirrors, audio system, navigation
system, power rear view mirrors,
multi–information display, rear
view monitor system
68
CIG
10
Cigarette lighter
69
POWER
OR TI&TE
30
Power windows, moon roof, tilt
and telescopic steering
67
607
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION
Precautions
CAUTION
BATTERY PRECAUTIONS
The battery produces flammable and explosive
hydrogen gas.
Do not cause a spark by contacting the battery
terminals with tools.
Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
The electrolyte contains poisonous and corrosive
sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with eyes, skin or clothes.
Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
Wear protective safety glasses when working near
the battery.
Keep children away from the battery.
EMERGENCY MEASURES
If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with
clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate
medical attention. If possible, continue to apply
water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the
medical office.
608
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you feel a pain or burn, get medical
attention immediately.
If electrolyte gets on your clothes, there is a
possibility of its soaking through to your skin, so
immediately take off the exposed clothing and follow
the procedure above, if necessary.
If you accidentally to swallow electrolyte, drink a
large quantity of water or milk. Follow with milk of
magnesia, beaten raw egg or vegetable oil. Then go
immediately for emergency help.
609
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Checking battery exterior
1 Terminals
2 Hold–down clamp
Check the battery for corroded or loose connections,
cracks, or loose hold–down clamps.
1. If the battery is corroded, wash it off with a solution of warm
water and baking soda. Coat the terminals with grease to
prevent further corrosion.
2. If the connections are loose, tighten the clamp bolts — but
do not overtighten.
3. Tighten the hold–down clamp only enough to keep the
battery firmly in place. Overtightening may damage the battery
case.
610
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
Make sure the engine and all accessories are turned
off before performing maintenance.
When checking the battery, remove the ground cable
first and reinstall it last.
Be careful not to cause a short circuit with tools.
Take care no solution gets into the battery when
washing it.
If the battery is disconnected or run down
Checking battery condition
The power windows and moon roof may not operate
automatically and the jam protection function will not function
correctly after you reconnect, replace or recharge the battery.
In any of these cases, you should normalize the power
windows and moon roof. To normalize the power windows and
moon roof, see pages 50 and 118.
Check the battery condition by the indicator color.
1
BLUE — Good condition.
2
WHITE — Charging necessary.
checked by your Lexus dealer.
3
RED — Have the battery checked by your Lexus dealer.
Have the battery
611
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
NOTICE
Do not refill the battery with water.
612
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
BATTERY RECHARGING
PRECAUTIONS
During recharging, the battery is producing hydrogen
gas.
Therefore, before recharging:
1. If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be
sure to disconnect the ground cable.
CAUTION
Always charge the battery in an unconfined area. Do
not charge the battery in a garage or closed room
where there is not sufficient ventilation.
Only do a slow charge (5 A or less). Charging at a
quicker rate is dangerous. The battery may explode
causing personal injuries.
2. Make sure the power switch on the recharger is off when
connecting the charger cables to the battery and when
disconnecting them.
NOTICE
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running.
Also, make sure all accessories are turned off.
613
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
CHECKING AND REPLACING THE
BLADE TYPE FUSES
The engine compartment fuse box is located under the left
side engine compartment cover. Before checking the
engine compartment fuses, remove the cover. (For
details, see “Removing the engine compartment covers”
on page 538.)
Driver’s side instrument panel
1. Turn the ignition switch off and open the fuse box lid.
Determine which fuse may be causing the problem. The lid of
the fuse box shows the name of the circuit for each fuse.
Engine compartment 1 Pull–out tool 2 Spare fuses
614
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
2. Make sure the inoperative component is turned off. Pull
the suspected fuse straight out with the pull–out tool and
check it. If it has blown, push a new fuse into the clips.
Good
Blown
a. Look carefully at the fuse. If the thin wire is broken, the fuse
has blown. If you are not sure or if it is too dark to see, try
replacing the suspected fuse with one of the same value that
you know is good.
b. Only install a fuse with the amperage rating designated on
the fuse box lid.
If you do not have a spare fuse, in an emergency you can pull
out the “CIG”, “RADIO NO.1” or “SEAT HEATER” fuse, which
may be dispensable for normal driving, and use it if its
amperage rating is the same.
If you cannot use one of the same amperage, use one that is
lower, but as close to the rating as possible. If the amperage
is lower than that specified, the fuse might blow out again but
this does not indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get the
correct fuse as soon as possible and return the substitute to its
original clips.
615
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
It is a good idea to purchase a set of spare fuses and keep them
in your vehicle for emergencies.
If the new fuse immediately blows out, there is a problem with
the electrical system. Have your Lexus dealer correct it as
soon as possible.
CAUTION
CHECKING THE CARTRIDGE TYPE
FUSES
The engine compartment fuse box is located under the left
side engine compartment cover. Before checking the
engine compartment fuses, remove the cover. (For
details, see “Removing the engine compartment covers”
on page 538.)
Never use a fuse with a higher amperage rating, or any
other object, in place of a fuse. This may cause
extensive damage and possibly a fire.
Engine compartment
616
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
If the headlights or other electrical components do not
work and the blade type fuses are O.K., check the
cartridge type fuses. If any of the cartridge type fuses are
blown, they must be replaced.
If there is an overload in the circuits from the battery, the fuses
are designed to blow before the entire wiring harness is
damaged.
CAUTION
Driver’s side instrument panel
Good
Always use a genuine Lexus fuse or equivalent for
replacement. Never install an ordinary wire — even for
a temporary fix. This may cause extensive damage and
possibly a fire.
Blown
NOTICE
Before replacing the fuses, have the cause of electrical
overload determined and repaired by your Lexus dealer.
617
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
ADDING WASHER FLUID
If the washer tank becomes nearly empty, add washer
fluid.
You may use plain water as washer fluid. However, in cold
areas where temperatures range below the freezing point, use
washer fluid containing antifreeze. This product is available at
your Lexus dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow the
manufacturer’s directions for how much to mix with water.
NOTICE
Do not use engine antifreeze or any other substitute
because it may damage your vehicle’s paint.
618
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
REPLACING LIGHT BULBS
The illustrations on the following pages show the locations of
light bulbs. If it is necessary to replace a bulb, take your vehicle
to your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. Use bulbs with the
bulb numbers and wattage ratings given in the table.
CAUTION
To prevent burning yourself, do not replace the light
bulbs while they are hot.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and
require special handling. They can burst or shatter if
scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb only by its plastic
or metal case. Do not touch the glass part of a bulb
with bare hands.
NOTICE
Only use a bulb of the listed type.
619
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
The inside of the lens of exterior lights such as headlights may
temporarily fog up when the lens becomes wet in the rain or in
a car wash. This is not a problem because the fogging is
caused by the temperature difference between the outside and
inside of the lens, just like the windshield fogs up in the rain.
However, if there is a large drop of water on the inside of the
lens, or if there is water pooled inside the light, contact your
Lexus dealer.
620
LIGHT LOCATION
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
1
Headlights (High beam)
9005
60
A
2
Headlights (Low beam)
––
55
B
3
Front side marker lights
4
Front turn signal lights
5
6
168
5
C
4157NAK
27/8
D
Parking lights
168
5
C
Fog lights
––
55
E
621
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Light Bulbs
622
Bulb No.
W
Type
7
Running board lights
194
3.8
C
8
Rear turn signal lights
7440
21
C
9
Stop/tail lights
7443
21/5
C
10
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights
7443
21/5
C
11
Back–up lights
7440
21
C
12
License plate lights
168
5
C
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Light Bulbs
Bulb No.
W
Type
13
Vanity lights
––
2
F
14
Personal lights
––
8
G
15
Interior lights
––
8
F
16
Door courtesy lights
––
3.8
G
17
Glove box light
––
1.2
C
623
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
A: HB3 halogen bulbs
B: H11 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)
D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: H3 halogen bulbs
F: Double end bulbs
G: Single end bulbs
624
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
625
SECTION
6–5
SERVICE PROCEDURES AND
SPECIFICATIONS
Body
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Washing and waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning the interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rain clearing mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
626
627
629
630
633
638
BODY
SPECIFICATIONS
— DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length
4780 mm (188.2 in.)
Overall width
1880 mm (74.0 in.)
Overall
height*1
1855 mm (73.0 in.)*2
1895 mm (74.6 in.)*3
Wheelbase
2790 mm (109.8 in.)
Tread
1585 mm (62.4 in.)
1585 mm (62.4 in.)
— Front
— Rear
Vehicle capacity weight
(occupants + luggage)
With third seats
Without third seats
544 kg (1200 lb.)
454 kg (1000 lb.)
Towing capacity
2948 kg (6500 lb.)
*1: Unladen vehicle
*2: Without roof luggage carrier
*3: With roof luggage carrier
627
BODY
— FUEL TANK
Capacity
628
87 L (23 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)
BODY
PROTECTING YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
Proper care of your Lexus can help ensure long–term
corrosion prevention.
The most common causes of corrosion to your vehicle
are:
The accumulation of road salt, dirt and moisture in
hard–to–reach areas under the vehicle.
Chipping of paint or undercoating caused by minor
accidents or by stones and gravel.
The following conditions will cause or accelerate
corrosion of your vehicle, so it is important to keep your
vehicle, particularly the underside, as clean as possible
and to repair any damage to paint or protective coatings
as soon as possible.
The presence of road salt or dust control chemicals, salt in
the air near the sea coast, industrial air pollution.
High humidity, especially at temperatures just above
freezing point.
Certain parts of your vehicle are wet or damp for an
extended period of time, even though other parts of the
vehicle are dry.
To help prevent corrosion on your Lexus, follow these
guidelines:
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing. In addition,
observe the following points.
If you drive on salted roads in the winter or if you live near
the ocean, you should hose off the undercarriage at least
once a month to minimize corrosion.
High pressure water or steam is effective for cleaning the
vehicle’s underside and wheel housings. Pay particular
attention to these areas as it is difficult to see all the mud and
dirt. It will do more harm than good to simply wet the mud
and debris without removing. The lower edge of doors,
rocker panels and frame members have drain holes which
should not be allowed to clog with dirt as trapped water in
these areas can cause corrosion.
Wash the underside of the vehicle thoroughly when winter
is over.
See “Washing and waxing” on page 630 for more tips.
Check the condition of your vehicle’s paint and trim. If you
find any chips or scratches in the paint, touch them up
immediately to prevent corrosion from starting. If the chips or
scratches have gone through the bare metal, have a qualified
body shop make the repair.
Components of the vehicle which are prevented from
quick–drying due to lack of proper ventilation are exposed
to high ambient temperature.
629
BODY
Check the interior of your vehicle. Water and dirt can
accumulate under the floor mats and could cause corrosion.
Occasionally check under the mats to make sure the area is
dry. Be particularly careful when transporting chemicals,
cleansers, fertilizers, salt, etc. These should be transported in
proper containers. If a spill or leak should occur, immediately
clean and dry the area.
Use mud shields on your wheels. If you drive on salted or
gravel roads, mud shields help protect your vehicle. Full–size
shields, which come as near to the ground as possible, are the
best. We recommend that the fittings and the area where the
shields are installed be treated to resist corrosion. Your Lexus
dealer will be happy to assist in supplying and installing the
shields if they are recommended for your area.
Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated garage or a roofed
place. Do not park your vehicle in a damp, poorly
ventilated garage. If you wash your vehicle in the garage, or
if you drive it covered with water or snow, your garage may be
so damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your garage is heated,
a wet vehicle can corrode if the ventilation is poor.
WASHING AND WAXING
Washing your Lexus
Keep your vehicle clean by regular washing.
The following cases may cause weakness to the paint or
corrosion to the body and parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as
possible.
When driving in a coastal area
When driving on a road sprinkled with antifreeze
When exposed to coal tar, tree sap, bird droppings and
carcass of an insect
When driving in areas where there is a lot of smoke, soot,
dust, iron dust or chemical substances
When the vehicle becomes remarkably dirty with dust and
mud
Hand–washing your Lexus
Work in the shade and wait until the vehicle body is not hot
to the touch.
1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Remove any mud or road
salt from the underside of the vehicle or in the wheel wells.
2. Wash with a mild car–wash soap, mixed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and keep it
wet by dipping it frequently into the wash water. Do not rub hard
— let the soap and water remove the dirt.
630
BODY
Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high–pressure car wash,
for example) at or near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler door
opened. If the water enters the air vent, you may experience
trouble with refueling or rough engine idling.
Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic wheel ornaments are
damaged easily by organic substances. If any organic
substance splashes an ornament, be sure to wash it off with
water and check if the ornament is damaged.
Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap or neutral detergent.
Urethane bumpers and side moldings: Wash carefully. Do
not scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper and side
molding faces are soft.
Road tar: Remove with turpentine or cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces.
CAUTION
Do not attach the heavily damaged plastic wheel
ornament. It may fly off the wheel and cause accidents
while the vehicle is moving.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (gasoline, kerosene,
benzine or strong solvents), which may be toxic or
cause damage.
631
BODY
3. Rinse thoroughly — dried soap can cause streaking. In hot
weather you may need to rinse each section right after you
wash it.
4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle using a clean soft
cotton towel. Do not rub or press hard — you might scratch the
paint.
Automatic car wash
Your vehicle may be washed in an automatic car wash, but
remember that the paint can be scratched by some types of
brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the washing process
itself. Scratching reduces paint durability and gloss, especially
on darker colors. The manager of the car wash should be able
to advise you whether the process is safe for the paint on your
vehicle.
632
Waxing your Lexus
Polishing and waxing is recommended to maintain the
original beauty of your Lexus’ finish.
Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle surface does not repel
water well.
1. Always wash and dry the vehicle before you begin waxing,
even if you are using a combined cleaner and wax.
2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If the finish has become
extremely weathered, use a car–cleaning polish, followed by
a separate wax.
Carefully follow the manufacturer’s
instructions and precautions. Be sure to polish and wax the
chrome trim as well as the paint.
3. Wax the vehicle again when water does not bead but
remains on the surface in large patches.
BODY
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water, or allow water
to get onto the floor when cleaning the vehicle interior
or exterior. Water may get into audio components or
other electrical components above or under the floor
carpet (or mat) and cause a malfunction; and it may
cause body corrosion.
Leather–trimmed Interior
Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened with 5% solution of
neutral detergent for wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces
of detergent with a clean damp cloth.
After cleaning or whenever any part of the leather gets wet, dry
with a soft clean cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a ventilated
shaded area.
633
BODY
NOTICE
If a stain should fail to come out with a neutral
detergent, apply a cleaner that does not contain an
organic solvent.
Never use organic substances such as benzine,
alcohol or gasoline, or alkaline or acid solutions for
cleaning the leather as these could cause
discoloring.
Use of a nylon brush or synthetic fiber cloth, etc. may
scratch the fine grained surface of the leather.
Mildew may develop on soiled leather upholstery. Be
especially careful to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your
upholstery always clean.
Long exposure to direct sunlight may cause the
leather surface to harden and shrink. Keep your
vehicle in a shaded area, especially in the summer.
The interior of your vehicle is apt to heat up on hot
summer days, so avoid placing on the upholstery
items made of vinyl or plastic or containing wax as
these tend to stick to leather when warm.
Improper cleaning of the leather upholstery could
result in discoloration or staining.
634
BODY
Non–leather Trim
(Part of door panels)
The non–leather trim may be easily cleaned with a mild
soap or detergent and water.
First vacuum over the upholstery to remove loose dirt. Then,
using a sponge or soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the
synthetic leather. After allowing it to soak in for a few minutes
to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt and wipe off the soap with a
clean damp cloth. If all the dirt does not come off, repeat the
procedure. Commercial foaming–type cleaners are also
available which work well.
Follow the manufacturer’s
instructions.
NOTICE
Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline or window cleaner
on the interior.
635
BODY
Carpets, Windows and Seat Belts
Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove as much dirt as
possible. Several types of foam cleaners are available; some
are in aerosol cans and others are powders or liquids which
you mix with water to produce a foam. To shampoo the
carpets, use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in
overlapping circles. Do not apply water — the best results are
obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possible. Read the
shampoo instructions and follow them closely.
The seat belts may be cleaned with mild soap and water or
with lukewarm water.
Use a cloth or sponge. As you are cleaning, check the belts for
excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
636
BODY
NOTICE
Use a good foam–type shampoo to clean the carpets.
Do not use dye or bleach on the belts — it may
weaken them.
Do not use the belts until they become dry.
The windows may be cleaned with any household
window cleaner.
Do not apply detergent to or wet the automatic wiper
control sensor when cleaning the inside of the
windshield.
When cleaning the inside of the quarter and rear
windows, be careful not to scratch or damage the
wire antennas, heater wires or connectors.
637
BODY
Air Conditioning Control Panel, Audio Panel,
Instrument Panel, Console Panel and
Switches
Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.
Soak a clean soft cloth in water or lukewarm water then lightly
wipe off any dirt.
NOTICE
Do not use organic substances (solvents, kerosene,
alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.
These chemicals can cause discoloring, staining or
peeling of the surface.
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make sure
their ingredients do not include the substances
mentioned above.
If you use a liquid car freshener, do not spill the liquid
onto the vehicle’s interior surfaces. It may contain
the ingredients mentioned above. Immediately clean
any spill using the method mentioned above.
If you have any questions about the cleaning of your
Lexus, your local Lexus dealer will be pleased to answer
them.
RAIN CLEARING MIRRORS
The rear view mirrors have been coated to produce a “rain
clearing” effect. This coating causes the raindrops to
spread, clearing the driver’s rear view when it rains.
It is sufficient to wash the mirrors with water for day to day care.
The rain clearing effect is reduced in drizzle and light rain.
In the following cases, the rain clearing effect will be reduced
temporarily, but will gradually recover.
After wiping dirt off the mirrors
When the mirrors fog up
638
BODY
After waxing your vehicle in an automatic car wash
After your vehicle has been parked for a long period in
underground parking lots, etc. where there is no direct
sunlight.
If you would like to restore the rain clearing effect to its normal
level immediately in the above cases, wash the mirrors with
neutral detergent, then rinse thoroughly.
639
BODY
NOTICE
To maintain the rain clearing ability, and prevent the
mirrors from being scratched, observe the following
precautions.
Do not use any glass cleaners that contain
compounds.
If ice should jam the mirror, do not scrape the mirror.
Use a spray de–icer to free the mirror.
Wash off any wax stuck to the mirrors with neutral
detergent and rinse thoroughly as any wax on the
surface of the mirrors can cause the rain clearing
effect to be lost.
Do not use any water repellents as they can destroy
the rain clearing effect. If any repellent gets stuck on
the surface of the mirrors, wash it off with neutral
detergent, then rinse thoroughly.
640
BODY
641
SECTION
7
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
642
KEYS AND DOORS
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
FOR U.S. OWNERS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc. (Toll–free: 1–800–25–LEXUS).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open
an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot
become involved in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A.,
Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll–free at 1–800–424–9393 (or
366–0123 in Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
643
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Fuel selection:
Select Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or
higher. For improved vehicle performance, the use of
premium unleaded gasoline with an Octane Rating of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or higher is recommended.
Fuel tank capacity:
87 L (23 gal., 19.1 Imp. gal.)
Engine oil:
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent
Oil grade: API grade SL “Energy–Conserving” or ILSAC
multigrade engine oil.
Recommended oil viscosity: SAE 5W–30
Oil capacity:
Drain and refill
With filter
6.2 L (6.5 qt., 5.5 Imp. qt.)
Without filter 5.7 L (6.0 qt., 5.0 Imp. qt.)
See page 555 for detailed information.
Engine coolant:
Capacity: 12.9 L (13.6 qt., 11.4 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type — “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar
high quality ethylene glycol based non–silicate, non–amine,
non–nitrite, and non–borate coolant with long–life hybrid
organic acid technology (Coolant with long–life hybrid
organic acid technology is a combination of low phosphates
and organic acids.)
Do not use plain water alone.
For checking the engine coolant, see page 560.
Automatic transmission:
Fluid type — “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”
See page 568 for detailed information.
Tire information:
See pages 574 through 597 for detailed information.
Tire inflation pressure:
Tire size: P265/65R17 110S
Tire inflation pressure: 220 kPa (2.2 kgf/cm2 or bar, 32 psi)
You should know as much about the quality and
importance of proper maintenance of your new
vehicle as the people who built it.
The Lexus authorized Repair Manual tells you
how to maintain your vehicle and enables you to
correctly perform your own maintenance.
The best way to keep your new vehicle in top running
order is to maintain it properly from the moment you
drive it off the showroom floor.
The Lexus authorized Repair Manual is packed with
literally everything you need to know to perform your
own maintenance in virtually every area of your new
vehicle.
cm–1
Maintenance procedures for the engine, chassis,
body, electrical system, and more, are clearly
explained and illustrated.
Periodic maintenance and tune–up
Periodic maintenance and tune–up helps to prevent small
problems from growing into larger ones later on. The repair
manual outlines exactly what maintenance is required and
clearly explains how to do the work yourself step–by–step.
Areas covered include such things as spark plug replacement,
valve clearance adjustment and engine oil and filter
replacement.
cm–2
Where to obtain the
Repair Manual
The repair manual for GX470 may be purchased from any
Lexus dealer or the Material Distribution Center. To purchase
the repair manual, please contact your Lexus dealer or call the
Material Distribution Center toll–free at 1–800–622–2033.
WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU − PLEASE BUCKLE UP
Lexus has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.
Lexus belts are:
Comfortable
Easy to use
Convenient
We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.
2005 GX470 from Nov. ’04 Prod. (OM60B11U)
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement